hpcl specification

7/23/2019 HPCL Specification

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hpcl-specification 1/245

15 119 HB 11577:7d4c6224d ff23e24f 81 da78b8fd87

Delivery Terms - Free to Destination location unless specified otherwise. Validity of offer - 90 days from the initial or extended Due Date for submission

of Tender whichever is later unless specified otherwise. Liquidated Damages accepted unless specified otherwise.

In case bidder does not deviate from the standard offer validity in on line deviation form, bid’s offer validity shall be considered as mentioned above.

In case a Revised priced bid is initiated for this tender, at a later date (eg Technical evaluation stage etc), it shall be incumbent upon the bidder to submit

revised bids for the specified items/entire tender. In the absence of revised bids rom the bidder within specified time period, the original bid submitted by

the bidder shall not be considered for evaluation.

HPCL reserves the right to reveal the contents of the bid documents submitted by the vendor during the witness bid opening process as per prevailing

policy of the corporation.

Tender No. : 15000119-HB-11577 Tender Published On : 25-Nov-2015 14:23

Basic Information Of Tender

Title Composite work @ MP2 Instn KBS

Description COMPOSITE WORK FOR MP2 INSTALLATION IN KHOPOLI

Tender Type Limited

Tender Scope Domestic

Bid Type Two Bid

Evaluation Criteria Overall L1 for all items

Tender Due Date & Time 09-Dec-2015 15:00

Pre Bid Conference Start Date & Time

Pre Bid Conference End Date & Time

Queries Start Date & Time 25-Nov-2015 15:00

Quries End Date & Time 02-Dec-2015 15:00

Un Priced Bid Open Date & Time 09-Dec-2015 15:30

Purchase Deptt. PURCHASE DEPT- MPPL

TF/EMD Drop Box Address NA

Tender Description Digitally signed and encrypted bids under two bid system are invited from shortlisted bidders for Composite work forinstallation of 2650 KW Pump MP2 under capacity Augmentation project of Mumbai pune Solapur Pipe at KhopoliBooster Station,HPCL as per the specifications, terms and conditions enclosed with the tender enquiry.

Notice Inviting Tender

Currency Type Tender Fee EMD

INR 0.0 0.0

itally signed byJAIAHANEKULAte: 2015.12.0757:51 IST



DK:7d4c6224d ff23e24f 8 da78b8fd87

Document Generated Date & Time : Mon Dec 07 14:50:21 IST 2015

24004565 : NARMADA OFFSHORE CONSTRUCTIONS (P) LTD

15000119-HB-11577::Tender Documents

Description HPCL File

Spec TC and STC Spec TC and STC.pdf

Old pump GA drawing Old pump GA drawing.PDF

New Pump GA drawing New Pump GA drawing.pdf

Instructions to Bidders ITB Tender.pdf

Taxes for services Taxes for Services.pdf GTC for works contract GTC for works contract.pdf

Tips on bid submission TipsBidsubmission.pdf



HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITEDTENDER FOR COMPOSITE WORK FOR PUMP MP2 INSTALLATION AT KHOPOLI BOOSTER STATION

UNDER CAPACITY AUGMENTATION PROJECT

MUMBAI-PUNE-SOLAPUR PIPELEINE

Page 1 of 185 Seal & Signature of Tenderer

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITEDMUMBAI PUNE SOLAPUR PIPELINE

KHOPOLI BOOSTER STATION

MOGALWADI, KHOPOLI

RAIGAD – 410203

TENDER DOCUMENT

FOR

COMPOSITE WORK FOR

PUMP MP2 INSTALLATION

AT

KHOPOLI BOOSTER STATION







INDEX

1. INTRODUCTION

2. SCOPE

3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION -CIVIL WORKS

4. SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT

5. SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION AND ERECTION

6. SPECIFICATION FOR INSPECTION,FLUSHING AND TESTING

7.

SPECIFICATION FOR NON DESTRUCTION EXAMINATION8. STRAINER SPEC

9. TECHNICAL NOTES PIPE

10. WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR THE PIPING

11. NEW PUMP GA DRAWING

12. OLD PUMP GA DRAWING

13. SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

14. MEASUREMENT OF WORK

15. LIST OF SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR BOUGHT-OUT ITEMS

16. SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY

17.

GENERAL TERMS & CONDITION







INTRODUCTION

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL), a Govt. of India undertaking, is operating508 km long, 14” / 12” dia Mumbai – Pune – Sholapur underground petroleum product

cross country pipeline for transportation of white oil products from Mumbai Refinery to

Pune and Sholapur.

This Mumbai to Loni section was commissioned in 1986 with a designed thruput of 2.6

MMTPA, which was further augmented in 1993 by addition of Booster Stations at Khopoli

and Talegaon to enhance the overall thruput to 3.67 MMTPA. This pipeline was further

extended from Loni to Solapur via Hazarwadi and Pakni with additional booster station at

Vashi in the year 2006.

HPCL now proposes to augment the capacity of MPSPL from 3.67MMTPA to 5.1MMTPA.

This document covers minimum requirements for various piping materials necessary for the

design of the piping/pipeline facilities proposed under the Capacity Augmentation of MPSPL

project at Khopoli Booster Station situated at Raigad. This specification shall be read in

conjunction with various codes and standards as

applicable.

ADDRESS OF THE LOCATION

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD.

MUMBAI PUNE SOLAPUR PIPELINE

Khopoli Booster Station

Khopoli, Mugalwadi, Tal: Khalapur

District –Raigad-410203

Maharashtra

Tel : 02192-264322/282280

CONTACT PERSONS

Mr. Sanjay Kumar Dewangan (9860021528), Email id: [email protected]

Mr. Rajesh B Kamble, Location-in-Charge, (9867678846), Email id : [email protected]







SCOPE

BREIF SCOPE

1. This document covers the details of work tendered as described below, detailed scope of

work, detailed scope of supply and other requirements pertaining to work of piping,

mechanical works, Civil works such as revamping of existing high pressure pumping

facilities, piping works, new pump installation (2650kw rating), structural works, pump

foundation works, Misc civil works, hookup with existing piping, etc. Works related to other

disciplines is covered elsewhere in the tender. Radiography of weld joints to be carried out

as per specification. Welding procedure qualification, Welders Qualification and

Radiography interpretation to be carried out by approved Third party Inspection agency.

2. WORK TENDERED

Work tendered as a part of this tender document consists of the following;

1. Station piping works consisting of installation of piping manifold including hook up

with piping at piping/pipeline battery limit, filtering, metering facilities, and mainline

pumps.

2. Carrying out all associated and other mechanical equipment, pressure vessels, rotating

equipment, civil, and all other works detailed elsewhere in the tender.

3. All works related to cleaning, flushing, hydro testing and dewatering of piping facilities and

all other pre-commissioning checks as applicable.

4. Carrying out pre-commissioning of terminal piping and associated facilities and providing

Commissioning assistance to the Company during overall commissioning of the piping

system. Company shall carry out final commissioning of the piping and associated facilities.

5. Provide complete details of manpower, equipment etc. to be deployed. Mobilizing and

providing all equipment’s, manpower (skilled and unskilled), consumable and otherresources etc. as required for the execution of the complete job defined herein.

3. DETAILED SCOPE OF WORK

The Contractor’s Scope of Work for the work tendered shall consist of, but not be limited to,

supply (as indicated in Scope of Supply), installation, testing, pre-commissioning and

commissioning assistance station piping complete, with all associated mechanical, civil,

structural, architectural, rotating equipment’s, pressure vessels as applicable including all

such works which though specifically not indicated here but will otherwise be required to

complete the WORK in all respects.







Scope of work indicated below shall be read in conjunction with Schedule of Rates,

drawings, specifications and other requirements forming part of the Bid/Contract

document.

4. PIPING WORKS

The Composite works related to fabrication, erection, testing, pre-commissioning and

commissioning of piping is as elaborated below:

a. Preliminary equipment layouts for all the Station are included in the Composite Tender.

These drawings are indicative only and are furnished to enable the Bidder to understand

the nature of work involved. Company is getting the detailed engineering carried out for the

piping works and Approved for Construction (AFC) piping general arrangement drawings(GADs) shall be progressively furnished by the Company to the successful Contractor, at an

appropriate time at project execution stage.

b. Contractor shall carry out all works strictly in accordance with the Approved for

Construction (AFC) drawings and reference specifications/standards, documents, data

sheets etc. enclosed with this tender document and instructions of Company/Engineer-in-

Charge and other provisions of Contract document.

c. Providing all equipment’s, manpower, machinery, consumables for fabrication, installation,

inspection, testing and pre-commissioning and assistance during commissioning; all types of

safety tools, tackles, devices and apparatus, equipment etc. including ladders and

scaffolding etc. complete as required including providing all types of consumables, tools,

tackles and facilities for inspection and interpretation of testing results by

Company/Company's Representative personnel.

d. Furnishing and mobilizing at site(s) of all construction equipment, tools and tackles, fully

equipped and fully manned with other required support facilities etc. needed for successful

execution of the works.

e. “Receiving and taking over” of all Company supplied free issue materials from the

Company’s designated place(s) of issue, transportation including loading, unloading,

handling from Company’s designated place(s) of issue to Contractor’s own stock yard(s)/

work site(s)/work shop(s) including arranging all necessary intermediate storage area(s)

thereof as required till the permanent installation of materials.

f. Procurement and supply of all materials, equipment’s that are included in the scope of

supply of Contractor, transportation of all materials from manufacturer’s works including

loading, unloading, handling, storing and transportation to work site(s)/work shop(s)

including arranging all necessary intermediate storage area(s) thereof, as required.







g. Contractor shall arrange all kinds material handling equipment, manpower, tools, tackles,

etc. as required for unloading of all Free-Issue materials at Company Warehouses as and

when instructed by HPCL.

h. Fabrication, erection, installation, testing of all above-ground/buried process and utility

piping systems including piping for mainline pumps, booster pumps, filters, metering etc.

consisting of pipes, valves (manual and actuated), flanges, fittings, etc.; carrying out all

associated works

i. Carrying out welding including cutting, edge preparation (inclusive of grinding the edges of

pipe, fittings, flanges, etc. to match with the matching edges of different thickness

wherever required), fit-up, bending, pre heating wherever required, NDT including

radiography and other non-destructive tests as specified.

j. Hydrotesting, dewatering, flushing, pre-commissioning and commissioning assistance

activities of piping system of all sizes as per specifications enclosed including supply of all

materials and manpower that are required during pre-commissioning and commissioning

and all associated works.

k. Repair of leaks/burst, not attributable to Contractor, occurring in Company supplied

material shall be carried out by the Contractor and the Contractor shall be compensated as

per provisions of the contract. However, repair of such defects attributable to Contractor,

shall be carried out by Contractor, at no extra cost to Company.

l. Supply and fabrication including hydrotesting of auxiliary spool pieces for flow meter

assembly.

m. Installation of all types of valves (manual/actuated), all types of inline/online instruments

such as , thermal relief safety valves (other than those covered separately), flow control

valves, flow meters with flow straighteners, flow elements, safety valves, tapping for

thermowells, sample connections, pressure gauges, corrosion monitoring system etc. for all

sizes and ratings including installation of all types of strainers including fixing of gaskets,

bolts, studs and nuts of all sizes, ratings and materials.

n. All associated civil, structural, mechanical, including supply of all materials as required,

unless covered separately elsewhere in the tender, including construction of foundations

for equipment and pipe supports, sleepers, fabrication and erection of supporting structural

elements for piping such as shoes, clamps, anchors, guides, insert plates, brackets,

structural column etc.

o. Hook-up of piping with equipment’s & vessels, with the main pipeline and at the battery

limit with the facilities installed by others by welding or by flanged connection (as shown in

AFC drawings) including cutting of temporary spool or test header, fit-up, welding, NDT,

radiography, interface/co-ordination as required with other Contractor(s)/Agencies.







p. Painting of all equipment’s, pipe supports, piping and all miscellaneous items as required

with paints suitable for normal corrosive environment in accordance with, suitable for

design temperature indicated in Line List.

q. Corrosion protection coating of all field weld joints for buried piping of all sizes including

supply of all materials.

r. Final clean up and restoration of site, facilities etc. as per the requirement of

Company/Engineer-in-Charge.

s. Preparation of isometrics and/or fabrication drawings required for the purpose of

fabrication during execution of work.

t. Transportation and stacking of all surplus Company supplied free issue material to

Company’s designated store after completion of works or as directed by Engineer-in-

Charge.

u. Preparation of as-built drawings, documents and project records as per instructions of

Engineer-in-Charge.

v. Co-ordination as required with other Agencies/Contractor(s) till the time the commissioning

operations are complete.

w.

Preparation of detailed procedures for fabrication, installation, testing and

precommissioning. Such procedures shall be submitted to Company/Engineer-in-Charge for

review and approval.

x. Fabrication and erection of piping supports and change of existing support/additional

supports installed by others/pipeline contractor as directed by Engineer-in charge.

y. Providing brackets from existing structure/ other structures for pipe support; modifications/

extension of platforms/extension of walkways, providing additional platforms/ ladders for

improving/ providing accessibility.

z. All works related to hook-up with associated piping and piping works at the proposed

terminal location. Hook up can be flanged or butt-weld connection. For butt weld

connection complete cutting, bevelling, nitrogen purging (if required) during hook up shall

be in the scope of contractor.

aa. Changes in the pipe routing at site as per site conditions to clear obstructions/ fouling with

already installed piping and new facilities

bb. Any other works not specifically listed herein but required for completion of the works in all

respects.







cc. The complete piping shall be carried out in accordance with the following: • ‘Approved for

construction’ piping GADs, P&ID, piping support standard/drawings and support index,

piping material specification, Plan drawings and sketches issued by Company.

dd. Bill of material required for supply & installation of piping supports will be worked out by

Contractor as per the Support Standard attached with Bid. Type of supports shall be

informed after detail engineering.

ee. Any other Drawings, sketches and documents prepared by contractor duly approved by

Engineer in charge.

ff. Technical Specifications/Documents is enclosed with the tender.

gg. Following codes standards and regulations:

OISD 214 Cross Country LPG Pipelines

ASME B31.4 Pressure piping

ASME Sec. VIII Code for pressure vessel.

IS: 823 code for procedure for manual metal arc welding of mild steel (for structuralsteel)

ASME Sec. V boiler and pressure vessel code

All the codes referred above shall be latest edition, at the time of award of contract

SITE VISITS

For verification of the existing facilities/facilities under installation by others, bidders are

advised to make site visits to Despatch, Receipt and Intermediate locations and make his own

assessment with regard to nature of work involved.

It is advised that the bidders make note of the Tie-in locations during the site visit to

familiarize themselves with respect to the scope of work involved in the existing facilities.

HYDROSTATIC TESTING

All piping in Terminals up to the hook-up point/battery limit shall be hydrostatically tested. The

test pressure and test medium is indicated in Line List Document, enclosed with the Tender and

shall be in accordance with "Specification for Inspection, Flushing and Testing of Piping")







enclosed with the tender document. All valves in the piping network being hydrotested shall be

kept in the crack-open position. Holding time shall be six hours.

WORK PERMITS

Contractor shall obtain the necessary approvals, work permits and statutory permits for all

works from the Company and other authorities (wherever applicable) before the actual works

and all stipulations/ conditions/ recommendations of the said authorities shall be strictly

complied with at no extra cost to Company. Company may, however assist the Contractors for

obtaining such permission to the extent of issuing recommendations letters only.

PRIORITIES

Company may, at its sole option, assign priority of construction to any part or segment of the

work area. Contractor shall comply with such priority of execution without any cost and time

implication to the Company.

NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING (NDT)

NDT requirements for process and other piping shall be in accordance with Piping Material

Specification. Repeat Radiography due to defective radiograph on repaired joints due to

Contractor’s fault and/ or additional radiography necessitated due to poor performance of

Contractor’s welders shall be done at Contractor’s cost.

ISOMETRICS

The Contractor shall prepare all isometrics required for fabrication of piping.

WORKING IN AREAS WITH FACILITIES UNDER INSTALLATION/ALREADY INSTALLED BY OTHERS

Works which are to be carried out in terminals with facilities under installation/already installed

by others, Contractor shall obtain all necessary permissions for working in/around such facility

and shall be fully responsible for the safety of the such facilities/areas during all phases of work

and shall fully abide by and comply with the restrictions and conditions imposed on Contractor

from time to time. The Contractor shall provide all safety appliances, fire screens required

during execution of the work.

HOOK-UP AT TERMINALS

Hook-up of piping with equipments & vessels, with the piping/pipeline battery limit and at the

battery limit with the facilities installed by others by welding or by flanged connection (as

shown in AFC drawings) including cutting of temporary spool or test header, bevelling, fit-up,

welding, NDT, radiography, interface/co-ordination as required with other

Contractor(s)/Agencies. No extra payment shall be made for these jobs. Contractor shall takecare of this in the rates quoted them.







PRE-COMMISSIONING OF TERMINAL PIPING AND COMMISSIONING ASSISTANCE

Contractor shall be responsible for pre-commissioning of the piping and other facilities at

terminal being installed by him. This shall include P&ID checks (with respect to requirement of

design/ operation/ safety and interlocks of latest revision of P&IDs), flushing/swabbing (as

required), tightness test, de-watering, and supply of consumables required during

precommissioning.

Contactor shall be responsible for pre-commissioning activities and providing commissioning

assistance to the Company including supply of manpower, materials, equipment along with

necessary piping and instrumentation connections for monitoring flow rate, pressure,

temperature etc. temporary venting/blow down along with necessary piping, valves andinstrumentation as well as consumables.

The above shall include pre-commissioning activities and all other activities detailed in

respective specification enclosed with the tender document.

COMMISSIONING

Overall commissioning of the entire piping system shall be carried out by Company. However,

all assistance including supply of manpower, temporary equipment, tools and tackles etc.

during commissioning shall be provided by Contractor. Contractor shall retain minimum

manpower required to rectify the workmanship defects, if any, noted during commissioning.

6. SCOPE OF SUPPLY

COMPANY SCOPE OF SUPPLY

Company shall supply the following materials that are required for permanent installation of

the piping system to the Contractor at an appropriate time during the execution stage as free

issue materials:

a) Piping, Manual Plug, gate, globe and check valves of sizes 6” and above and all ratings.

b) Automated Valves of all size and ratings.

c) Owner has significant quantities of pipes, flanges, pipe fittings and valves available at

Owner's stores. These shall be issued to Contractor as free issue, from stores defined in the

tender document, during contract execution. The quantity of these items included presently

in Contractor's scope of supply, shall be correspondingly reduced. Contractor shall carryout

reconciliation of MTO w.r.t. above items before placement of orders.







CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY

The procurement and supply, in sequence and at the appropriate time & place, includinginspection and expediting of all materials, (including any additional materials required for

permanent installation), and consumables required for completion of the work as defined in

this tender document except the materials specifically listed above as Company supplied free-

issue material, shall be entirely the Contractor's responsibility. The item rates quoted for

execution of work shall be inclusive of all these materials. All materials supplied by the

Contractor shall be strictly in accordance with the requirements of relevant applicable

Company Material Specifications, PMS and Technical Notes, data sheets etc. for various items

enclosed with the tender document. All equipment, materials, components etc. shall be new

and specifically purchased for this job from Company approved vendors, duly inspected by

Company approved third party inspection agency (Only manufacturer’s certificates shall not beadequate). Contractor shall submit all detail/drawings etc. to company for review and approval

before placement of order. As a minimum, such materials to be supplied by the Contractor

shall include, but not limited to the following:

a) All equipment and consumables for welding such as welding electrodes, oxygen,

acetylene, inert gases, all types of electrodes, filler wires, brazing rods, flux etc. for

welding/cutting and soldering purposes.

b) All materials including consumables required for hook-up wherever required.

c) All materials and consumables i.e. fittings, flanges, valves, blind flanges etc. required

for isolation and nitrogen purging for pipeline/piping section(s), including supply of

nitrogen for purging, to carry out hook up with existing/already installed

pipeline/piping.

d) All temporary materials required for filling, pressurizing and dewatering in connection

with hydrostatic testing including pipes, flanges, blind flanges, fittings, temporary

gaskets, nuts, bolts, clamps, strainers etc. required for fabrication of test headers and

all consumables.

e) All equipment and consumables required for hydrostatic testing like pumps, pressure

and temperature gauges, test water and corrosion inhibitors for test water for

hydrostatic testing.

f) All equipment and consumables required for all types of test and NDT (such as

radiography, magnetic particle examination, Liquid penetration testing, etc.) including

radiographic film, X-ray/gamma ray machines, developing equipment and consumables

etc.

g) All steel materials such as structural steel, reinforcement steel, shims, wedges,packing

plates, pipes, nuts & bolts, washers, U-bolts, anchor bolts, clamps, clips, pipesaddles/shoes etc. as required for the fabrication of structural supports and supports







basements/foundations, platforms etc. Pipes supplied by Company shall not be used

for fabrication of supports and support saddles etc.

h) All materials required for civil and structural works including cement, sand,

reinforcement, structural steel etc. for piping supports.

i) All types of coating, and painting material including primers & paints suitable for

normal corrosive environment, above ground painting, solvents, sand blasting material

and cleaning agents, compressed air etc.

j) All material required for concreting and grouting works etc.

k)

All type of safety tools, tackles, devices and apparatus, equipment etc. includingladders and scaffolding etc. as required.

l) All materials, equipments and manpower required for providing commissioning

assistance for process and non-process piping and providing commissioning assistance

to pipeline commissioning contractor.

m) Supply and positioning of Concrete sleepers for positioning cranes etc. as required

n) Any other material not specifically listed above but required for successful completion

of all works related to the terminal piping whether temporary or permanent in nature.The item rates quoted for the execution of the WORK shall be inclusive of supply of all

materials mentioned above unless specifically covered otherwise under Schedule of

Rates.

o) The quantities indicated in Schedule of Rates under Contractor’s Scope of Supply are

approximate. Contractor shall carry out MTO of all materials (Contractors scope of

supply) required based on AFC General Arrangement drawings and firm up the actual

requirement of materials. All escalations/ extra materials procured by Contractor for

contingencies shall be Contractor’s property and no payments shall be made for such

materials.

p) Payment shall be made for actual materials installed by the Contractor as a part of

permanent installation.

CONDITIONS FOR COMPANY SUPPLIED MATERIAL

a) The Contractor shall be responsible for taking over of the material and subsequent

handling, hauling, transportation to the actual work site(s)/fabrication yard(s) and

storage & safe keeping of the materials.







b) The Contractor shall inspect all Company supplied free issue materials at the time of

taking over from the Company and defects noticed, if any, shall be brought to the

notice of Company/Company representative and jointly recorded. Once the materialhas been taken over by the Contractor, all the responsibility for safe keeping of the

materials shall rest with the Contractor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for

repair of such defects noticed at the time of taking over and shall be compensated in

accordance with the provisions of the contract.

c) Rebuffing of dents in bevels in less than 1 mm in depth shall be carried out by

Contractor ahead of welding in the field at no extra cost to Company. Other defects

shall be repaired by Contractor and shall be compensated as per rates set forth in

Schedule of rates or relevant provisions of the contract.

d) On completion of the works Contractor shall submit a “Material Appropriation

Statement” for all materials supplied by the Company as free issue materials.







TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION -CIVIL WORKS

(SHALL BE READ TOGETHER WITH THE NOMENCALTURE OF INDIVIDUAL ITEMS AS PER THE

SCHEDULE OF ITEMS. )

1. EARTHWORK IN ROADS & BUILDING WORKS

2. CEMENT CONCRETE & ALLIED WORK

3. BRICKWORK

4. DOORS & WINDOWS

5. FLOORING WORKS

6. DAMP PROOFING & WATERPROOFING WORKS

7. FINISHING WORKS

8. STRUCTURAL STEEL

9. ROOFING WORKS







GROUP - 1

EARTHWORK IN ROADS AND BUILDING WORKS

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the general requirements of earthwork in excavation in different

materials, filling in areas as shown in drawing, back-filling around foundations and in

plinths, conveyance and disposal of surplus spoils or stacking them properly as shown on

the drawings & as directed by ENGINEER and all operations covered within the intent &

purpose of this specification.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES:

The following Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be applicable.

In all cases, the latest revision of the codes shall be referred to :

a) IS - 783 - Code of Practice for laying of concrete pipe.

b) IS -1200 -Method of Measurement of Building Works.

c) IS - 3764 - Safety code for excavation work

d) IS -6313 (Part II)-Pre-constructional Chemical Treatment Measures.

3.0 GENERAL:

3.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, plants, instruments, qualified supervisory personnel,

labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables, anything and everything necessary,

whether or not such items are specifically stated herein, for completion of the job in

accordance with specification and requirements.

3.2 CONTRACTOR shall carry out the survey of the site before commencing excavation and set

properly all lines and establish levels for various works such as earthwork in excavation for

foundations, plinth filling, roads, drains, cable trenches, pipelines, etc. Such survey shall be

carried out by studying thoroughly the drawings for the existing plant and modus operandi

shall be discussed with ENGINEER. Ground levels shall be taken and properly recorded by

the CONTRACTOR and shall be checked and certified by ENGINEER. If required, grown

shrubs etc. have to be cut to take levels at no additional cost.

3.3 The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This shall also include, where

required, proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting and

maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night to

ensure safety.







3.4 The rates quoted shall also include for dumping of excavated materials in required heaps,

riprap with regular slope as directed by ENGINEER, within the lead specified and leveling the

same so as to provide natural drainage. Soil excavated shall be stacked properly as directedby ENGINEER. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps, the harder

and more weather resisting materials forming the casing on the sides and the top.

4.0 CLEARING:

The area to be excavated, and/or filled shall be cleared of fences, plants, bushes,

vegetation, slush, etc. and other objectionable matter. The materials so removed shall be

disposed off as directed by ENGINEER. Where earth fill is intended, the area shall be

stripped of all loose/soft patches, top soil containing objectionable matter/material before

fill commences.

5.0 EXCAVATION:

5.1 All excavation work shall be carried out manually or by mechanical equipment, as directed

by ENGINEER.

5.2 Excavation for permanent work shall be taken out to such widths, lengths, depths, and

profiles of P.C.C. as are shown on the drawings or such other lines and grades as may be

specified by ENGINEER. Initially excavation shall be carried out to a depth 150 mm above

the final level. The balance shall be excavated with special care. Soft pockets shall be

removed even below the final excavation, if so instructed by ENGNEER, and shall be carried

out just prior to laying the P.C.C.

5.3 CONTRACTOR may, to facilitate his work or for similar other reasons excavate and also

backfill later, if so approved by ENGINEER, at his own cost, outside the lines shown on the

drawings or directed by ENGINEER. Should any excavation be taken below the specified

elevation, CONTRACTOR shall fill it up, with concrete of the grade specified on drawings,

upto the required elevation. No extra shall be paid to CONTRACTOR on this account.

5.4 All excavations shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for safety and

working facility. However, prior approval of ENGINEER shall be obtained by CONTRACTOR in

each individual case, for the method he proposes to adopt for the excavation including

dimensions, side slopes, de-watering, disposal, etc. This approval, however, shall not in any

way relieve CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for any consequent loss or damage. The

excavation must be carried out in the most expeditious and efficient manner. Side slopes

shall be as steep as will stand safely for the actual soil conditions encountered. Every

precaution shall be taken to prevent slips. Should slips occur, the slipped material shall be

removed and the slope dressed to a modified stable one. Removal of the slipped earth will

not be paid for.







5.5 Excavation shall be carried out with such tools, tackles and equipment as described here in

before.

6.0 FILL AND BACKFILLING:

6.1 GENERAL:

All fill material will be subject to ENGINEER's approval. If any material is rejected by

ENGINEER CONTRACTOR shall remove the same forthwith from the site at no extra cost to

the OWNER. Surplus fill material shall be deposited/disposed off as directed by ENGINEER

after the fill work is complete.

No earthfill shall commence until surface drain have been properly intercepted, or

otherwise dealt with, as directed by ENGINEER.

6.2 MATERIAL:

Only selected excavated materials shall be used as backfill. Fill material shall be free from

clods, salts, sulphates, organic or other foreign material. All clods of earth shall be broken or

removed.

6.3 If any selected fill material is required to be borrowed, CONTRACTOR shall make

arrangements for bringing such material from outside borrow pits. The material and source

shall be subject to prior approval of ENGINEER. The approved borrow pits area shall be

cleared of all bushes, plants, rubbish, etc. Top soil containing salts/sulphate and other

foreign material shall be removed. The materials so removed shall be disposed off, as

directed by ENGINEER.

6.4 FILLING IN PITS AND TRENCHES AROUND FOUNDATIONS OF STRUCTURES, WALLS ETC.:

As soon as the work in foundations has been accepted and measured, the spaces around

the foundations, structures, pits, trenches, etc. shall be cleared of all debris and filled with

earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm., each layer being watered, rammed and properlyconsolidated, before the succeeding one is laid. Each layer shall be consolidated to the

satisfaction of ENGINEER. Earth shall be rammed with approved mechanical compaction

machines. Usually no manual compaction shall be allowed unless ENGINEER is satisfied that

in some cases manual compaction by tampers cannot be avoided. The final backfill surface

shall be trimmed and levelled to proper profile, as directed by ENGINEER and/or shown on

the drawings.

6.5 PLINTH FILLING:







6.5.1 Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material as described herein before in layers

not exceeding 15 cm, watered and compacted with mechanical compaction machines.

ENGINEER may, however, permit manual compaction by hand tampers in case he is satisfiedthat mechanical compaction is not possible. When filling reaches the finished level, the

surface shall be flooded with water, unless otherwise directed, for at least 24 hours,

allowed to dry and then the surface again compacted as specified above to avoid

settlements at a later stage. The finished level of the filling shall be trimmed to the

level/slope specified.

6.6 SAND/MURUM FILLING IN PLINTH AND OTHER PLACES:

At places backfilling shall be carried out with local sand/murum if directed by ENGINEER.

The sand/murum used shall be clean medium grained and free from impurities. The filled-

in-sand/murum shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to ensure maximum

consolidation. Any temporary work required to contain sand/murum under flooded

condition shall be to CONTRACTOR'S account. The surface of the consolidated sand/murum

shall be dressed to required level or slope. Construction of floors or other structures on fill

shall not be started untill ENGINEER has inspected and approved the fill.

6.7 FILLING IN TRENCHES:

6.7.1 Filling in trenches for pipes and drains shall be commenced as soon as the joints of pipesand drains have been tested and approved by ENGINEER. The back-filling material shall be

properly consolidated by watering and ramming, taking due care that no damage is caused

to the pipes.

6.7.2 Where the trenches are excavated in soil, the filling from the bottom of the trench to the

level of the centreline of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction with selected approved

earth in layers not exceeding 8 cm; backfilling above the level of the centre line of the pipe

shall be done with selected earth by hand compaction or other approved means in layers

not exceeding 15 cm.

6.7.3 In case of excavation for trenches, the filling upto a level 30 cm above the top of the pipe

shall be done with fine materials, such as earth, sand, murum, etc. The filling upto the level

of the centreline of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction in layers not exceeding 8

cm. Whereas the filling above the centre line of the pipe shall be dome by hand compaction

or by approved means in layers not exceeding 15 cm. The filling from a level 30 cm. above

the top of the pipe to the top of the trench shall be done by hand or other approved

mechanical methods, as directed by ENGINEER.







6.7.4 Filling of the trenches shall be carried simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to avoid

unequal pressure on the pipe.

7.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

7.1 All excavation shall be measured net. Dimensions for the purpose of payment shall be

reckoned on the horizontal area of the P.C.C. at the base for foundations of the walls,

columns, footings, tanks, rafts, or other foundations/structures to be built, multiplied by the

mean depth from the surface of the ground in accordance with the drawings and duly

recorded ground levels. Excavation in side slopes will not be paid for. CONTRACTOR may

make such allowance in his rates to provide for excavation in side slopes keeping in mind

the nature of the soil and safety of excavation for fixing shuttering etc..

7.2 Backfilling as per specifications as specified and directed for the sides of foundations of

columns, footings, structures, walls, tanks, rafts, trenches, etc. with excavated material will

not be paid for separately. It shall be clearly understood that rates quoted for excavation

shall include stacking of excavated material, if required, within specified lead, backfilling

with selected earth in layers of 150 mm, compacting, etc. and transporting the surplus

excavated material outside plot limits.

7.3 Payment for fill inside trenches, plinth or similar filling with selected excavated material will

be made for only compaction as specified/directed by ENGINEER. Cost of all other

operations shall be deemed to have been included in the rates quoted. Payment for thiswork will be made based on measurement of plinth/trench dimensions filled. The

plinth/ground levels shall be surveyed before commencement of earthwork for this

purpose.

7.4 Actual quantity of consolidated filling shall be measured as per the levels before and after

filling and paid for in cubic metres.

7.5 CONTRACTOR's rate shall include the cost of shoring, strutting, and de-watering, if required.

8.0 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT:

8.1 GENERAL:

The formation of the chemically treated soil barrier shall be accomplished in stages as the

building construction work progresses and due care shall be excercised to ensure that each

stage of treatment is well integrated with that previously applied so that no unprotected

avenues of termite entry are left open.

8.2 CHEMICALS:

The chemicals used for the soil treatment shall conform to IS Codes. The only allowed type

is Chlorophyrisphos. Measurement for this will be based on actual area







8.3 COMMENCEMENT OF TREATMENT:

The treatment shall commence after the construction has reached the plinth level and

before the rubble packing or sand bed over the filled earth in the plinth area is laid.Treatment shall also be given to all the faces of pits excavated for footings.

8.4 TERMITE PROOF BARRIER AT DPC LEVEL:

a) Where a Damp Proof Course is provided, the CONTRACTOR shall apply chemical

emulsion, as specified above, on the surface of the DPC when the concrete is yet green, at

the rate of 5 litres per sq. metre of DPC surface, ensuring that the emulsion gets soaked into

the concrete.

b) Where no DPC is provided, the mortar used for two consecutive courses of masonry just

below the plinth filling shall be made with emulsion, as specified above, instead of water.These two operations are intended to create a termite proof barrier in the plinth wall,

preventing subterranean termites from infiltrating through voids in the masonry into the

superstructure.

8.5 TREATMENT OF TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLING:

After the earth filling is completed in the plinth areas and before the dry rubble packing or

sub-grade is laid, the entire surface of the filled earth shall be treated with the chemical

emulsion at five litres per sq. metre. Light rodding may be carried out in the soil surface to

facilitate absorption of the emulsion.

The above application is intended to prevent entry of termites through the floor structure.

8.6 TREATMENT AT JUNCTION OF COLUMNS/WALLS AND FLOOR:

Rodding shall be carried out among the junction of the columns/walls and earth filling at

150 mm, intervals down to or slightly lower than the DPC or the chemical barrier described

above. Emulsion shall be spreaded along the wall junction at the rate of one litre per linear

metre so that it mixes with the broken up soil and seeps to the DPC level or chemical

barrier, thus establishing continuity of the anti-termite layer. The disturbed earth shall be

tamped back in place after the treatment.

8.7 TREATMENT OF SOIL ALONG EXTERNAL PERIMETER:

Finally the earth around the external perimeter of the building upto a depth of 50 mm shall

be treated at the rate of five litres per running metre of the plinth wall. To facilitate this

treatment, solid M.S. Rods shall be driven into the soil as close as possible to the plinth wall

at intervals of 150 mm and the rods moved backward and forward in a direction parallel to

the wall to break up earth so that chemical emulsion mixes intimately with the soil.

8.8 TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES, WASTES & CONDUITS:

When pipes, Waste pipes, conduits, etc. enter the soil inside the area of the foundation, the

soil surrounding the point of entry must be loosened around each such pipe, for a distance

of 150 mm and up to a depth of 75 mm before treatment is commenced, when they enter







the soil, external to the foundations. They shall similarly be treated unless, they stand clear

of the walls of the building by about 75 mm, for a distance of every 300 mm.

8.9 SPRAYING EQUIPMENT:

A pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate proper

penetration of chemical into the earth.

8.10 PRECAUTIONS DURING MONSOON:

No spraying shall be carried out when it rains. Treatment shall be repeated in plinth areas if

it rains immediately after a spraying operation and before the emulsion has soaked into the

earth.

8.11 The treatment shall carry a guarantee for a minimum period of ten years.

8.12 The work shall be carried out to suit other relevant civil works.

8.13 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT:

The quantity of work to be paid for under this item shall be calculated by taking the plan

area of all horizontal surfaces treated and area of all vertical and inclined faces treated,

after making all necessary deductions for openings. Quantity of anti-termite treatment shall

be measured in sq.m. Anti termite treatment shall be done as per relevant working

drawings or as per the direction of ENGINEER. Vendor to keep a record for consumption of

Anti Termite chemical used & get it certified by EIC.







GROUP – 2

CEMENT CONCRETE AND ALLIED WORKS

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the general requirements for concrete to be used on jobs using on-

site production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, handling, storage

of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing & testing of concrete, and also requirements

in regard to the quality, storage, bending and fixing of reinforcement. This also covers the

transportation of concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit and the placing

curing, protecting, repairing and finishing of concrete.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS:

The following specification, standards and codes shall form a part of this specification. Allstandards, tentative specifications, codes of practice, referred to herein, shall be the latest

editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.

In case of discrepancy, if any between this specification and those referred to in the

following, the latter shall govern.

APPLICABLE I.S. SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES OF PRACTICE:

I.S, 12269 –Specification for High Strength Ordinary Portland Cement Grade 53.

I.S, 8112 –Specification for High Strength Ordinary Portland Cement Grade 43.

I.S. 1489-Specification for Portland Pozzolona Cement

I.S. 383 - Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural source for

concrete.

I.S. 2386 - Method of test for aggregates (Part I to VIII)for concrete.

I.S. 516 - Method of test for strength of concrete.

I.S. 1199 - Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.

I.S. 3025 - Method of sampling and test (Physical and chemical) for water & waste

water.

I.S. 432 - Specification for mild steel (Part I & II) and medium tensile steel bars and hard

drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.

I.S. 1139 - Specification for hot rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel deformed bars for

concrete reinforcement.

I.S. 1566 - Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.







I.S. 1786 - Specification for TMT ( thermo mechanically treated ) Steel bars for concrete

reinforcement.

I.S. 2645 - Specification for integral cement waterproofing compound.

I.S. 456:2000 - Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

I.S. 3370 - Code of practice for concrete (Parts I-IV) structures for storage of

liquids.

I.S. 2502 - Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete

reinforcement.

I.S. 2571 - Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring.

I.S. 3696 - Safety code for scaffolds and (Part I & II)ladders.

I.S. 1200 - Method of measurement of building & civil engineering works.

3.0 GENERAL:

3.1 The quality of materials & method and control of manufacture and transportation of all

concrete work irrespective of mix, whether reinforced or otherwise, and shall conform to

the applicable portions of this specifications.

3.2 ENGINEER shall have the right to inspect the source of material, the layout and operation of

procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment, and

the quality control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and ENGINEER's approval

obtained, prior to starting of concrete work.

4.0 MATERIALS FOR STANDARD CONCRETE:

The ingredients to be used in the manufacture of standard concrete shall consist solely of a

standard type Portland cement, clean sand, natural coarse aggregate, clean water, and

admixtures, if specially called for on drawings and/or specifications.

4.1 CEMENT:

4.1.1 Unless otherwise specified cement shall be OPC / PPC of approved make in 50 kg bags. The

use of bulk cement will be permitted only with the approval of ENGINEER. Changing of

brands or type of cement within the same structure will not be permitted.







4.1.2 CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate quantity of

cement. If supplies are arranged by OWNER, cement will be issued in quantities to cover

work requirements of one month or less, as deemed fit by the ENGINEER and it will be theresponsibility of CONTRACTOR to ensure adequate and proper storage Cement bags shall be

stored in a dry enclosed shed (storage under tarpauline will not be permitted), well away

from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid contact with moisture from

ground & walls, and so arranged as to provide ready access. Damaged or reclaimed or partly

set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be removed from the site. Not more

than 12 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The storage arrangement shall be approved by

ENGINEER. Consignment of cement shall be stored as received and shall be consumed in the

order of their receipts at site. Cement will be tested as per schedule of testing given in the

tender document & manufacturer’s test certificate alone will not suffice.

4.1.3 Cement held in storage for a period of ninety (90) days or longer shall be tested. Should at

any time ENGINEER have reasons to consider that any cement is defective, then irrespective

of its origin, date of manufacture and/or manufacturer's test certificate, such cement shall

be tested immediately at CONTRACTOR's cost at a National Test Laboratory/approved

laboratory and until the results of such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be used in

any work. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any claim of any nature of this account.

4.2 AGGREGATES:

4.2.1 a) "Aggregate" in general designates both fine and coarse inert materials used in the

manufacture of concrete.

b) "Fine Aggregates" are aggregates most of which pass through 4.75 mm IS sieve.

c) "Coarse aggregates" are aggregate most of which retain on 4.75 mm IS sieve.

4.2.2 All fine and coarse aggregate proposed for use in the work shall subject to ENGINEER's

approval and after specific materials have been accepted, the source of supply of such

materials, shall not be changed without prior approval of ENGINEER.

4.2.3 Aggregates shall, except as noted above, consist of natural sands, crushed stone and gravel

from a source known to produce satisfactory aggregate for concrete and shall be chemically

inert, strong, hard, durable against weathering, of limited porosity and free from

deleterious materials that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the

strength and/or durability of concrete. The grading of aggregates shall be such as to

produce a dense concrete of specified strength & consistency that will work readily into

position without segregation and shall be based on test on concrete as specified later in this

group.







4.2.4 SAMPLING AND TESTING:

Samples of the aggregates for determination of suitability shall be taken under thesupervision of ENGINEER and delivered to the laboratory well in advance of the scheduled

placing of concrete. Records of tests which have been made on proposed aggregates and on

concrete made from this source of aggregate shall be furnished to ENGINEER in advance of

the work for use in determining the aggregate suitability. The costs of all such tests,

sampling, etc. shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.

4.2.5 STORAGE OF AGGREGATES:

All coarse and fine aggregate shall be stacked separately in stock piles in the material yard

near the work site to avoid intermixing of different aggregates. Contamination with foreignmaterials and earth during storage and while heaping the materials shall be avoided. The

aggregates must be of specified quality not only at the time of receiving at site but more so

at the time of loading into the mixer. Rakers shall be used for lifting the coarse aggregates

from stock piles. Coarse aggregates shall be piled in layers not exceeding 1.20 metres in

height to prevent coning or segregation. Each layer shall cover the entire area of the stock

pile before succeeding layers and started. Aggregates that have become segregated shall be

rejected. Rejected material after remixing may be accepted, if subsequent tests

demonstrate conformity with required gradation.

4.2.6 SPECIAL GRAVITY:

Aggregates having a specify below 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis) shall not be used

without special permission of ENGINEER.

5.0 FINE AGGREGATES:

Fine aggregate, except as noted above, shall consist of natural or crushed sand conforming

to IS: 383. The sand shall be clean, sharp, hard, strong and durable and shall be free from

dust, vegetable substances, adherent coatings, clay, alkali, organic matter, mica, salt, orother deleterious substances which can be injurious to the setting

qualities/strength/durability of concrete.

5.1 MACHINE MADE SAND:

Machine made sand will be acceptable, provided the constituent rock gravel composition

shall be sound, hard, dense, inorganic, un-coated and durable against weathering.







5.2 SCREENING AND WASHING:

Sand shall be prepared for use by such screening or washing or both, as necessary, toremove all objectionable foreign matters while separating the sand grains to the required

size fraction.

5.3 FOREIGN MATERIAL LIMITATIONS:

The percentage of deleterious substances in sand delivered to the mixer shall not exceed

the following:

Percent by Weight

Uncrushed Crushed

i) Material finer than 75 micron I.S. sieve 3.00 15.00

ii) Shale 1.00 1.00

iii) Coal and lignite 1.00 1.00

iv) Clay lumps 1.00 1.00

v) Total of all above substances including

items (i) to (iv) for uncrushed sand and

items (iii) & (iv) for crushed sand. 5.00 2.00

5.4 GRADATION:

Unless otherwise directed or approved, the grading of sand shall be within the limits

indicated hereunder:-

PERCENTAGE PASSING FOR

I.S. Sieve Grading Grading Grading Grading

Designation Zone-I Zone-II Zone-III Zone-IV

10.00 mm 100 100 100 100

4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100

2.36 mm 60- 95 75-100 85-100 95-100







1.18 mm 30- 70 55- 90 75-100 90-100

600 micron 15- 34 35- 59 60- 79 80-100

300 micron 5- 20 8-30 12- 40 15- 50

150 micron 0- 10 0- 10 0-10 0- 15

Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of sieves, other

than 600 micron I.S. sieves, by total amount not exceeding 5 %, it shall be regarded as

falling within that grading zone. This tolerance shall not be applied to percentage passing

the 600 micron I.S. Sieves or to percentage passing any other sieve size on the coarser limit

of Grading Zone I or conforming to Grading Zone IV shall be used. Sand used for preparing

concrete shall belong to Grading Zone-II.

5.5 FINENESS MODULUS:

The sand shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 2.2 nor more than 3.2. The fineness

modulus is determined by adding the cumulative percentages retained on the following I.S.

Sieve (4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron) and dividing

the sum by 100.

6.0 COARSE AGGREGATES:

Coarse aggregates for concrete, except as noted above, shall conform IS: 383. This shall

consist of natural or crushed stone & gravel and shall be clean and free from elongated,

flaky or laminated pieces, adhering coatings, clay lumps, coal residue, clinkers, slag, alkali,

mica, organic matter or other deleterious matter.

6.1 SCREENING AND WASHING:

Natural gravel and crushed rock shall be screened and/or washed for the removal of dustcoating, if so demanded by ENGINEER.

6.2 GRADING:

The pieces shall be angular in shape and shall have granular or crystalline surfaces. Friable,

flaky and laminate pieces, mica and shale, if present, shall be only in such quantities that

will not, in the opinion of ENGINEER, affect adversely the strength and/or durability of

concrete. The maximum size of coarse aggregates shall be specified on relevant drawings.

The maximum size of coarse aggregates shall in no case be greater than 1/4 of the minimum

thickness of the member, provided that the concrete can be placed without difficulty so as

to surround all reinforcement thoroughly and fill the corners of the form. Plums above 150







mm and upto any reasonable size can be used in plain mass concrete work of large

dimensions upto a maximum limit of 20% by volume of concrete when specifically approved

by ENGINEER. For heavily reinforced concrete members, the nominal maximum size of theaggregates shall be 5 mm less than the minimum clear distance between the reinforcing

main bars, or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to the reinforcement, whichever is

smaller. The amount of fine particles occurring in the free state or as loose adherent shall

not exceed 1% when determined by laboratory sedimentation tests as per IS: 2386. After 24

hours immersion in water, previously dried sampled shall not have gained more than 10%

its oven dry weight in air, as determined by I.S. 2386.

6.3 FOREIGN MATERIAL LIMITATIONS:

The percentages of deleterious substances in the aggregate delivered to the mixer shall notexceed the following:

Percentage by weight Uncrushed Crushed

i) Material finer than 75 micron 3.00 3.00

I.S. sieve

ii) Coal and lignite 1.00 1.00

iii) Clay lumps 1.00 1.00

iv) Soft fragments 3.00 -

v) Total of all the above substances 5.00 5.00

7.0 WATER:

Water used for both mixing and curing shall be free from injurious amounts of deleterious

materials. Potable waters are generally satisfactory for mixing and curing concrete.

8.0 REINFORCEMENT:

8.1 SUPPLY:

The reinforcement shall be TMT bars conforming to IS : 1786-1985

Substitution of reinforcement will not be permitted except upon written approval from

ENGINEER.

8.2 STORAGE:

The reinforcement shall not be kept in direct contact with the ground but stacked on top ofan arrangement of timber sleepers or the like.







If the reinforcing rods/bars have to be stored for a long duration, they shall be coated with

cement wash before stacking and/or be kept under cover or stored as directed by

ENGINEERS. Fabricated reinforcement shall be carefully stored to prevent damage,distortion, corrosion and deterioration.

All reinforcement shall be clean, free from grease, oil, paint, dirt, loose mill scale, loose rust,

dust, bituminous material or any other substances that will destroy or reduce the bound. All

rods shall be thoroughly cleaned before being fabricated. Pitted and defective rods shall not

be used. All bars shall be rigidly held in position before concreting . No welding of rods to

obtain continuity shall be allowed, unless approved by ENGINEERS.

8.3 LAPS :

Laps and splices for reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings. Splices in adjacent

bars shall be staggered and the locations of all splices, except those specified on the

drawings, shall be approved by ENGINEER. The bars shall not be lapped unless the length

required exceeds the maximum available length of bars at site.

8.4 BENDING :

Reinforcing bars, supplied bent or in coils, shall be straightened before they are cut to size.

Straightening of bars shall be done in cold and without damaging the bars. This is

considered as a part of reinforcement bending fabrication work and contractor's rates aredeemed to include this work.

All bars shall be accurately bent according to the sizes and shapes shown on the detailed

working drawings. They shall be bent gradually by machine or other approved means.

Reinforcing bars shall not be straightened and rebent in a manner that will injure the

material; bars containing cracks or splits shall be rejected. They shall be bent cold, except

bars of over 25 mm in diameter which may be bent hot if specifically approved by

ENGINEER. Bars which depend for their strength on cold working, shall not be bent hot. Bars

bent hot shall not be heated beyond cherry red colour (nor exceeding 84 deg C) and afterbending shall be allowed to cool slowly without quenching. Bars incorrectly bent shall be

used only if the means used for straightening and rebending be such as shall not, in the

opinion of ENGINEER, injure the material. No reinforcement shall be bent when in position

in the work without approval, Whether or not it is partially embedded in hardened

concrete. Bars having kinks or ends other than those required by designed shall not be

used.

8.5 FIXING:

Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed by any approved means and maintained in the

correct position shown in the drawings by the use of blocks, spacers and chairs as per IS







2502 to prevent displacement during placing and compaction of concrete. Bars intended to

be in contact at crossing points shall be securely bound together at all such points with 16

gauge annealed soft iron wire. The vertical distances required between successive layers ofbar in beams or similar members shall be maintained by the provisions of mild steel spacer

bars at such intervals that the main bars do not perceptibly sag between adjacent spacer

bars.

8.6 COVER:

Clear concrete cover for reinforcement shall be as stated on drawings.

The correct cover shall be maintained by cement mortar blocks or other approved means.

Reinforcement for footings, grade beams and slabs on subgrade shall be supported onprecast concrete blocks as approved by ENGINEER. The use of pebbles or stones will not be

permitted.

The 28 days crushing strength of cement mortar cubes/precast cover blocks shall be at least

equal of the specified strength of concrete in which these cubes/blocks are embedded.

The minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with IS

456:2000, or as shown in drawings.

8.7 INSPECTON:

Erected and secured reinforcement shall be inspected and approved by ENGNEER prior to

placement of concrete.

8.8 PAYMENT:

For payment of work done under this item shall be made as per Special Terms & conditions.,

The unit rate for reinforcement shall include all wastage, binding wire, etc. for which no

separate payment shall be made. Laps as shown on drawings or as approved by ENGINEER

and minimum number of chairs and spacer bars to keep the reinforcement in place and

approved by ENGINEER shall be measured and paid for.

9.0 STEEL SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE:

Structural steel columns, beams, girders and bracings to be encased in concrete shall be

unpainted. The encasing shall be done in concrete with 10 mm maximum size aggregate.

The steel member will have a minimum cover of 50 mm unless otherwise indicated on the

drawings. Where the clean cover to steel is more than 75 mm, mild steel bar and concrete

with 20 mm coarse aggregate shall be used.







10.0 MIXING:

Concrete shall be mixed in mechanical mixer ( with hopper) . The mixer should comply withIS 1791 and IS 12119 . The mixer shall be fitted with water measuring devices. The mixing

shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the material and the mass is

uniform in colour. If there is segregation after unloading from the mixer, the concrete

should be remixed. For guidance, the mixing time shall be at least 2 minutes. For concrete

of grades M 20 or lower , "Nominal Mix Concrete" as specified in IS: 456:2000 is to be used.

Whether reinforced or otherwise, all concrete to works to be carried out under this

specification shall be divided into the following classification.

Minimum Compressive Strength Of 15 Cm Cubes At 7 And 28 Days After Mixing, Conducted

In Accordance With IS: 516

The grades of concrete unless otherwise specified shall be in accordance with the following

table. The grade of concrete to be used in each section of work will be shown in the

drawings or in the schedule of items :

Grade of

Concrete

Characteristic Strength i.e.

Compressive Strength of 15

cm cubes at 25 days (N/mm2)

Nominal Maximum

Aggregate Size (mm)

M-5A 5 40-63

M-7.5A 7.5 40-63

M-10A 10 12-63

M-15A 15 12-63

M-20A 20 12-63

M-25C 25 12-20

M-30C 30 12-20

M-35 35 12-20

M-40 40 12-20

Mix Proportioning and Cement Consumption For Concrete:







Min and Max cement content will be as per IS 456: 2000.

11.0 SAMPLING AND TESTING CONCRETE IN THE FIELD:

11.1 Facilities required for sampling materials and concrete in the field, shall be provided by

CONTRACTOR at no extra cost.

11.2 SAMPLING AND TESTING CONCRETE IN THE FIELD:

Test cubes of each grade of concrete shall be made as specified in IS: 456:2000. Such

samples shall be drawn on each day, for each grade of concrete & during each concreting

operations. Of each set of 6 cubes, three shall be tested at 7 days age and three at 28 days

age. The laboratory test results shall be tabulated and furnished to ENGINEER. ENGINEER

will accept the concrete according to `Acceptance Criteria' specified in the IS:456:2000.

11.3 CONSISTENCY:

Slump tests shall be carried out as often as demanded by ENGINEER invariably from the

same batch of concrete from which the test cubes are made. Slump test shall be done

immediately after sampling.

12.0 ADMIXTURE:

12.1 WATERPROOFING COMPOUND:

Where specified and approved by ENGINEER, waterproofing compound conforming to IS:

2645, shall be added in quantities recommended by manufacturer and specified by

ENGINEER.

13.0 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FINAL, INSPECTION AND APPROVAL.

13.1 Before the concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork shall be

inspected to see that they have been cleaned and oiled. Non-staining oil shall be used as

approved by ENGINEER. Temporary opening shall be provided to facilitate inspection,

especially at bottom of columns and wall forms, to permit removal of say dust, wood

shavings, binding wire, rubbish, dirt, etc. Openings shall be placed or holes drilled so that

these materials and water can be removed easily. Such openings/holes shall be later

suitably plugged.

13.2 The various trades shall be permitted ample time to install drainage and plumbing lines,

floor and trench, drains, conduits, hangers, anchors, inserts, sleeves, bolts, frames and

other miscellaneous embedments to be cast in the concrete as indicated on the drawings or

as is necessary for the proper execution of the work. CONTRACTOR shall co-operate fully







with all such agencies and shall permit the use of scaffolding, formwork, etc. by other trades

at no extra cost.

13.3 All embedded parts, inserts, etc. supplied by OWNER or CONTRCATOR shall be correctly

positioned and securely held in the forms to prevent displacement during placing and

vibrating of concrete.

13.4 All anchor bolts shall be positioned and kept in place with the help of properly

manufactured templates unless specifically waived in writing by ENGINEER. The use of all

such templates, fixtures shall be deemed to be included in CONTRACTOR's rates.

13.5 Reinforcement and other items to be cast in concrete shall have clean surfaces that will not

impair bond.

13.6 Prior to concrete placement all work shall be inspected and approved by ENGINEER and, if

found unsatisfactory, concrete shall not be poured until after all defects have been rectified

at CONTRACTOR's cost.

13.7 Approval by ENGINEER of any all materials and work as required herein shall not relieve

CONTRACTOR from his obligation to produce finished concrete in accordance with the

drawings and specifications.

13.8 RAIN OR WASH WATER:

No concrete shall be placed in wet weather or on a water covered surface. Any concrete

that has been washed by heavy rains shall be entirely removed, if there is any sign of

cement and sand having been washed away from the concrete placed. To guard against

damage which may be caused by rains, the works shall be covered with tarpaulins

immediately after the concrete has been placed and compacted before leaving the work

unattended. Any water accumulated on the surface the newly placed concrete shall be

removed by approved means and no further concrete shall be placed thereon on until such

water is removed. To avoid flow of water over/around freshly placed concrete, suitabledrains and sumps shall be provided.

13.9 BONDING MORTAR:

Immediately before concrete placement begins, prepared surfaces except formwork, which

will come in contact with the concrete to be placed, shall be covered with the bonding

mortar.







14.0 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT:

All equipment used for mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be maintained inclean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipelines & other equipment shall be

thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.

15.0 PROCEDURE FOR PLACING OF CONCRETE:

15.1 ENGINEER'S APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT & METHOD:

Before any concrete is placed, the entire placing program consisting of equipment, layout,

proposed procedures and methods shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval, if so

demanded by ENGINEER and no concrete shall be placed until ENGINEER's approval has

been received. Equipment for conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to

ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete during depositing without segregation of

materials, considering the size of the job and placement location.

15.2 TIME INTERVAL BETWEEN MIXING AND PLACING:

Concrete shall be placed in its final position before the cement reaches its initial set and

concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes of leaving

the mixer, and once compacted, it shall not be disturbed.

15.3 AVOIDING SEGREGATION:

Concrete shall, in all cases, be placed as near as practicable directly in its final position, and

shall not be rehandled or caused to flow in a manner which will cause segregation loss of

materials, displacement of reinforcement, shuttering or embedded inserts or impair its

strength. For locations where direct placement is not possible, and in narrow forms,

CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable drop and "Elephant Trunks" to confine the movement

of concrete. Special care shall be excercised when concrete is dropped from a height,

especially if reinforcement is in the way, particularly in columns and thin members.

15.4 PLACING BY MANUAL LABOUR:

Except when otherwise approved by ENGINEER, concrete shall be placed in the shuttering

by shovels or other approved equipment. It should be handled in a manner to preclude

segregation. Care should be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of

form work. As a general guidance, the maximum permissible free fall of concrete may be

taken as 1.5 m.







16.0 COMPACTION:

16.1 Concrete shall be compacted during placing, with approved vibrating equipment until theconcrete has been consolidated to the maximum practicable density, is free of pockets of

coarse aggregates and fits tightly against all form surfaces, reinforcement and embedded

fixtures. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all concrete placed against the form

faces and into corners of forms or against hardened concrete at joints is free from voids or

cavities. The use of vibrators shall be consistent with the concrete mix and caution

exercised not to over vibrate the concrete to the point that segregation results, and water

appears on the top surface.

16.2 USE OF VIBRATORS:

The exact manner of application and the most suitable machines for the purpose must be

carefully considered and operated by experienced men. Immersion vibrators shall be

inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and withdrawn when air bubbles

cease to come to the surface. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn very slowly. In no

case shall immersion vibrators be used to transport concrete inside the forms. Particular

attention shall be paid to vibration at the top of a lift e.g. in a column or wall.

16.3 PENETRATION OF VIBRATOR:

The immersion vibrator shall penetrate the layer being placed and also penetrate the layer

below while the under layer is still plastic, to ensure good bond and homogeneity between

the two layer sand prevent the formation of cold joints.

16.3.1 VIBRATION AGAINST REINFORCEMENT:

Care shall be taken to prevent contact of immersion vibrator with reinforcement steel

and/or embedded parts. Immersion vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with

reinforcement steel after start of initial set. They shall also not be allowed to come in

contact with forms of finished surfaces.

16.4 STONE POCKETS AND MORTAR PONDAGES:

The formation of stone pockets or mortar pondages in corners and against faces of forms

shall not be permitted. Should these occur, they shall be dug out, reformed and refilled to

sufficient depth and shape for thorough bonding, as directed by ENGINEER.

16.5 PLACING CONCRETE THROUGH REINFORCING STEEL:

When placing concrete through reinforcing steel, care shall be taken to prevent segregation

of the coarse aggregate. Where the congestion of steel makes placing difficult, it may be







necessary to temporarily move the top steel aside to get proper placement and restore

reinforcing steel to design position.

16.6 BLEEDING:

Should bleeding of free water on top of concrete being placed into the form occur, the

conditions causing this defect shall be corrected before further concreting is resumed.

17.0 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS:

17.1 Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of the part of the work

between predetermined construction joints, as specified hereinafter. Time lapse between

the pouring of adjoining units shall be as specified on the drawings or as directed by

ENGINEER.

17.2 If stopping of concreting become unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction

joint shall be made where the work is stopped. Joint shall be either vertical or horizontal

unless otherwise shown on drawings. In case of an inclined or curved member, the joint

shall be at the right angles to the axis of the member. Vertical joints in walls shall be kept to

a minimum. Vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board; horizontal joints shall be

level and wherever possible, arranged so that the joint lines coincide with the architectural

features of the finished work. Battens shall be nailed to the form work to ensure a

horizontal line, and if directed, shall also be used to form a grooved joint. For water storage

tank walls and similar work, joints shall be formed as per IS: 3370. Concrete that is in the

process of setting shall not be disturbed or shaken by traffic either on the concrete itself or

upon the shuttering. Horizontal and vertical construction joints and shear keys shall be

located and shall conform in detail to the requirements of plans, unless otherwise directed

by ENGINEER. Where not described, the joint shall be in accordance with the following:

17.2.1 COLUMN JOINTS:

In a column, the joint shall be formed 75 mm below the lowest soffit of the beams includinghaunches, if any. In flat slab construction, the joint shall be 75 mm below the soffit of

column capital. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in columns, piers or

walls, before depositing in beams, girders or slabs supported thereon.

17.2.2 BEAM AND SLAB JOINTS:

Concrete in a beam/girder shall be placed throughout without a joint, however, if provision

of a joint is unavoidable, the joint shall be vertical and between quarter and third points of

the spans unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where a beam intersects a girder, the joint

in the girder shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam and additional

reinforcement provided for shear, if required. the joints shall be vertical throughout the full







thickness of the concrete member. A joint in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the

principal reinforcement. Where it is unavoidable at right angles to the principal

reinforcement, the joint shall be vertical and at the middle of the span.

17.3 JOINTS IN LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURE:

Vertical construction joints in watertight construction will not be permitted unless indicated

on the drawings. Where a horizontal construction joint is required to resist water pressure,

special care shall be taken in all phases of its construction to ensure water-tightness.

17.4 DOWELS:

Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be encased in

concrete as per drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER.

18.0 TREATMENT OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ON RESUMING CONCRETING:

A stiffer mix shall be used for the top lift of horizontal pours to avoid laitance. All laitance

and loose stones shall be thoroughly and carefully removed by wire brushing/hacking and

surface washed. Just before concreting is resumed, the roughened joint surface shall be

thoroughly cleaned and loose matter removed and then treated with a thin layer of cement

grout of proportion specified by ENGINEER and worked well into the surface. The newconcrete shall be well worked against the prepared surface before the grout mortar sets.

Special care shall be taken to obtain thorough compaction and to avoid segregation of the

concrete along the joints/plane.

19.0 CURING, PROTECTING, REPAIRING AND FINISHING:

19.1 CURING:

All concrete shall be cured by keeping it continuously damp for the period of time required

for complete hydration and hardening to take place. Preference shall be given to the use ofcontinuous sprays, or ponded water, continuously saturated covering of sacking, canvas,

hessians or other absorbent materials, or approved effective curing compounds applied

with spraying equipment capable of producing a smooth, even-textured coat. Extra

precautions shall be excercised in curing concrete during cold and hot weather as outlined

hereinafter. The quality of curing water shall be the same as that used for mixing concrete.

19.2 CURING WITH WATER:

Fresh concrete shall be kept continuously wet for a minimum period of 10 days from the

date of placing of concrete, following a lapse of 12 to 14 hours after laying concrete. The







curing of horizontal surface exposed to the drying winds shall however begin immediately

after the concrete surface within 1 hour after concrete has set. Water shall be applied to

formed surface immediately upon the removal of forms. Quantity of water applied shall becontrolled so as the prevent erosion of freshly placed concrete.

19.3 CONTINUOUS SPRAYING:

Curing shall be assured by use of an ample water supply under pressure in pipes, with all

necessary appliance of hose, sprinkle and spraying devices. Continuous fine mist spraying or

sprinkling shall be used, unless otherwise specified or approved by ENGINEER.

19.4 CURING EQUIPMENT:

All equipment and materials required for curing shall be on hand and ready for use before

concrete is placed.

20.0 PROTECTING FRESH CONCRETE:

Fresh concrete shall be protected from the element, from defacement & damage due to

construction operations by leaving forms in place for an ample period as specified later in

this specification. Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means such as

tarpaulins from rain, sun & winds. Steps as approved by ENGINEER shall also taken to

protect green concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, vibration abrasion orcontact with other materials, etc. that may impair the strength and/or durability of the

concrete. Workmen shall be warned against and prevented from disturbing green concrete

during its setting period. If it is necessary that workman enter the area of freshly placed

concrete, ENGINEER may required that bridges be placed over the area.

21.0 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF UNSATISFACTORY CONCRETE:

21.1 Immediately after the shuttering is removed, the surface of concrete shall be very carefully

gone over and all defective areas called to the attention of ENGINEER who may permit

patching of the defective areas, by CONTRACTOR, or also reject the concrete unit, either

partially or in its entirety, at no additional expenses to OWNER. Holes left by form bolts, etc.

shall be filled up and made good with mortar composed of one part of cement to one and

half parts of sand passing 2.36 mm I.S. sieve after removing any loose stones adhering to

the concrete. Mortar filling shall be struck off flush at the face of the concrete. Concrete

surfaces shall be finished as described under the relevant items of work.

21.2 Superficial honeycombed surfaces and rough patches shall similarly be made good

immediately after removal on shuttering, in the presence of ENGINEER and superficial water

and air holes shall be filled in. The mortar shall be well worked into the surface with a

wooden float. Excess water shall be well worked into the surface with a wooden float.







Excess water shall be avoided. Unless instructed otherwise by ENGINEER, the surface of the

exposed concrete placed against shuttering shall be rubbed down immediately removal of

shuttering to remove the fine or other irregularities, care being taken to avoid damage tothe surface. Surface irregularities shall be removed by grinding.

21.3 If reinforcement is exposed or honeycombing occurs at vulnerable positions, e.g. ends of

beams or columns, it may be necessary to cut out the member completely or in part and

reconstruct. The decision of ENGINEER shall be final in this regard. If only patching is

necessary, the defective concrete shall cut out till sound concrete is reached (or to a

minimum depth of 25 mm) the edges being cut perpendicular to the affected surface or

with small undercut, if possible. Anchors, tees or dovetail slots shall be provided, whenever

necessary, to attach the new concrete securely in place. An area extending severalcentimetres beyond the edges and the surface of the repaired voids shall be saturated with

water for 24 hours immediately before the patching material is placed.

21.4 USE OF EPOXY:

The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs will be permitted upon written

approval of ENGINEER. Epoxies shall be applied in strict accordance with the instructions of

the manufacturer.

21.5 METHOD OF REPAIR:

Small size holes having surface dimensions about equal to the depth of hole, holes left after

removal of form bolts, grout insert holds and slots cut for repair of cracks shall be repaired

as follows. The hole to be patched shall be roughened and thoroughly soaked with clean

water until absorption stops.

A 5 mm thick layer of grout of equal parts of cement and sand shall be well brushed into the

surface to be patched, followed immediately by the patching concrete which shall be well

consolidated with a wooden float & felt slightly protruding of the surrounding surface. The

concrete shall be built up in 10 mm thick layers. After an hour or more, depending upon

weather conditions, it shall be worked off flush with a wooden float and a smooth finish

obtained by wiping with hessian, using a steel trowel for this purpose. The mix for patching

shall be of the same materials and in the same proportion as that used in the concrete

being repaired although reduction in the maximum size of the coarse aggregates may be

necessary and the mix shall be kept as dry as possible, as directed by ENGINEER.

Mortar filling by air pressure (grouting) shall be used for repair of areas too large and/or too

shallow for patching with mortar. Patched surfaces shall be given a final treatment to match

the colour and textures of the surrounding concrete. White cement shall be substituted forordinary cement, if so directed by ENGINEER, so match the shade of patch with the original







concrete. No payment whatsoever shall be made to the CONTRACTOR on account of repair

work.

21.6 CURING OF PATCHED/REPAIR WORK:

The patched areas shall be covered immediately/with an approved non-staining, water

saturated material such as gunny bags, etc. as stated earlier which shall be kept

continuously wet and protected against sun and wind for a period of 24 hours. Thereafter

the patched area shall be kept wet continuously by fine spray or sprinkling for not less than

14 days.

22.0 FORMWORK:

22.1 The formwork shall consist of shores, bracings sides of beams and column, bottom of slabs,

etc. including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts, etc. complete which shall be properly designed

and planned for the work. False work shall be so constructed that vertical adjustments can

be made to compensate for take up and settlements. Wedges may be used at the top or

bottom of timber props, but not at both ends, to facilitate vertical adjustment or

dismantling of the formwork.

22.2 DESIGN OF FORMWORK:

The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be theresponsibility of CONTRACTOR. If so instructed, the drawings and/or calculations for the

design of the formwork shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval before proceeding

with work, at no extra cost to OWNER. ENGINEER's approval shall not, however, absolve the

CONTRACTOR of his full responsibility for the design and construction of the formwork. The

design shall take into account all the loads, vertical as well as lateral, that the form would be

carrying, including live and vibration loadings.

22.3 TOLERANCES:

Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grades or dimensions given on

drawings. no tolerances specified for horizontal or vertical building lines or footings shall be

construed to permit encroachment beyond the legal boundaries. Unless otherwise

specified, the following tolerance will be permitted.

Tolerance for R.C. Buildings:

Variation from the plumb:

a) In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arises 5 mm per 2.5 m or 25 mm

whichever is less:







b) For exposed corner columns and other conspicuous lines:

In any bay of 5 m maximum - 5 mm

In 10 m or more - 10 mm

Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings:

a) In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffit, and in arises:

In 2.5 m - 5 mm

In any bay or 5 m maximum - 8 mm


For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines:



Variation of the linear building lines form established position in plan and related position of

columns, walls and partitions.



Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, openings in walls and floors. except in the

case of and for anchor bolts.

Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of slab

and walls.

Minus - 5 mm

Plus - 10 mm

Footings:

a) Variation in dimensions in plan

Minus - 5 mm

Plus - 50 mm







b) Misplacement or eccentricity:

2% of footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm.

c) Reduction in thickness

Minus - 5% of specified thickness subject to a maximum of 50 mm.

Tolerances in other Concrete Structures:

a) All structures

Variation of the constructed linear outline from established position in plan.

In 5 m - 10 mm


Variation of dimensions to individual structure features from established positions.


In buried construction - 50 mm

Variation from level or grade indicated on drawings in slab, beams, soffits, horizontal

grooves and visible arrises.

In 2.5 m - 5 mm

In 7.5 m or more - 10 mm

In buried construction - Twice the above amounts.

Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns beams, but tresses, piers and similar

members.

Minus - 5 mm; Plus - 10 mm

a) Variation in the thickness of slabs, walls, arch sections and similar members


b) Footing for columns, piers, walls, but- tresses and similar members

Variation of dimensions in plan








Misplacement or eccentricity:

2% of footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm.

Reduction in thickness : 5% of specified thickness subject to a max. of 50 mm.

Tolerances in fixing bolts shall be as follows:

Anchor bolts without sleeves Plus/Minus 1.5 mm in plan.

Anchor bolts with sleeves Plus/minus 5.0 mm in elevation.

For bolts upto and including 28 mm dia plus/minus 5 mm in all directions.

For bolts 32 mm dia and above plus/minus 3 mm in all directions.

Embedded parts plus/minus 5 mm in all directions.

22.4 TYPE OF FORMWORK:

Formwork may be of timber, plywood, metal, plastic or concrete. For special finishes the

formwork may be lined with plywood, steel sheets, oil tempered hard board, etc. Sliding

forms and slip forms may be used with the approval of ENGINEER.

22.5 FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS:

Forms shall conform to the shapes, lines, grades and dimensions, including camber of the

concrete as called for on the drawings. Ample studs, walers, braces, ties, straps, shores, etc.

shall be used to hold the Forms in proper position without any distortion whatsoever until

the concrete has set sufficiently to permit the removal of forms. Forms shall be strong

enough to permit the use of immersion vibrators. The shuttering shall be close boarded.

Timber shall be well seasoned free from sap shakes, loose knots, worm holes, warps or

other surface defects in contact with concrete. Faces coming in contact with the concrete

shall be free from adhering grout, plaster, paint projecting nails, splits or other defects. joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of water and fine material from concrete.

Plywood shall be used for Exposed Concrete surfaces, where called for Sawn and wrought

timber may be used for unexposed surfaces. Inside faces of forms for concrete surfaces

which are to be rubbed finished shall be planed to remove irregularities or unevenness in

the face. Formwork with linings will be permitted.

All new and used material for lumber shall be maintained in a good condition with respect

to shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness, smoothness and cleanliness of surfaces. Form

lumber unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be used and, if rejected by ENGINEER, shall beremoved from the site.







Formwork, during any stage of construction showing signs of distortion or distorted to such

a degree that the intended concrete work will not conform to the exact contours shown on

the drawings, shall be repositioned and strengthened. poured concrete affected by thefaulty formwork, shall be removed in its entirety and the formwork corrected, as directed

by ENGINEER, prior to placing new concrete.

Excessive provision of camber to compensate for shrinkage settlement, etc. that may impair

the structural strength of members will not be permitted.

Forms for substructure concrete may be omitted when, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the

open excavation is firm enough to act as the form. Such excavation shall be slightly larger

than that required by the drawings to compensate for irregularities in excavation and to

ensure concrete cover and the design requirements.

Forms shall be so designed and constructed that their removal will not damage the

concrete. Face formwork shall provide true vertical and horizontal joints, conform to the

architectural features of the structure as to location of joints and be as directed by

ENGINEER.

When exposed smooth or rubbed concrete finishes are required, the forms shall be

constructed with special care so that the resulting concrete surfaces require a minimum

finish.

22.6 BRACINGS, STRUTS AND PROPS:

Shuttering shall be braced, strutted, propped and so supported that it shall not deform

under weight and pressure of the concrete and also due to the movement of men,

equipment and other materials. Bamboos shall not be used as props or cross bearers.

The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the shuttering on the sides of

the beams and under the soffit of slabs can be removed without disturbing the beam

bottoms. Reproping of beams shall not be done except when props have to be reinstated totake care of construction loads anticipated to be in excess of the design load. Vertical props

shall be supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken whereby the props can be

gently lowered vertically while striking the shuttering.

If the shuttering for a column is erected for the full height of the columns, one side shall be

left open and built up in sections as placing of concrete proceeds, or windows may be left

for pouring concrete from the sides to limit the drop of concrete to 1.0 m or, as directed by

ENGINEER.







22.7 MOULD OIL:

Care shall be taken to see that the faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete areperfectly cleaned and two coats of mould oil or any other approved material applied before

fixing reinforcement and placing concrete. ( Burnt lube oil will not be allowed). Such coating

shall be insoluble in water, non-staining and not injurious to the concrete. it shall not

become flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Reinforcement and/or other items to

be cast in the concrete shall not be placed until coating of the forms is complete. Adjoining

concrete surfaces shall also be protected against contamination from the coating material.

22.8 CHAMFERS AND FILLETS:

All corners and angles exposed in the finished structure shall be formed with mouldings toform chamfers or fillets on the finished concrete. The standard dimensions of chamfers and

fillets, unless otherwise specified, shall be 20 mm x 20 mm. Care shall be excercised to

ensure accurate moulding. The diagonal face of the moulding shall be planed or surfaced to

the same texture as to form to which it is attached.

22.9 VERTICAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT CHAMFERS:

Vertical construction joints on faces which will be exposed at the complication of the work

shall be chamfered as above except where not permitted by ENGINEER for structural or

hydraulic reasons.

22.10 WALL TIES:

Wire ties passing the walls shall not be allowed. in their place bolts passing through sleeves

shall be used.

22.11 REUSE OF FORMS:

Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scrapped, cleaned, nails removed, holes, that

may leak, suitably plugged and joint examined and when necessary, repaired and the insideretreated to prevent adhesion to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. Warped lumber shall be

resized. CONTRACTOR shall equip himself with enough shuttering to complete the job in the

stipulated time.

22.12 REMOVAL OF FORMS:

22.12.1 CONTRACTOR shall record on the drawing or a special register, the date upon which the

concrete is placed in each part of the work and the date on which the shuttering is removed

therefrom.







22.12.2 Under no circumstances shall forms be struck until the concrete reaches a strength of at

least twice the stress due to self-weight and any construction/erection loading to which the

concrete may be subjected at the time of striking formwork, as directed by ENGINEER.

22.12.3 In normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 20 deg. C), forms may

be struck after expiry of the following periods, where ordinary Portland cement is used and

adequate curing is done:

TYPE OF FORMWORK MIN. PERIOD BEFORE STRIKING FORMWORK

a) Walls columns and vertical sides of beams. 16 to 24 hours as directed by the ENGINEER.

b) Slabs (Props left under) 3 days

c) Beam soffits (Props left under) 7 days

d) Removal of props under slabs:

i) Spanning upto 4.5 m. 7 days

ii) Spanning over 4.5 m. 14 days

e) Removal of props under beams:

i) Spanning upto 6 m. 14 days

ii) Spanning over 6 m. 21 days

Striking shall be done slowly with utmost care so to avoid damage to arrises and projections

and without shock or vibration, by gently easing the wedges. If after removing the form

work, it is found that timber ahs been embedded in the concrete, it shall be removed and

made good as specified earlier.

22.12.4 Reinforced temporary openings shall be provided as directed by ENGINEER to facilitate

removal of formwork which otherwise may be inaccessible.

22.12. Tie rods, clamps, form bolts, etc. which must be entirely removed from walls or similar

structures, shall be loosened not sooner than 24 hours nor later than 48 hours after the

concrete has been deposited. Tiles, except those required to hold forms in place, may be

removed at the time. Ties withdrawn from walls and grade beams shall be pulled towards

the inside face. Cutting ties back from the faces of walls and grade beams shall not be

permitted.

22.12.6 For liquid retaining structures, to sleeves for through bolts shall be used, nor shall throughbolts be removed as indicated in 24.12.5. The bolts, in this case, shall be cut at 25 mm depth







from the surface and then the hole shall be made good by sand cement mortar of the same

proportion of the concrete, just after striking the formwork.

23.0 FOUNDATION BEDDING, BONDING AND JOINTS:

23.1 All surfaces upon or against which concrete will be placed shall be suitably prepared by

thoroughly cleaning, washing and dewatering, as indicated on the plans or as directed by

the ENGINEER, to meet the various situations encountered in the work.

23.2 Soft or spongy areas shall be cleaned out and backfilled with either a soil-cement mixture,

lean concrete or clean sand, till compacted to a minimum density of 90% Modified Proctor,

unless otherwise mentioned in Schedule of Quantities.

23.3 PREPARATION OF EARTH STRATA OF FOUNDATIONS:

All earth surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, shall be well compacted

and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft, yielding soil shall be removed and

replaced with suitable earth, sand or murrum well compacted as directed by ENGINEER.

Where specified, lean concrete shall be provided on the earth stratum for receiving

concrete. The surface of absorptive soils against which concrete is to be placed shall be

moistened thoroughly so that no moisture will be drawn from the freshly placed concrete,

and later shall help to cure the concrete.

23.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES:

The preparation of concrete surfaces upon which additional concrete is to be placed later,

shall preferably be done by scarifying and cleaning, while the concrete is between its initial

and final set. This method shall be used wherever practicable and shall consist of cutting the

surface with picks and stiff brooms and by use of an approved combination of air and water

jet as directed by ENGINEER. Utmost care shall be excercised in performing this work to

avoid removal of too much mortar and the weakening of the surface by loosening of

aggregates.

When it is not practicable to follow the above method, it will be necessary to employ

compressed air to remove laitance and roughen the surface.

The final required result shall be a pitted surface from which all dirt, unsound concrete,

laitance and glazed mortar have been removed.

23.5 BONDING TREATMENT (MORTAR):

23.5.1 After rock or concrete surface upon which new concrete is to be placed have been scarified,

cleaned and wetted, as specified herein, they shall receive a bonding treatment,immediately before placement of the concrete.







23.5.2 The bonding medium shall be a coat of cement-sand mortar. The mortar shall have the

same cement-sand proportions as the concrete which shall be placed thereon. The water-

cement ratio shall be determined by site conditions and as approved by ENGINEER.

23.5.3 Bonding mortar shall be placed in sufficient quantity to completely cover the surface about

5 mm thick for concrete surfaces. It shall be brushed or broomed over the surface and

worked thoroughly into all cracks, crevices and depressions. Accumulations or puddles if

mortar shall not be allowed to settle in depressions and shall be brushed out to a

satisfactory degree, as approved by ENGINEER.

23.5.4 Mortar shall be placed at such a rate that it can be brushed over the surface just in advance

of placement of concrete. only as much areas shall be covered with mortar as can be

covered with concrete before initial set in the mortar takes place. The amount of mortar

that will be permitted to be placed at any one time, or the area which it is required to cover,

shall be in accordance with ENGINEER's directions.

23.6 CLEANING AND BONDING FORMED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:

Vertical construction joints shall be cleaned as specified above or by other methods as

approved by ENGINEER. in placing concrete against formed construction joints, the surfaces

of the joints, where accessible, shall be coated thoroughly with the specified bed-joint

bonding mortar immediately before they are covered with concrete, or by scrubbing withwire brooms dipped into the fresh concrete. Where it is impracticable to apply such a

mortar coating, special precautions shall be taken to ensure that the new concrete is

brought into intimate contact with the surface of the joint, by careful pudding and spading

with aid of vibrators and suitable tools.

23.7 EXPANSIION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS:

Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of concrete by use of special type

joints located as shown on the drawings. Construction joint surfaces shall be treated as per

specifications, drawings or as directed by ENGINEER.

24.0 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENT:

24.1 All concrete work performed in hot weather shall be in accordance with IS: 456:2000,

except as herein modified.

24.2 Admixture may be used only when approved by ENGINEER.

24.3 Adequate provisions shall be made to lower concrete temperatures by cool ingredients,

eliminating excessive mixing, preventing exposure of mixers and conveyors to direct sun-







light, the use of reflective paint on mixers, etc. The temperature of the freshly placed

concrete shall not be permitted to exceed 38 deg.C.

24.4 Consideration shall be given to providing shade aggregate stockpiles from direct rays of the

sun and spraying stockpiles with water, use of cold water when available and burying,

insulating shading and/or painting white the pipe lines & water storage tanks.

24.5 In order to reduce loss of mixing water, the aggregates, wooden forms, subgrade, adjacent

concrete and other moisture absorbing surfaces shall be well wetted prior to concreting.

placement and finishing shall be done as quickly as possible.

24.6 Extra precautions shall be taken for the protection and curing of concrete. Consideration

shall be given to continuous water curing and protection against high temperatures anddrying hot winds for a period of at least 12 days immediately after concrete has set and

after which normal curing procedures may be resumed.

25.0 PRECAST CONCRETE:

25.1 Precast concrete shall comply with IS: 456:2000 and also with following:

All precast units shall be cast on a suitable bed or platform with firm foundation and free

from wind. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of the level or shape of the

bed or platform. A suitable serial number and the date of casting shall be impressed orpainted on each unit.

25.2 STRIKING FORMS:

Side shutters shall not be struck in less than 24 hours after placing concrete and no precast

unit shall be lifted until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice the stress to which

the concrete may be subjected to at the time of lifting, as directed by ENGINEER.

25.3 PRECAST UNITS:

The lifting and removal of precast units shall be undertaken without causing shock,

vibration or undue bending stresses to or in the units. before, lifting and removal takes

place, CONTRACTOR shall satisfy ENGINEER or his representative that the methods he

proposes to adopt for these operations will not overstress or otherwise affect the strength

of the precast units. The reinforced side of the units shall be distinctly marked.

25.4 CURING:

All precast work shall be protected from the direct rays of sun for at least 14 days after

casting and during that period each unit shall be kept constantly watered or preferably be







completely immersed in water if the size of the unit so permits. Otherwise curing practice as

given earlier shall be followed.

26.0 SLOTS, OPENINGS ETC.:

Slots, openings or holes, pockets, etc., shall be provided in the concrete work in the

positions indicated in the drawings or as directed by ENGINEER. Any deviation from the

approved drawings shall be made good by CONTRACTOR at his own expense without

damaging any other work. Sleeves, bolts, inserts, etc. shall also be provided in concrete

work where so specified.

27.0 GROUTING:

27.1 STANDARD GROUT:

The proportions of grout shall be such as to produce a flowable mixture consistent with

minimum water content and shrinkage. The grout proportions shall be as specified on

drawings and as directed by ENGINEER.

a) Sand shall be such as to produce a flowable grout without any tendency to segregate.

b) Sand, for general grouting purposes, shall be graded within the following limits:

Passings IS: 2.36 mm sieve 95 to 100%

Passing IS: 1.18 mm sieve 65 to 95%

Passing IS: 300 micron sieve 10 to 30%

Passing IS: 150 micron sieve 3 to 10%

c) Surface to be grouted shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter

and laitance.

d) Prior to grouting, the hardened concrete surfaces to be grouted shall be saturated with

water.

Forms around base plates shall be reasonably tight to prevent leakage of the grout.

Adequate clearance shall be provided between forms and base plate to permit grout to be

worked into place properly.

Grouting, once started, shall be done quickly and continuously to prevent segregation,bleeding and breakdown of initial set. Grout shall be worked from one side of one end to







the other to prevent entrapment of air. To distribute the grout and to ensure more

complete contact between base plate & foundation and to help release entrapped air, link

chains can be used to work the grout into plate.

Grouting through holes in base plats shall be by pressure grouting, variations in grout mixes

and procedures shall be permitted if approved by ENGINEER.

27.2 SPECIAL GROUT:

Special grout, where specified on the drawings, shall be provided in strict accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions/specifications on the drawings.

28.0 INSPECTION:

All materials, workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to the continuous

inspection and approval of ENGINEER.

All materials supplied by CONTRACTOR and all work or construction performed by

CONTRACTOR and rejected as not in conformity with the specifications and drawings, shall

be immediately replaced at no additional expense to the OWNER, and to the entire

satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

Approval of any preliminary materials or phase of work shall in no way absolve the

CONTRACTOR from his responsibility of supplying concrete and/or producing finished

concrete in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

All concrete shall be protected by the CONTRACTOR against damage until finally accepted

by the OWNER or his representative.

29.0 CLEAN UP:

Upon the completion of concrete work, all forms, equipment, construction tools, protective

coverings and any debris resulting from the work shall be removed from the premises.

All the debris i.e. empty containers, scrap wood, etc, shall be removed daily, as directed by

ENGINEER.

The finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean condition to the entire satisfaction of

the ENGINEER.

30.0 PAYMENT:

30.1 The unit rate for concrete work under various categories shall be all inclusive of all related

work and no claims for extra payment on account of such items as leaving holes,embedding, inserts, etc., shall be entertained. no extra claim shall also be entertained due







to change in the number, position and/or dimensions of holes, slots or openings, sleeves,

inserts or on account of any increased lift or scaffolding, etc. All these factors shall be taken

into consideration while quoting the unit rates.

30.2 Payment of concrete will be made on the basis of unit rates quoted for the respective items

in the Schedule of Quantities. No deduction in the concrete quantity will be made for

reinforcements, inserts, etc. and opening less than 1/20 of a sq.m. in area where concrete is

measured in sq.m. & 1/50 OF Cu.M. where concrete is measured in cu.m. Similarly the unit

rates for concrete work shall be inclusive or exclusive of shuttering as provided for in the

Schedule of Quantities. Where formwork is paid for separately, it shall be very clearly

understood that payment for formwork is inclusive of formwork, shuttering, shoring,

propping, scaffolding, etc. complete.

30.3 PAYMENT for beams will be made for the quantity based on the depth being reckoned from

the underside of the slabs and length measured as the clear distance between supports.

payments for columns shall be made for the quantity based on height reckoned upto the

underside of slabs.

30.4 The unit rate for precast concrete members shall include formwork, mouldings, finishings,

hoisting and setting in position including setting mortar, provision of lifting arrangements,

etc. complete.

Reinforcement shall be measured and paid for separately as per Schedule of Quantities.







GROUP - 3

BRICK WORK

1.0 BRICKS:

1.1 Bricks used in works shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards. They shall be sound,

hard, homogenous in texture, well burnt in kiln without being vitrified, table moulded, deep

red, cherry or copper coloured, of regular shape and size and shall have sharp & square

edges and parallel faces. The bricks shall be free from pores, chips, flaws or humps of any

kind. Bricks containing unground particles and/or which absorb water more than 1/6th of

their weight when soaked in water for twenty-four hours shall be rejected. Over burnt or

under-burnt bricks shall be liable to rejection. The bricks shall give a clear ringing sound

when struck and shall have a minimum crushing strength of 35 Kg/sq.cm., unless otherwisenoted on drawing/BOQ. The classes and quality requirements of bricks shall be as laid down

in IS : 3102.

1.2 The size of the brick shall be approx. 230 x 115 x 75/100 mm unless otherwise specified, but

tolerance upto plus 3 mm in each direction shall be permitted. However, bricks conforming

in size to IS : 1077 could be used. Bricks shall be provided with frogs. Only full size bricks

shall be used for masonry work. Brickbats shall be used only with the permission of the

ENGINEER to make up required wall length or for bonding. Sample bricks shall be submitted

to the ENGINEER for approval and bricks supplied and used in works shall conform to the

approved samples. Brick samples shall be got tested as per IS - 3495 by the CONTRACTOR atno extra cost to OWNER. Bricks rejected by ENGINEER shall be removed from the site of

works within 24 hours.

1.3 Specification of sand used for brick work shall be the same as that specified for concrete

work and shall belong to Grading ZONE-II.

1.4 MORTAR:

1.4.1 Mortar for brick masonry shall be prepared as per IS: 2250. Mix for cement mortar shall be

as specified in the respective items of work. Gauge boxes for sand shall be of suchdimensions that one complete bag of cement containing 50 kgs. of cement forms one unit.

The sand shall be free from clay, shale, loam, alkali and organic matter and shall be of

sound, hard, clean and durable particles. Sand shall be approved by ENGINEER. If so

directed by the ENGINEER, it shall be thoroughly washed till it is free of any contamination.

1.4.2 For preparing cement mortar, the ingredients shall first be mixed thoroughly in dry

condition. Water shall then be added and mixing continued to give a uniform mix of

required consistency. The mortar shall be thoroughly mixed of required consistency. The

mortar shall be thoroughly mixed and the same shall be used within 25 minutes of mixing.

Mortar left unused in the above specified period shall be rejected.







1.4.3 The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for test on mortar samples if so directed by the ENGINEER.

Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.

1.4.4 Quantity of mortar required for brick work shall be calculated assuming consumption rate

of 0.24 Cu.M. per Cu.M. of brick work.

CEMENT CONSUMPTION FOR MORTAR:

No. Mortar Proportion Cement Consumption

(Kgs./Cu.M.)

1. 1:1 1020 (20.4 Bags)

2. 1:2 680 (13.6 Bags)3. 1:3 510 (10.2 Bags)

4. 1:4 380 ( 7.6 Bags)

5. 1:5 310 ( 6.2 Bags)

6. 1:6 250 ( 5.0 Bags)

7. 1:1:6 250 ( 5.0 Bags)

(Cement: Lime: Sand)

Note: The above table is applicable for mortars used in all items of work.

1.5 WORKMANSHIP:

1.5.1 All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour immediately before

being laid. The cement mortar for brick masonry work shall be as specified in the respective

item of work. Brick work 230 mm thick and over shall be laid in English Bond unless

otherwise specified. The work of 115 mm thickness shall be laid with stretchers. For laying

bricks a layer of mortar shall be spread over the full width of the length of the lower course.

Each brick shall be pressed into the mortar and shoved into final position so as to embed

the brick fully in mortar. Bricks shall be laid with frogs uppermost.

1.5.2 All brickwork shall be plumb, square and true to dimensions shown. Vertical joints in

alternate courses shall come directly one over the other and shall be in line. Horizontal

courses shall be levelled. The thickness greater than 230 mm both faces shall be kept in

vertical planes. All interconnected brickwork shall be carried out at nearly one level and no

portion of the work shall be left more than one course lower than the adjacent work.

Where this is not possible, the work shall be raked back according to bond (and not saw

toothed) at an angle not exceeding 45 deg. But in no case the level difference between

adjoining walls shall exceed 1.25 M. Workmanship shall conform to IS: 2212.







1.5.3 Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are well filled with mortar. The thickness of joints shall

not be less than 6 mm. and not more than 12 mm. The face joints shall be raked to a

minimum depth of 12 mm by raking tools daily during the progress of work when themortar is still green, so as to provide a proper key for the plaster or pointing to be done.

When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be uniform in

thickness and be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. The face of brickwork shall

be cleaned daily and all mortar droppings removed. The surface of each course shall be

thoroughly cleaned of all dirt before another course is laid on top. If the mortar in the lower

course has begun to set, the joints shall be raked out to depth of 12 mm before another

course laid.

1.5.4 All brickwork shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural members.

1.6 Miscellaneous inserts in masonry e.g. sleeves, walls ties, anchors, conduits, structural steel,

etc. shall be installed by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to the OWNER. Furnishing of any

of these inserts by the CONTRACTOR will be paid for separately. Openings, arches, etc. shall

be provided as shown on the drawings to receive windows, louvers, door frames, etc. Wall

ties and flashings shall be built into the brickwork in accordance with the drawings and

specifications. It shall be clearly understood that the rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR

include for fixing of inserts, leaving openings, cutting chases in brickwork for various trades,

etc.

1.7 FACING BRICKWORK:

1.7.1 Facing bricks of the type specified shall be laid in the positions indicated on the drawings

and all facing brickwork shall be well bounded to the backing bricks. No facing brickwork

shall at any time be more than 600 mm above the backing brickwork.

1.7.2 All facing brickwork shall be pointed as the work proceeds and internal faces of the

brickwork shall be pointed with neat flush joint to give a fair face.

1.7.3 Faced work shall be kept clean and free from damage, discolouration, etc. at all times. The

CONTRACTOR shall fill carefully all holes with bricks similar to the surrounding brickwork,

point brick work, as required.

1.7.4 For facing brickwork, double scaffolding shall be used and no holes in brickwork for

scaffolding shall be permitted.

1.7.5 The green work shall be protected from rain by suitable coverings. Bricks shall be kept

constantly moist on all the faces for a minimum period of ten days. Brick work shall not be

raised more than one metre per day.







1.7.6 The rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR shall be exclusive of transomes and mullions.

CONTRACTOR shall provide the same as shown or indicated on the drawings. These shall

generally be provided only in half and full brick walls. Dimensions of the transomes andmullions shall conform to the specifications for concrete and shall be gradeM15.

1.8 MEASUREMENT :

Brickwork of all thickness shall unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of Quantities, be

paid in units of cu.m. In all cases, the quantities measured and paid for shall be those

actually executed after making necessary deductions for openings, etc. Brick masonry for

steps and such other mass works and encasement shall be paid on the basis of rates quoted

per cu.m.

1.9 INSERTS, BOLTS, ETC.

Inserts, bolts, etc. shall be provided in masonry works as indicated on the drawings. It is

imperative that all inserts bolts, fixtures and fittings shall be provided in their position very

accurately. If the ENGINEER directs that such inserts and bolts be fixed by use of templates,

the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for providing such templates. If as a

consequence of negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the inserts, bolts, fixtures,

fittings, etc. are out of alignment, the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements to have the

inserts and bolts removed and refixed in their proper position as directed by the ENGINEERat no extra cost to the OWNER.

1.9.1 MEASUREMENT :

Inserts, bolts, etc. shall be measured and paid for as per the Schedule of Quantities.

2.0 BRICK ON EDGE PAVING/PITCHING

2.1 Bricks :

Bricks of the specified strength shall be used. These shall conform to the specificationsdescribed in Group 3. Broken bricks shall not be used in flooring except for closing the line.

The bricks shall be laid on edge.

2.2 Mortar :

The mortar used shall be as specified. In case of dry brick flooring fine sand shall be filled in

the joints.

2.3 Sub-Grade :







2.3.1 Flooring shall be laid on concrete sub-grade, where so provided. The sub-grade shall be

provided with the slope required for the flooring. Floors in verandahs, kitchens, bath,

water-closets and courtyards shall in variably be provided with suitable slopes to drain offwashing and rain water. Plinth masonry off-set shall be depressed so as to allow the sub-

grade concrete to rest on it.

2.3.2 Where sub-grade is not provided, the earth below shall be properly sloped, watered, ramm

ed and consolidated. Before laying the flooring, it shall be moistened.

2.4 Laying :

2.4.1 The bricks shall be laid on edge in plain, diagonal herring bone bond, or other pattern as

specified or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.4.2 Bricks shall be laid on edge on 12 mm thick mortar bed, and each brick shall be properly

bedded and set home by gentle tapping with handle trowel or wooden mallet. Its inside

faces shall be buttered with mortar, before the next brick is laid and pressed against it.

2.4.3 On completion of a portion of flooring the vetical joints shall be fully filled from the top with

mortar. The surface of the flooring during laying, shall be frequently checked with a straight

edge at least 2 M long, so as to obtain a true plain surface with the required slope.

2.4.4 Dry brick flooring shall be laid on a bed of 12 mm thick mud mortar laid to required slope.

2.5 Joints :

Brick shall be so laid that all joints are full of mortar. The thickness of joints shall not exceed

1.0 cm for brick work with bricks of any class designation. All face joints shall be raked to a

minimum depth of 15 mm by raking tool during the progress of work when the mortar is

still green so as to provide proper key for the plaster or pointing to be done. Whereplastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished

at the time of laying. The face of brick work shall be cleaned on the same day on which

brick work is laid and all mortar droppings removed promptly.

2.6 Measurements :

The measurement of Brick on edge flooring/paving will be done on Cu.m basis or as

specified otherwise. The actual measurements of length, breadth and height will be taken

for calculations.

2.7 Rate :







The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations

described above, including application of cement slurry on sub-grade or R.C.C. slab and

leveling, cleaning of sub-grade. However excavation/filling of sub grade, if any will be paidfor separately.







GROUP - 4

DOORS & WINDOWS /WINDOW / TOP HUNG VENTILATORS

Providing and fixing Windows, Top Hung Ventilators fabricated from roll formed sections made of

Galvanized Steel Colour Coated powder Coated (Base Steel) as per IS 513 “D” quality, Galvanized

as per IS 277 with Zinc of 120 grams/ Sq. Mtr.) with total coated thickness of 0.60 mm.

Paint Specifications:

Coated Sections should be with Primer Coat of Epoxy Primer of 5-7 microns thick, finish painted

with a Polyester Paint of 12-16 microns thick and back coated with Alkyd backer of 5-7 microns, or

Powder Coated with pure Polyester Powder up to 50-60 microns thick.

Dimensions of Sections:

Section for Shutter should be of 46mm x 46mm and External Frame should be of 46mm x 52 mm.

Section for Glass Beading should be of 18mm x 25mm and center mullion should be of 46mm x

70mm.

Fixing Details:

The Frame & Shutter Sections should be cut to length and mitre jointed with Corner Bracket made

of CRCA electroplated. Mullion Sections should be jointed with Frame/ Mullion using Nylon

Mullion Cap Ethyl Propylene Diamine Monomer (EPDM) Gasket should be used all around glass inshutter, between frame and glazed shutter and both sides of fixed glass.

Accessories:

Handle made of high grade Aluminium powder coated and with nylon receiver. Gaskets made of

Ethyl Propylene Diamine Monomer (EPDM). Corner brackets made of CRCA with zinc phosphating.

Mullion caps made of Glass filled nylon.

Glass:

Glass shutter and fixed glass portions should be provided with a glass of 5mm Plain Float Glass.

Window Frame should be fixed to brick/concrete masonry by using Nylon self-expanding caps and

driving MS electroplated 80mm long screws into the cops through frames.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS

Providing and fixing Doors fabricated from roll formed sections made of Galvanized Steel Colour

Coated / Powder Coated (Base Steel as per IS 513 “D” quality, galvanized as per IS 277 with Zinc of

120 grams/Sq. Mtr.) with total coated thickness of 0.60 mm.









with a Polyester paint of 12-16 microns thick and back coated with Alkyd backer of 5-7 microns, orPowder Coated with pure polyester Powder up to 50-60 microns thick.


Sections for shutter should be of 46x46mm and external frame should be of 46x52mm, middle and

bottom rail (Lack Rail and Kick Rail) of size should be 23x130mm.

Fixing Details:

The Frame & Shutter Sections should be cut to length and mitre joined with Corner Bracket made

of CRCA electroplated. Ethyl Propylene Diamine Monomer (EPDM) Gasket should be used all

around glass in shutter, between frame and glazed shutter and both sides of fixed glass.

Accessories:

Handle and lack of approved quality. Hinges made of 2.5mm thick CRCA powder coated. Gasket

made of Ethyl Propylene Diamine Monomer.

Glass/Board:

Shutter should be provided party with glass of 5mm Plain Float Glass and partly board of 9mm

thickness.

The above Frame should be fixed to brick / concrete masonry by using Nylon self- expanding caps

and driving MS electroplated 80mm long screws into the caps through frames.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATABLE LOUVERED VENTILATOR:

Providing and fixing Louvered Ventilator Fabricated from roll formed sections made of Galvanized

Steel Colour Coated / Powder Coated (Base Steel as per IS 513 “D” quality, Galvanized as per IS 277

with Zinc of 120 grams / Sq. Mtr.) with total coated thickness of 0.60 mm.

Paint Specifications :


with a Polyester paint of 12-16 microns thick and back coated with Alkyd backer of 5-7 microns, or

Powder Coated with pure polyester Powder up to 50-60 microns thick.


The Sections for external frame should be of 18x40mm.

Fixing Details:

The Sections should be cut to length and mitre joined with Corner Bracket made of CRCA

electroplated.







Accessories:

Glass holding flanges mode of glass filled nylon. Gasket made of ethyl Propylene Diamine

Monomer. Handle made of nylon. Connecting Rod made of S.S. plate.

Glass:

Louvers should be provided with a glass of 5mm Plain Float Glass.

The above frames should be fixed to the concrete/masonry walls and floor by means of self

expanding screws.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SLIDING SYSTEMS

Providing and fixing Sliding Systems fabricated from roll formed sections made of Galvanized Steel

Colour Coated / Powder Coated (Base Steel as per IS 513 “D” quality, Galvanized as per IS 277 with

Zinc of 120 grams/Sq. Mtr.) with total coated thickness of 0.60mm.






Section for external frame bottom and top should be of 79x44mm. External frame sides should beof 69x26mm, guide for top and bottom should be of 69x26mm (stainless steel). Section for shutter

should be of 26x30mm.

Fixing Details:

The Frame & Shutter Sections should be cut to length and joined with Corner Bracket made of

Nylon Ethyl Propylene Diamine Monomer (EPDM) Gasket should be used all around glass in

shutter.

Accessories:

Corner bracket for internal and external frame made of glass filled nylon. Gasket made of Ethyl

Propylene Diamine Monomer.

Glass:

Glass shutter should be provided with a glass of 5mm Plain Float Glass.

Window Frame should be fixed to brick/concrete masonry by using Nylon self-expanding caps and

driving MS electroplated 80mm long screws into the caps through frames.







SPECIFICATIONS FOR SWING DOORS

Providing and fixing Swing Door fabricated from roll formed sections made of Galvanized SteelColour Coated / Powder Coated (Base Steel as per IS 513 “D” quality, Galvanized as per IS 277

WITH zinc of 120 grams/Sq. Mtr.) with total coated thickness of 0.60mm.






The sections are to be of 33x58mm for external frame, shutter should be with sections of46x52mm and 46x46mm and lock rail should be of 23x130mm.

Fixing Details:

The Frame & Shutter Sections should be cut to length and joined with Corner Bracket made of

CRCA electroplated. Ethyl Propylene Diamine Monomer (EPDM) Gasket should be used all around

glass in shutter.

Accessories:

Handle/lock, floor spring should be of approved quality, Gasket made of Ethyl Propylene Diamine

Monomer.

Glass/Board:

Shutter should be provided with party glass of 5mm Plain Float Glass and partly Board of 9mm

thickness.

The above Frame should be fixed to brick / concrete masonry by using Nylon self- expanding caps

and driving MS electroplated 80mm long screws into the caps through frames.







GROUP: 5

FLOORING WORKS

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers requirements for providing and laying flooring inside the buildings.

2.0 SOLING:

Specification for laying soling under the floor shall be similar to that for roadwork except

that 10 T rollers will not be used for compaction. Thickness of soling shall be as specified on

drawings.

3.0 MOSAIC, TERRAZZO, SHAABAD AND PLAIN CEMENT TILING WORK IN FLOORING:

3.1 The type, quality, size, thickness, colour, etc. of the tiles for flooring and skirting work shall

be of quality approved by the ENGINEER. Size of chips used in tiles shall range from 6 mm to

1.5 mm, according to the approved pattern. For this purpose, the CONTRACTOR shall

provide the ENGINEER with necessary samples for his selection.

3.2 Before the tiling work is commenced, the subsurface shall be thoroughly cleaned and

washed of all loose materials, dirt, and scum or laitance and then well wetted without

forming water pools on the surface.

3.3 The tiles shall be laid on lime concrete mortar of 1:3 ( 1 cement: 3 Coarse Sand) bedding of

25 mm thick. The proportion of mortar shall be one part of lime and three parts of sand.

Sand used for preparing mortar shall belong to Grading Zone-II. The mortar shall be evenly

spread on the sub-floor. The mortar shall be allowed to harden for a day before the tiles are

set. Over this mortar bed, 4.4 kg. of cement per sq.m. of floor area shall be spread. The tiles

shall be fixed on this bed one after another, each tile being gently tapped the adjoining tiles.

The joints shall be laid perfectly in level, unless otherwise specified or required or desired

by the ENGINEER. After laying the tiles the joints shall be finished with white cement or

cement of approved colour.

3.4 For lime mortar, lime from burnt stone shall be used. It shall be free from ash and impurities

and be in the form of lumps and not powder, when brought to site. Lime which is damaged

due to rain, soaking, moisture absorption or air slaking shall not be used.

3.5 Floor tiles laid adjoining the wall shall project 12 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado, as

may be required by the ENGINEER. Tile pieces shall not be used. After laying, the flooring

shall be allowed to cure undisturbed for 7 days. Design traffic shall not be allowed on thefloor for at least 14 days after laying the tiles.







3.6 About a week after laying the tiles, each and every tile shall be lightly tapped with a small

wooden mallet to find out if it gives a hollow sound; if it does, such tiles along with any

other cracked or broken, tiles shall be removed and replaced with new tiles to proper lineand level. The same procedure shall be followed again after ensuring the such replaced tiles

match with those laid earlier. It is necessary that the CONTRACTOR orders enough extra

tiles to meet this contingency. The tiles shall finally be cleaned and polished by using dilute

oxalic acid, or any other method recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the

ENGINEER.

3.7 After the joints have developed sufficient strength the floors shall be machine polished to

the desired to the desired finish as approved by the ENGINEER. Sufficient quantity of water

shall always be used during polishing to prevent scratching.

3.8 For dado and skirting work, the vertical surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted. The

minimum thickness of tiles shall be 12 mm. The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at

least 15 mm in masonry walls, while the masonry is being laid. Thereafter, it shall be evenly

and uniformly covered with apprx. 12 mm thick 1:2 cement mortar. For this work the tiles

as obtained from the factory shall be of the size required and practically fully polished. The

back of each tile to be fixed shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the

tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall with a wooden mallet. This shall be done

from the bottom of the surface upwards. The joints shall be as close as possible and shall be

filled with cement of approved make. The work shall be truly vertical and flush.

After the work has set, hand polishing with carborandum stones shall be done so that the

surface attains a high glossy finish. Corners and junctions shall be finished true. The

workmanship shall conform to IS: 1443.

3.9 The work is subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. If any portion of the work is rejected

by the ENGINEER, the same shall be removed and redone by the CONTRACTOR to the entire

satisfaction of the ENGINEER at no extra cost to the OWNER.

3.10 The procedure for laying and finishing cement or other tiles in floor and dado shall be as for

mosaic tiles, except that in this case the tiles shall be cement or other instead of

mosaic/terrazzo tiles.

3.11 MEASUREMENT

Unit of measurement for floor tiling, and dado shall be sq.m. or part thereof of the

superficial area. Actual quantity of tiling work carried out will be measured and paid for

after making deductions for openings, etc.For skirting, unit of measurement shall be linear

metre for the specified width, or area tiled as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.







4.0 SEMI-GLAZED TILE WORK :

The semi-glazed tiles in flooring and dado shall be of quality approved by the ENGINEER and

they shall be laid on a base 12 mm thick in CM 1:3. Over this mortar, cement slurry shall be

spread at 3.3 kg/sqm. The tiles shall be of standard size without warp and with straight

edges true and even in shape & size of uniform colour. They shall be laid truly vertical on

walls and truly horizontal on floors, or to slopes as directed. The joints shall be thin, uniform

and perfectly straight. The joints shall be floated with white cement as directed by the

ENGINEER. The rate quoted for flooring and dado work shall be inclusive of angles and

corner pieces. Glazed tiles shall conform to IS : 777.

5.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH:

5.1 Cement Concrete :

Cement concrete of specified mix shall be used and it shall generally conform to the

specifications described in Group-2.

5.2 Sub-Grade :

1. Flooring shall be laid on concrete sub-grade where so provided. The sub-grade shall be

provided with the slopes required for the flooring. Flooring in verandah, kitchens, baths,

water-closets and courtyards shall invariably be provided with suitable slope to drain off

washing and rain water. Plinth masonry off-set shall be depressed so as to allow the sub-

grade concrete to rest on it.

2. If the sub-grade consists of lime concrete it shall be allowed to set for seven days and the

flooring shall be laid in the next three days.

3. If the sub-grade is of lean cement concrete, the flooring shall be commenced preferably

within 48 hours of the laying of sub-grade. The surface of the sub-grade shall be roughenedwith steel wire brushes without disturbing the concrete. Before laying the flooring the sub-

grade shall be wetted and smeared with a coat of cement slurry at 2 kg of cement spread

over an area of one sq. m so as to get a good bond between the sub-grade and concrete

floor.

4. If the cement concrete flooring is to be laid directly on the R.C.C. slab the surface of R.C.C.

slab shall be cleaned and the laltance shall be removed and a coat of cement slurry at 2 kg

of cement per sq m shall be applied, so as to get a good bond between R.C.C. slab and

concrete floor.







5.3 Thickness :

The thickness of floor shall be as specified in the description of the item.

5.4.1 Laying :

Panels : Flooring of specified thickness shall be laid in the pattern as given in the drawings

or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The border shall have mitred joints at the corners

of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line with the panel joints. The

panels shall be of uniform size and no dimension of a panel shall exceed 2 m and the area of

a panel shall not be more than 2 sq m.

Laying with Strips : Normally cement concrete flooring shall be laid in one operation using

glass/plain asbestos sheet strips at the junction of two panels. This method ensures

uniformity in colour of all the panels and straightness at the junction of the panels.

Strips Fixing : 4 mm thick glass strips or 5 mm thick plain asbestos sheet/strips shall be fixed

with their top at proper level, giving required slopes.

Concreting : Cement concrete shall be placed in position, in one operation, in the panels. It

shall then be levelled with the help of straight edge and trowel and beaten with a wooden

"Thappy" or mason's trowel. The blows shall be fairly heavy in the begining but as

consolidation takes place, light rapid strokes shall be given. Beating shall cease as soon asthe surface is found covered with cream of mortar. The surface shall be tested with straight

edge and made true to required slopes. While laying concrete care shall be taken to see

that the strips are not damaged disturbed by the labourers. The top of strips shall be visible

clearly after finishing with cement slurry.

5.4. Laying without Strips:

Laying of cement concrete flooring in alternate panels may be allowed by Engineer-in-

Charge in case strips are not to be provide.

Shuttering : The panels shall be bounded by wooden angle iron battens. The battens shall

have the same depth as the concrete flooring. These shall be fixed in position, with their

top at proper level, giving required slopes. The surface of the battens of flats, to come in

contact with concrete shall be smeared with soap solution or non-sticking oil (Foam oil or

raw linseed oil) before concreting. The flooring shall be against the masonry wall, which

shall not be plastered.

Concreting The concreting shall be done in the manner described under Group - 2. The

battens used for shuttering, shall be removed on the next day of the laying of cementconcrete. The ends thus exposed shall be repaired, if damaged, with cement mortar 1:2 (1







cement : 2 coarse sand), and allowed to set for minimum period of 24 hours. The alternate

panels shall then be cleaned of dust, mortar droppings etc. and concrete laid. While laying

concrete, care shall be taken to see that the edges of the previously laid panels are notdamaged and fresh mortar is not splashed over them. The points between the panels

should come out as fine and as straight lines.

5.5 Finishing :

The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating. The

surface shall be left for some time, till moisture disappears from it. Excessive trowelling

shall be avoided. Use of dry cement or cement and sand mixture sprinkled on the surface

to stiffen the concrete or absorb excessive moisture, shall not be permitted.

Fresh quantity of cement at 2.0 Kg of cement shall be mixed with water to form a thick

slurry and spread over an area of one sq m of flooring while the concrete still green. The

cement slurry shall then be properly pressed and finished smooth.

The edge of sunk floors shall be finished and rounded with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2

coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement.

The junctions of floor with wall plaster, dado, skirting shall be rounded off where so

specified.3.5.5The men engaged on finishing operations shall be provided with raised

wooden platform to sit on, so as to prevent damage to new work.

5.6 Curing :

The curing shall be done for a minimum period of ten days. Curing shall not be commenced

until the top layer has hardened. Covering with empty cement gunnies shall be avoided as

the colour is likely to be bleached with the remnants of cement matter from the bags.

5.7 Precautions :

Flooring in lavatories and bath rooms shall be laid after living of water closet and squattingpans and floor traps. Traps shall be plugged, while laying the floors and opened after the

floors are cured and cleaned. Any damage done to W.C's squatting pans and floor traps

during the execution of work shall be made good.

During cold weather, concreting shall not be done when the temperature falls below 4

Deg.C. The concrete placed shall be protected against frost by suitable coverings. Concrete

damaged by frost shall be removed and work redone. During hot weather, precautions

shall be taken to see that the temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38 Deg.C. No

concreting shall be laid within half an hour of the closing time of the day, unless permitted







by the Engineer-in-Charge. The floor shall be protected from any damage during the

execution of work.

5.8 Measurements:

Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area as laid shall be calculated

in sq. m. correct to two places of decimal. Length and breadth shall be measured before

laying skirting dado or wall plaster. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for any

opening in the floor of area upto 0.10 sq m. The flooring done with strips (in one operation)

and without strips (in alternate panels) shall be measured together.

5.9 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved involved in all the

operations described above including application of cement slurry on R.C.C. slab or on sub-

grade including roughening and cleaning the surface and cost of 4 mm thick glass sheets or

5 mm thick asbestos sheet strips. Nosing of steps where provided shall be paid for

separately in running metre.

Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different levels in the same room or

courtyard and rounding of edges of sunk floors.

In case the flooring is laid in alternate panels, it includes the cost of shuttering.

6. MARBLE/GRANITE/OTHER NATURAL STONES :

1. Marble :

Marble shall be minimum 20mm in thickness and shall be of required Length and Width and

preferably in not less than 1800 mm in lengths and in required Widths upto 900mm.

Marble for Staircase steps shall be in One length and width including 12 mm nosing.

The marble shall be from specified/approved quarry only. The marble used in a particular

Area shall be preferably from the same lot and shall be stable to the maximum extent

possible in Colour, Grains and Thickness. All exposed edges of marble finish shall be

polished and shaped as required. Flat surfaces of marble shall be machine polished and

finished with Tine Oxide powder. Wax polishing shall be done only on approval. Unless

otherwise specified all joints shall be Butted and the flooring shall be to absolute dead level.

All undulations in the base concrete shall be made up and levelled with lean concrete using

10 mm and below granite chips before application of base mortar. All marble flooring shall







be laid over cement mortar bed of 1:4 & the average thickness of bed shall be 20 mm. Over

the mortar cement slurry of honey like consistency at the rate of 4.4 kg/sqm shall be

spread.

Granite :

All granite slabs shall be minimum 20 mm thick and of approved Design & Colour. Only first

quality material shall be used. The granite used in a Particular Area shall be preferably from

the same lot and shall be stable to the maximum extent, possible in Colour, Grains and

Thickness. All exposed edges of granite finish shall be polished and shaped as required. Top

surface of granite shall be machine polished to mirror finish.

If the granite tiles are specified and used, the same shall be from one lot. Granite slabs used

for vertical cladding shall be provided with Brass/Stainless Steel lugs and fixed to the mortar

backing. All joints shall be neatly pointed with water proof colour cement/oxide.

2. Natural Stone :

Natural Stones like ‘Shahabad’, ‘Kota’, ‘Batemcharla’, ‘Tandoor’, ‘Sand Stone’, ‘Dholpur’,‘Cuddapah’, etc. , shall be polished, semi/fully dressed as per approved sample. Sizes

required depending upon location of use. Joints are to be fully Butted and pointed with

waterproof Colour/Oxide.

All Stones, Marble, Granite etc., shall be laid for Flooring and Cladding as per specified

patterns, colour combinations as required.

3. Precautions :

Doors, windows, floors etc. shall be protected from splashes and droppings if any shall be

removed immediately.

4. Measurements :

Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and area shall be calculated in square

meters upto two decimal places. The measurement of plaster shall be made or extra paid

for openings less than 0.5 Sqm shall be deducted but additional measurements shall be

taken for jambs, sills and soffits. Skirting of the wall shall not be measured (if the skirting is

of different finish.)

MORTAR CONSUMPTION FOR VARIOUS ITEMS OF WORK:

No. Description Motar Consumption







1. 20 mm thk. M.M. Tiles

(a) For floor (25 thk. Floorin bedding) 0.0255CU.M/SQ.M of

(b) For skirting of (12 thk. bedding) Skirting 0.014 CU.M/SQ.M

2. 6mm thk. Glazed tiles.

a) for flooring (12 thk. bedding) of flooring. 0.014 CU.M./SQ.M.

b) For dado (12 thk. Bedding) 0.014 CU.M/SQ.M.

3. 32 mm thk. Shahabad tiles

a) For flooring (25 thk. bedding) 0.028 CU.M/SQ.M.

b) For skirting (12 thk. bedding) 0.014 CU.M/SQ.M.

CEMENT CONSUMPTION FOR FILLING JOINTS IN TILING:

No. Description Cement Consumption

1. 20 mm thk. M.M. Tiles

a) For flooring 0.088 bag/SQ.M. of flooring

b) For skirting 0.044 Bag/SQ.M. of skirting

2. 32 mm thk. Shahabad tiles

a) For flooring 0.052 Bag/SQ.M. of flooring

b) For skirting 0.052 Bag/SQ.M. of skirting

5. Grooves in RCC Flooring

Grooves shall be provided by forming 10 mm wide x 25 mm deep grove at the junction of two

adjacent panels. Size of each panel shall not exceed 4M x 3M. Grooves shall be cleaned of all

dirt and greasy matters and dried before filling with Hot sealing compound grade A, conforming

to IS-1834/1984.

6. Rubble Soling

Rubble soling shall not be constructed on a wet subgrade. The finished compacted thickness of

the soling course shall be 230 mm/150 mm as specified. The soling stone shall be laid with the

largest face downwards. The stones shall break joint as far no possible.

As the laying of rubble advances, the soling shall be packed by wedging and packing with 40

mm down grade/20 mm downgrade stone aggregate to fill the voids as completely as possible.







The soling after it is properly laid and hand packed including filling voids with stone aggregate

as specified rolled dry with 10-12 MT power roller till refusal i.e. till the soling course to move

under the roller and no more compaction can be achieved. Rolling shall start at the edges andmove towards the centre. The roller shall run over the same surface of rolling for at least a

times till the soling course is consolidated.

GROUP - 6

WATER PROOFING & DAMP PROOFING WORKS

I. WATER PROOFING WORK

All surfaces to be water proofed shall be dry, clean,smooth and free from dust and loose

particles.

1.1 TAR FELT TYPE

For a five layer treatment, bitumen primer conforming to IS:3384 shall be applied. Over

this primer cost, hot bitumen conforming to IS:1580 shall be applied at the rate of 1.2

kg/m.sq. Hessian based felt type 3 grade 2 conforming to IS :1322 shall be spread and

embedded in the previously laid bitumen while hot. Hot bitumen will again be applied over

the felt at the rate of 1.2 Kg/m.sq…Pea size gravel or grit shall be uniformly spread at the

rate of 0.008 cu.m./sq.m. The end and side laps of each sheet shall not be less than 100-

150 mm along parapet wall and embedded in chases made in the wall and brick masonry

and made good in plaster. The standard of water proofing shall comply with IS:1346. For

seven layer treatment, one traditional layer of bitumen shall be laid before gravel layer in a

manner, described above for five layer treatment.

II DAMP PROOF COURSE ( D.P.C. )

CEMENT CONCRETE LAYER :- This shall consist of cement concrete of specified proportions

and thickness. The surface of brick work or stone work masonry shall be levelled and

prepared before laying the cement concrete. Edges of damp proof course shall be straight,

even and vertical. Side shuttering shall consist of wooden forms and shall be strong and

properly fixed so that it does not get disturbed during compaction and the mortar does not

leak through. The concrete mix shall be of workable consistency and shall be tamped

thoroughly to make a dense mass. When the sides are removed, the surface should come

out smooth without any honey-combing.







CURING :- Damp proof course shall be cured for at least seven days, after which it shall be

allowed to dry.

APPLICATION OF HOT BITUMEN :- Where so directed hot bitumen in specified quantity

shall be applied over the dried up surface of cement concrete, properly cleaned with

brushes and finally with a piece of cloth soaked in kerosene oil. The bitumen shall be

applied uniformly all over, so that no blank spaces are left any where. It will be paid for

separately.

WATER - PROOFINGMATERIALS :- Where so specified, water proofing material of approved

quality shall be added to the concrete mixture in accordance with the manufacturer's

specifications starting the quantity of water proofing material in litres or Kg per 50 Kg of

cement and will be paid for separately.

MEASUREMENTS :- The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area

shall be calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal. The depth shall not

be less than the specified thickness at any section.

RATE :- The rate is inclusive of the cost of materials shuttering and labour involved in all

the operations described above.

PROVIDING WATER PROOFING FOR RCC BUILDING

It is proposed to provide water proofing for the completed RCC roof of office building,

Amenity block, Security block, MCC room, DG room, Gate cabin, Weigh bridge cabin and

Plant toilet.

The system consist of one layer of primer, three coats of Polyurethane of total DFT 450

microns and screed cement concrete 25mm min. thickness. The detail schedule and

application procedure is as given below.

Specification for roofing treatment :

Material

The material shall consist of 2 pack clear/pigmented Aliphatic Polyurethane using Polyether

polyols (Polyster or Castrol oilbased Polyols not acceptable), with Iso cynorate for rendering

flame resistant characteristic. The 2 pack system, consisting of pigment and the solvent

(Xylene/Toulene, no filler) shall be mixed in definite ratio by weight strictly as per approved

manufacturer's specification, for preparing the coating for application. The coating shall

have physical features like

Workmanship







Preparation of surface :

The roof surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and all foreign matter etcshall be removed. Well defined cracks on the surface shall be cut to `V' section, cleaned

and filled up flush with a paste component Polyuthene based crack filling compound and

white cement in ratio 1:2.

Primer coat :

It shall consist of 2 pack Polyurethane. Primer coat shall be mixed in the ratio as per

manufacturer's specification. A single coat of this primer shall be applied by brush over the

prepared bed as an adhesion coat.

The primer shall be allowed to dry for a min of 8 hrs. time before the successive finishing

coats of P.U. applied.

Finishing Coats :

The finishing coats shall consist of three successive pigmented sealing coats of 2 pack

Polyurethane mixed in the ratio as per manufacturer's spec. Application shall be with

brush, to a smooth and even finish. The overall dry film thickness shall be 450 microns or

min. covering capacity shall be 200 gms/sqm. per coat.

Each coat shall be allowed to dry for min. 12 hours before applying next coat. Care shall be

taken for quick application after mixing the 2 pack primer in view of short pot life of the mix

and shall be fully consumed within the stipulated period as per manufacturer's spec. (Max

60 minutes at 30 degree C).

The P.U. coating shall be continued up to the parapets/walls for a min. of 150mm over the

finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by atleast 100 mm.

Cement Screed :

The final coat of P.U. when tacky shall be sprinkled with 300 micron layer of clean sand.

Plain cement concrete (1:2:4) of 25 mm min. thickness with 24 SWG chicken wire mesh shall

be laid to slope in panels not exceeding 6 SQM. area per panel over this. The joints

between panels shall be raked out neatly (after stipulated curing period) to a min.6mm x

600 V-groove and filled up with an approved quality elastomeric compound sealant. Drain

outlet shall be provided for all spouts/rain water pipes by suitable rounding, filling and







sloping of PCC as per drawing. At the junction of the roof and parapet or any other vertical

surface, a fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement mortar5 (1cem: 4 coarse sand).

The finished work shall be measured in SQM. of area for the purpose of payment.

APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS FOR WATERPROOFING

EZECOAT, EZEFIL etc. from Industrial Products Mfg. Co.

Beck bond PU Excoat 25 etc. from dr. beck + co. (India) Ltd.

Epoxy Polyamide primer, Apcothane CF 674 etc. of Asian Paints

Nitoflor FC 110, theoflex 600 etc. of Fosroc Chemicals Ltd.

Any other similar product of PIDILITE brand or any other equivalent make/brand approved

by HPCL







GROUP - 7

FINISHING WORKS1.0 CEMENT PLASTER WORK :

1.1 All joints in masonry shall be raked to a depth of 12mm. with a hooked tool made for the

purpose when the mortar is still green and in any case within 48 hours of its laying. The

surface to be rendered shall be washed with fresh clean water free from all dirt, loose

material grease, etc. and thoroughly wetted for 6 hours before plastering work is

commenced. Concrete surfaces to be rendered will however be kept dry. The wall shall not

be too wet but not damp at the time of plastering. The damping shall be uniform to get

uniform bond between the plaster and the wall. Prior to plastering necessary treatment etc.

shall be done to remove efflorescence ,at no extra cost to HPCL.

1.2 The proportion of the mortar shall be as specified under the respective items of work.

Cement shall be mixed thoroughly in dry condition and then just enough water added to

obtain a workable consistency. The quality of water, sand and cement shall be a s per I.S.

Standards. The mortar thus mixed shall be used immediately and in no case shall the mortar

be allowed to stand for more than 25 minutes after mixing with water. Sand used for

plastering work shall belong to Grading Zone II specified in Group 2.

1.3 Curing of plaster shall be started as soon as the applied plaster has hardened enough so as

to be damaged. The decision as to when the plaster has hardened, will be given by the

ENGINEER. Curing shall be done by continuous applying water in a fine spray and shall be

carried out for at least 7 days.

1.4 Whenever the specification or the item of work calls for water-proofing, the CONTRACTOR

shall provide the percentage of water-proofing compound as specified in the items of work,

or as per the recommendations made by the manufacturer.

1.5 Where lath plaster is specified, it shall be paid for at the same rate as for plaster work

without metal lath except that separate payment for metal lath will be made.

1.6 Ceiling plaster shall be applied before wall plaster and wall plaster shall commence at top

and work downwards.

1.7 INTERIOR PLASTER:

1.7.1 Interior plaster shall be laid in a single coat of specified thickness. The mortar shall be

dashed on the prepared surface with a trowel and finished smooth by trawling on the

surface with neeru (lime cream). Neeru shall be properly slaked fat lime. The standard of

finish expected shall conform to IS: 2394. Interior plaster shall be carried out on jambs,lintel and still faces, top, undersides, etc. as shown on the drawings or as directed by the







ENGINEER. Rate quoted for plaster work shall be deemed to include plastering of all those

surfaces. However, if the item of work includes plaster finish, no separate payment would

be made under `plastering work'. Sand used for interior plastering work shall be fine sandobtained from Grading Zone-III & shall pass through 1 mm sieve.

1.8 EXTERIOR SAND FACED PLASTER:

Exterior plaster work shall be carried out in two layers, the first layer being 12 mm. thick

and the second layer being 8 mm. thick. The first layer, or scratch coat, as described above,

shall be dashed against the prepared surface with a trowel to obtain an even surface. the

second layer shall then be applied and finished leaving an even and uniform surface, trowel

finished unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. the scratch coat shall be cured for at

least 7 days.

The second coat shall be 8 mm. thick and it shall not be applied until at least 10 days have

elapsed after the application of the scratch coat. Before application of the second coat, the

scratch coat, shall be evenly damped. This coat shall be applied from top bottom in one

operation and without joints, finish shall be straight, true and even. the mortar proportions

of this coat shall be as specified under the respective item of work. Only approved white

sand shall be used for the second coat and for finishing work. Sand for finish work shall be

the second coat and for finishing work. Sand for finish work shall be obtained from Grading

Zone-III & passing through 1 mm sieve and shall be dashed on surface and sponged,

thoroughly over the plastered surface.

1.9 EXTERIOR ROUGH CAST PLASTER:

The external rough cast plaster shall be applied in two coats. The coat, or the scratch coat

shall be approximately 12 mm. and shall be continuously carried out without break to the

full length of wall or natural breaking points such as doors, windows, etc. The scratch coat

shall be dashed on the prepared surface with heavy pressure, brought to true and even

surface and then lightly roughened by cross scratch lines, to provide bond for the finishing

coat. The mortar proportion for this scratch coat shall be as specified in the respective item

of work. The scratch coat shall be cured for at least 7 days. Coarse sand conforming to

Grading Zone-II shall be used for first coat.

The second coat shall be 8 mm, thick and shall consist of one part of cement, one part of

well graded sand conforming to Grading Zone-II & one part of gravel of size varying from 3

mm to 6 mm, and it shall not be applied until at least 10 days have elapsed after the

application of the scratch coat. Before application of the second coat, the scratch coat, shall

be evenly damped. This coat shall be applied from top to bottom in one operation and

without joints; finish shall be straight, true and even.







1.10 MEASUREMENT:

The quantity of work to be paid for under this item shall be calculated by taking the

projected surface of the area plastered after making necessary deductions for openings,

door, windows, fan openings, etc. as per IS: 1200 (Part XII). The actual plaster work carried

out on jambs of doors, windows, openings, etc. shall be measured as per IS: 1200 (Part XII)

and added. However, for purposes of payment under this category of work, plaster work

carried on surfaces for the items of work, which calls for plaster finish, shall not be taken,

measured and paid for.

2.0 WHITE/COLOUR WASHING, PAINTING AND DISTEMPERING OF WALLS, WHITE WASH:

2.1.1 Walls to be thoroughly cleaned before white wash is applied. Whitewash shall be of

ordinary fat lime and of good quality. It shall be slaked with a excess water with cream like

consistency and allowed to remain under water for 2 days. It shall then be screened through

a cloth and 2 kg. of clean gum added for every cubic metre of lime ready for white washing.

2.1.2 Each coat shall be applied with a brush. It shall be laid with a stroke of the brush from the

top downwards, another form bottom upwards over the first stroke and similarly, one

stroke from the right and another from the left over the first brush before it dries. Three

such coats shall be applied.

2.2 COLOUR WASH:

Colour wash shall be applied in the same way as white wash. Necessary and approved

coloring matter shall be added to the white wash which has been stained. Only wash

sufficient for the day's work shall be prepared each morning. If the finished surface is

powdery and comes off easily or the general appearance is streaky, the work shall be

rejected and work repeated to the entire satisfaction of the ENGINEER and at no extra cost

to the OWNER.

2.3 PAINTING:

2.3.1 Paint to be used for the various items of work should be of approved make and colour. It is

imperative that the CONTRACTOR shall obtain ENGINEER's permission in regard to the make

and colour of paint that he proposes to the use for the various items of work. The painting

work shall be carried out as directed by the ENGINEER, keeping however, in view the

recommendations of the manufacturer.

2.4 DISTEMPERING:







2.4.1 Distemper shall be of well-known brands of approved make. It shall be applied with broad

stiff brush in 2 coats over a coat of primer. The first and second coats shall be applied only

after the primer coat has thoroughly dried. the first coat shall be of lighter tint. The shade ofthe distemper shall be got approved by the ENGINEER. Water bound and oil bound

distemper shall conform to the requirements of IS 427 and IS 428 respectively.

3.0 CEMENT PAINTING :

3.1 Materials :

The cement paint shall conform to IS: 5410 of approved brand and colour.

3.2 Scaffolding :

Same as detailed in Whitewash.

3.3 Preparation of Surface :

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar droppings, dirt, dust, algae, grease and

other foreign matter. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water just before

the painting is commenced.

3.4 Preparation of Mix :

Cement paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. In the first stage, two parts of

cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly shall be allowed to stand for five

minutes (Cement paint shall be gradually added to water and not vice versa). In the second

stage, further one part of water shall be added to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform

consistency. Cement paint which can be used within an hour of its mixing shall be

prepared.

3.5. Application :

The cement paint shall be applied on wetted surface with brushed on spraying machine.The solution shall be kept well stirred during application, Care shall be taken that the direct

heat from the sun of the surface is avoided. The completed surface shall be watered after

the day’s work. The second coat shall be applied only after the first coat has set for at least

24 hours. Before application of second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous

coat shall not be wetted.

3.4.1 Precautions :

The cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated with whitewash, colour

wash, distemper, varnish, etc.







GROUP -8

SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the general requirements for supply of steel material, where

specified, fabrication and delivery at site of structural and miscellaneous steel work.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS:

a) MATERIALS:

1.

IS: 226/2062 - Structural Steel (Standard Quality).

2. IS: 808 - Rolled Steel Beam, Channel and Angle Sections.

3. IS:814 - Specifications for Covered Electrodes for Metal Arc Welding for Structural Steel.

4. IS: 1161 - Specification for Steel Tubes for structural purpose.

5. IS: 2074 - Ready Mixed Paint, Red Oxide Zinc Chromate And Priming.

6. IS: 823 - Code of Procedure for manual metal arc welding of mild steel.

7. IS: 919 - Recommendations for limits & fits for engineering (Part I & II).

b) CODES OF PRACTICE:

1 IS: 800 - Code of Practice for Construction In Steel).

2 IS: 816 - Code of Practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in mild

steel.

3.0 STEEL SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR:

3.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER duplicate copies of all mill orders

covering the material ordered by him for this project and the test reports received from

the Mills for the ENGINEER's check and information.







3.1.2 It is not the intention of the OWNER that all the steel materials to be supplied by the

CONTRACTOR for the work shall be specifically purchased from the rolling mills. The

CONTRACTOR's stock material may be used, provided he satisfactorily demonstrates, thespecified grade and quality by furnishing test certificates. The OWNER shall have the right

to test random samples from the steel materials proposed to be used for work, by the

CONTRACTOR at the CONTRACTOR's cost. All steel materials supplied by the CONTRACTOR

shall be in sound condition, of recent manufacture, free from defects, loose mill scale, slag

intrusions laminations, pitting, flaky rust, etc. and be of full weight and/or thickness

specified. The lengths/sizes of steel sections and plates shall be as supplied by the steel

mills.

3.1.3 Unidentified stock material may be used, only with the prior permission from the ENGINEERin writing, for short sections of minor importance or for small unimportant works and

connections where, in the opinion of the ENGNEER, the quality of such materials would not

adversely affect the strength and/or durability of the structure. The ENGINEER may also

permit use of such materials for other works, if adequate random samples taken out and

tested demonstrate conformity with specification and requirement for the work for which

these materials are proposed to be carried out to the requirement for this work. He is,

however, not to commence plumbing, water supply and drainage work unless drawings for

such work or parts thereof are officially released as "Released for Construction". revisions to

drawings and any new drawings made to include additional work by the CONTRACTOR shallbe considered a part of this specification and contract. CONTRACT shall be responsible for

obtaining approval of the drawings from local authorities, if required, and he shall not be

entitled for any extra payment on this account.

4.0 SUBSTITUTIONS:

4.1 Wherever the CONTRACTOR, in order to accommodate his/other materials in stock, desires

to substitute structural steel or plates for the sizes shown on drawings, such substitutions

shall be made only after authorisation in writing is given by the ENGINEER.

4.2 The ENGINEER may also direct the substitution to be made, when he considers that such

substitutions are necessary.

5.0 DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE ENGINEER:

5.1 Checked and approved design drawings will be furnished to the CONTRACTOR for execution

of the work and these shall form a part of this specification. The CONTRACTOR shall study

these drawings, when made available, in detail for all information contained therein, which

pertains to, and is required for his work. Contractor shall also prepare fabrication drawings

showing all details as required for fabrication work & submit the same to HPCL for approvalprior to starting the work. The drawings shall be approved & returned to the contractor







within 20 days from the day of receipt of the same. Discrepancies, if any, shall be brought

to the notice of the ENGINEER.

5.2 The ENGINEER reserves the right to make changes. Revisions to drawings, even after release

of shop drawings, are very likely to be made to reflect additional data/details received and

more updated requirements. Revisions to drawings and any new drawings made which

include additional work required to be carried out by the CONTRACTOR shall be considered

part of this specification and contract and the OWNER shall entertain no extra claims on this

account.

5.3 Unless otherwise specified, the drawings and specifications are intended to include

everything obviously requisite and necessary for the proper and entire completion of the

work and the job shall be carried out accordingly for completeness as required and as

directed by the ENGINEER.

6.0 FABRICATION:

6.1 GENERAL:

All workmanship and finish shall conform to IS: 800. All materials shall be finished straight

as per the tolerance limits as specified. All holes and edges shall be free of burrs. Shearing

and chipping shall be neatly and accurately done and all portion of work exposed to view

shall be neatly and accurately done and finished. Material in the shop shall be kept clean

and shall be protected from weather.

6.2 CONNECTIONS:

6.2.1 Shop connections shall be effected either by welding, or bolting, as specified on the

drawings. Bolts shall be in accordance with specifications.

6.2.2 However standard M.S. bolts conforming to IS:1363 may be used for field connections for

light members such as purlins, girts, staircase stringers, hand railings, landings beams, etc.

6.2.3 Where necessary, tapered washers or flat washers or spring washers shall be used with

bolts. The length of the bolt shall be such that at least one thread of the bolt project beyond

the nut.

6.2.4 In all cases where bearing is critical, the unthreaded bolt shall bear on the members

assembled. A washer of required thickness may be provided to exclude the threads from

the bearing thickness, if a longer grip bolt has to be used for this purpose.







6.2.5 All connections and splices shall be designed for full strength of members or loads

indicated, unless otherwise approved. Column splices shall be designed for the full tensile

strength of the minimum cross section at the splice.

6.2.6 All members likely to collect rain water shall have drain holes provided.

6.2.7 Not more than one shop splice shall be provided to make up the full length of a member.

6.3 STRAIGHTENING:

Rolled material, before being worked, shall be straightened. If straightening or flattening is

necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure the material. Long plates shall be

straightened by passing through a mangle or levelling rolls and structural shapes by the use

of mechanical or hydraulic bar/section straightening machines. Heating and/or forging shall

not be resorted to without the prior approval of the ENGINEER in writing.

6.4 CUTTING:

6.4.1 Cutting may be carried out by shearing, cropping, sawing or machine flame cutting, if

permitted by the ENGINEER. All re-entrant corners shall be shaped notch free to a radius of

at least 12 mm. Sheared or cropped edges shall be dressed to a neat workman like finish

flame and shall be free from distortion and burrs. The kert on machine flame cut edges shall

be removed.

6.4. 2 Hand flame cutting shall be undertaken only if so permitted by the ENGINEER and shall be

carried out by an expert in such work. Hand flame out edges shall be ground smooth and

straight.

6.4.3 Edge planning of sheared, cropped or gas cut edges is not intended unless the sheared,

cropped or gas cut edges are such as to warrant it or is specifically called for.

6.5 PUNCHING AND DRILLING:

6.5.1 Holes in secondary members such as purlins, girts, lacing bars, etc, may be punched full size

through material not over 12 mm thick. Holes must be clean cut, without burr or ragged

edges. Holes for all other connections shall be drilled accurately and the burrs removed

effectively. Where several parts are to be connected to very close tolerance, such parts shall

first be assembled tightly clamped together and drilled through.

6.5.2 Sub-punching may be permitted before assembly, provided the holes are punched 3 mm

smaller in diameter than the required size and reamed after assembly to the full diameter.

The thickness of materials punched shall not exceed 16 mm.







6.5.3 When batch-drilling is carried out in one operation through two or more separable parts,

these parts shall be separated after drilling and the burrs removed.

6.5.4 Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to slightly smaller diameter and reamed to a

diameter of the shank or barrel subject to H 8 tolerance specified in IS : 919.

6.5.5 Where reamed members are taken apart for shipping or handling, the respective pieces

reamed together shall be so marked that they may be reassembled in the same position in

the final setting up. No interchange of reamed parts will be permitted. Poor matching, over-

drilling, and ovality in holes shall be a cause for rejection. Burning holes with gas is strictly

prohibited.

6.6 WELDING:

6.6.1 Electrodes for shielded-are manual welds shall comply with the requirement of IS : 814 and

shall be off approved make only. Approved makes are Advani Oerlikon, D&H & ESAB.

6.6.2 The Electrodes for manual arc welding shall be suitable for use in the position and type of

work, as laid down in the above specifications and type of work, and as recommended by

the manufacturers. Electrodes classification group 1 and 2 as given in IS:814 shall be used

for welding steel conforming to IS : 226.

6.6.3 Welding plant and accessories shall have capacity adequate for the welding procedures laiddown and shall satisfy appropriate standards and be of approved make and quality. The

CONTRACTOR shall maintain all welding plants in working order. All the electrical plant in

connection with the welding operation shall be properly and adequately earthed and

adequate means of measuring the current shall be provided.

6.6.4 All weld shall be made only by welders and welding operators who have been properly

trained and previously qualified by tests and to perform the type of work required as

prescribed in the relevant applicable standards.

6.6.5 All welds shall be free from defects like blow holes, slag inclusions, lack of penetration,

undercutting, cracks etc. All welds shall be cleaned of slag or flix and show uniform sections,

smoothness of weld metal, feather edges without overlap and freedom from porosity.

6.6.6 Fusion faces and surfaces adjacent to the joint for a distance of at least 50 mm on either

side shall be absolutely free from grease, paint, loose scales, moisture or any other

substance which might interfere with welding or adversely affect the quality of the weld.

Joint surfaces shall be smooth, uniform and from fins, tears, laminations, etc. Preparations

of fusion faces shall be done in accordance with the approved fabrication drawings by

shearing, chipping, machining or machine flame cutting except that shearing shall not be

used for thickness over 8mm.







6.6.7 Members to be joined by fillet welding shall be brought and held as close together as

possible and in no event shall be separated by more than 6 mm. If the separation is 1.5mm

or greater, the fillet weld size shall be increased by the amount of separation. This shall onlyapply in the case of continuous welds. The fit-up of joints at contact surfaces which are not

completely sealed by welds shall be close enough to exclude water after painting.

6.6.8 The separation between facing surfaces of lap joints and butt joints with backing plate shall

not exceed 1.5 mm. Abutting parts to be butt welded shall be carefully aligned and the

correct root gap maintained throughout the welding operation. Misalignments greater than

25 percent of the thickness of the thinner plate, or 3 mm, whichever is smaller shall be

corrected and in making the correction the parts shall not be drawn into a slope sharper

than 2 degrees ( 1 in 27.5)

6.6.9 Prequalified welding procedures recommended by appropriate welding standards and know

to provide satisfactory weld shall be followed. For non-standards procedures, qualifications

tests as prescribed in IS : 823 shall be made to verify the adequacy of the procedures.

Welding procedures shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the ENGINEER

for approval before start of welding. This shall include all details of welding procedure with

reference to provisions of IS : 823 and IS:4353.

Approval of the welding procedure by the ENGINEER shall not absolve the CONTRACTOR of

his responsibility for correct and sound welding without undue distortion in the finished

structure.

6.6.10 No welding shall be done when the surface of the member is wet nor during periods of high

wind, unless the welding operator and work are properly protected.

6.6.11 In joints connected by fillet welds, the minimum sizes of single fillet welds or first runs and

minimum full sizes of fillet welds shall conform to the requirements of IS : 816 and IS : 823.

6.6.12 Fillet weld larger than 8 mm shall be made with two or more passes.

6.6.13 All complete penetration butt weld made by manual are welding, except when produced

with the air of backing material or welding in flat position, from both sides in square-edge

material not over 8 mm. thick with root opening not less than one-half the thickness of the

thinner part joined, shall have the root of the initial layer gouged out on the back side

before welding is started from that side, and shall be so welded as to secure sound metal

and complete fusion throughout the entire cross section.







6.6.14 Each layer of a multiple layer welds, except root and surface runs, may be moderately

peened with light blows from a blunt tool. Care shall be exercised to prevent scaling or

flaking of weld and base metal from overpeening.

6.6.15 Inspection of welds : All welds shall be inspected for flaws by any of the methods described

under clause "TEST OF WELDS" the choice of the method adopted shall be determined by

the ENGINEER.

6.6.16 The CONTRACTOR shall quote separately for carrying out each test as called for in the

Schedule of Qualities. The CONTRACTOR shall be paid only for tests which establish

soundness of welds. In case the tests uncover defective work, such test will be carried out atthe CONTRACTOR's cost and the CONTRACTOR shall correct such defects at his own cost,

and prove the soundness of rectified work.

6.6.17 The correction of defective welds shall be carried out as directed by ENGINEER without

damaging the parent metal. When a crack in the weld is removed, magnetic particle

inspection or any other equally positive means as prescribed by the ENGINEER shall be used

to ensure that the whole of the crack and material upto 25mm. beyond each end of the

crack has been removed. Cost of all such test and operations incidental to correction shall

be to the CONTRACTOR's account.

6.7 TOLERANCES:

The dimensional and weight tolerance for rolled shaped shall be in accordance with IS : 852.

The acceptable limits for straightness (slope and camber) for rolled or fabricated members

are :-

Struts and columns - L/1000 or 10 mm. whichever is smaller.

For all other members not primarily L/500 or 15mm in compression such as purlins,

whichever is girts, bracing and the web members of smaller. trusses and latticed girders.

Where `L' is the length of finished members of such lesser length as the ENGINEER may

specify.

6.8 MATERIAL TESTING :

Even if mill tests reports are available for any steel materials the same shall be got tested by

the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER's satisfaction to demonstrate conformity with the

relevant specification at a lab approved by HPCL..

6.9 DIMENSIONS, WORKMANSHIP & CLEANLINESS :







Members shall be inspected at all stages of fabrication and assembly to verify that

dimensions, tolerances, alignment, surface finish and painting are in accordance with the

requirements shown on the approved shop drawings.

6.10 DRILLING HOLES FOR OTHER WORKS :

Holes in members required for installing equipment or steel furnished by other

manufactures or other contractors shall be drilled at not extra cost to OWNER, in the

CONTRACTOR's shop as part of this contract, the information for which will be supplied by

the OWNER/ENGINEER before fabrication of the steel.

6.11 HANDRAILS :

6.11.1 Handrails shall be provided on open sides of platform, stairways and around all opening as

shown on drawings. Handrails shall be of standard weight mild steel pipe of flush welded

construction, ground smooth, provided with double rail, top rail about 1 metre above

platform level and pipe posts spaced as shown on drawings.

6.11.2 Smooth uniform curves and bends shall be provided at stair return and also wherever

required/specified. Posts connected to curb plates shall have a neat closure at the bottom

and 6 mm. thick plate neatly welded to posts for attachments to curb plate. All necessary

fittings including inner dowels at splices, brackets, bolts, bends, flanges and chains, where

required shall be furnished by the CONTRCTOR. Open ends of the pipe posts shall beplugged and welded. A minimum radius of 3 times the pipe diameter shall be provided at all

points of direction change in the handrail.

6.11.3 The rate quoted for handrails shall be per running metre of complete handrails including

posts, fitting, etc. It shall be clearly understood that individual lengths of runners, posts, etc.

will not be measured for purposes of payment.

7.0 CHEQUERED PLATE :

Chequered plates used shall be as shown on drawings. Chequered plate shall be fixed by 8

mm. diameter cadmium plated MS. screws with counter sunk heads at a maximum spacing

of 400 mm. Members supporting the chequered plate shall have matching holes tapped in

them . The chequered plate pattern shall be approved by the ENGINEER. Chequered plates

may also be required to be welded to the structural steel framing. The decision in this

regard will be given by the OWNER/ENGINEER.

8.0 MARKING OF MEMBERS :

8.1 After checking and inspection, all members shall be marked for identification during

erection. This mark shall correspond to distinguishing marks on approved erection drawings

and shall legibly be painted and stamped there on. The erection mark shall be stamped with

metal dye with figures at least 20 mm high and to such optimum depth to be clearly visible,

even after a member is galvanised.







8.2 All erection marks shall be on the outer surface of all sections and near one end, but clear of

bolt hole. The markings shall be so stamped that they are easily discernible when sortingout members. The stamped marking shall be encircled boldly by a distinguishable paint to

facilitate easy identification.

8.3 Erection marks on like pieces shall be at identical locations. Members having lengths of 7.0

M or more shall have the erection mark at both ends.

8.4 In addition, colour code marking, wherever specified, shall be clearly painted on the

member in the manner specified.

8.5 Separate colour code or identification marks, shall be adopted for members fabricated fromsteel supplied by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR.

9.0 ERRORS:

Any error in shop work which prevents proper assembling and fitting up of parts in the field

by moderate use of drift pins or moderate amount of reaming will be classified by the

ENGINEER as defective workmanship. All charges incurred by the ENGINEER either directly

or indirectly because of the poor workmanship will be deducted from the amount due to

the CONTRACTOR before payments made. The amount of such deduction will consist of the

sum total of the costs of labour direct or indirect, material, plant, transportation, equipment

rental and overhead expenses. In case the ENGINEER choose to reject the material because

of poor workmanship, the cost of all handling and returning of the material to the

CONTRACTOR, if he so desires, shall entirely be to CONTRACTOR's account. All the

replacement materials shall conform to the same specification as for the original materials,

& shall be supplied free and in all such cases, the cost of handling, transport and delivery to

site shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

10.0 PAINTING :

10.1 All fabricated steel material, except those galvanised, shall receive protective paint coating.

10.2 The surface of steelwork to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose mill scale,

rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter by hand tool cleaning, power tool cleaning, flame

cleaning or sand/shot blasting as specified and as directed. In power brushing, sufficient

care shall be exercised not to burnish mill scale to a slick finish to which paint may not

adhere properly.

10.3 The paint treatment specified shall be applied either by brushing or spraying on the

thoroughly cleaned and dry surface. Airless spraying shall be done if so specified. Surfaces

inaccessible after assembly shall receive an additional coat of the specified paint prior to

assembly.







10.4 Paint shall be stirred frequently to keep the pigment in suspension. All paint delivered to

the fabrication shop shall be ready mixed in original sealed containers as packed by the

paint manufacturers and no thinners shall be permitted. No painting shall be done infrosty/foggy weather or when the humidity is high enough to cause condensation on the

surface to be painted. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be

painted is 50 deg centigrade. or higher.

11.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT :

11.1 For the purpose of payment, the weight of the actual, completed structures shall be

calculated from the approved drawings for different items of work. The CONTRACTOR shall

submit to the OWNER relevant material list containing weight of each item.

11.2 Bolts, washers & nuts shall not be taken into account in calculating the weight of the

completed structure. The rates of structural to include the weight of Nuts, bolts & washers

etc. No allowances will be permitted for galvanizing, welding or for rolling margins. One ton

for the purpose of payment shall mean ONE METRIC TONNE i.e. 1000 kg.

11.3 The weight of a member made out of standard rolled sections such as beam, channels,

angles, etc. shall be based on the standard IS book weight of the member, without

deducting for holes, notches, bevel cuts, etc. Where a component consist of a cut joint or

channels, the full weight of the rolled section shall be considered, only if more than half the

depth of the section is used. Otherwise only half the section unit weight shall be considered

for calculation of the weight of the component. Deductions shall be made in the weight of

gussets/plates for skew cuts and notches of 900 sq.cm. or larger.

11.4 For gussets/plates used in trusses, bracings columns, beams, etc. the area shall be that of

the minimum circumscribing rectangle, except as stated in 11.3 above.

11.5 The weight of any built-up member shall be separated into the weight of each component.

12.0 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK IN TUBES :

12.1 SCOPE :

This specification covers the specific technical requirements for the following.

a) Supply, inspection, and testing at site of tubular structural steelwork.

b) Fabrication, erection and testing at steelwork.

12.1.1 SUPPLY, ERRECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS :







Materials for tubular steelwork supplied by CONTRACTOR shall conform to IS : 1161. The

class of tubes shall be as specified on drawing / BOQ. All materials shall be free from

injurious defects.

12.1.2 FABRICATION ERECTION AND TESTING OF TUBULAR STEELWORK :

12.1.2.1 The supply and erection of tubular steel work shall include inspection, delivery at site,

cleaning, cutting, aligning welding connecting and installing all tubular steel work in position

as shown on drawing and as directed by ENGINEEER.

12.1.2.2 Wherever tubes of different thickness are to be butt welded the necessary bevelling shall

be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to the OWNER.

12.1.2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall be supplied with the drawings for tubular steel work connections.

The tubes shall be cut to the exact shape and welded properly. The thickness of the weld

shall be as specified on drawing. Welded joint shall be ground smooth.

12.2 WELDING:

12.2.1 Tack welds used in assembling tubes shall be made by qualified welder, or shall be

removed. Tack welds which are not to be removed shall be made with an electrode which is

the same as or equivalent to the electrode be used for the first pass.

12.2.2

All welds shall be full penetration, homogenous with no voids. Any cracks or blowholes that

appear on the surface of joint shall be removed by chipping

12.2.3 All stipulations for welding work as mentioned in this specification (para 6.6) shall apply for

the welding of tubular steelwork, in addition to that mentioned above.

12.2.4 Prior to commencement of welding, welder qualification test shall be taken After the

welder is approved than & than he can proceed with the welding.

12.2.5 When the end of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue of its connection by welding to

another member, the end shall be properly and completely sealed. Before sealing, the

inside of the tubes should be dry and free from loose scale.







GROUP -9

ROOFING WORK

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirements for supply, delivery and erection of all Asbestos-

free sheeting for roofing and side cladding including corner and ridge pieces, eaves filler

pieces, north light curves, flashing, gutters, eaves board, skylight and all necessary screws,

bolts, nuts and washers for a complete installation in accordance with Engineer's drawings,

contract documents and this specifications.

2.0 MATERIAL AND ERECTION PROCEDURE ;

2.1 The Asbestos-free Poly propylene reinforced sheet, 6 mm thick, shall conform to BIS :14871:2000 & ISO 9933:1995(e) specifications.

2.2 The rate quoted shall be inclusive of handling the sheets, special such as cutting sheets,

providing and fixing with Self-drilling & tapping screw and washer etc. complete. The scope

of work includes fixing sheets on roof and sides, complete with openings for doors,

windows, roof lights, ventilators, etc. either on steel framework or on timber framework.

Any staging or other temporary structure required for the purpose of installing the roof and

side sheeting shall be deemed to have been included in rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR.

2.2 The sheets shall be laid with a side lap of half corrugation. The end lap of sheets shall always

fall over a purlin and shall be 150 mm minimum. Holes for fixing shall always be drilled and

not punched. For the side sheeting, corrugations shall be vertical. The workmanship shall be

of a high order and shall conform to IS : 3007 (part I & II).

2.3 It is needless to emphasise that CONTRACTOR should exercise great care in handling the

sheets and accessories and in case of any breakage and or damage, CONTRACTOR will have

to make good the same at no cost to OWNER.

2.4 Sheeting shall be fastened to the structural steel by SELF-DRILLING & TAPPING SCREW ANDWASHER as per the manufacturer’s specifications.







2.5 Sheeting shall be laid by either the staggered joint method or the straight or the straight

mitred corner method.

2.6 Sheeting shall be fastened to supporting structural steel members with fasteners placed

approximately 730 mm centres.

2.7 Side laps of roofing and siding shall be laid away from the prevailing winds and fastened

together between supports on span of more than 1 metre when span exceeds 1.2 meters.

2.8 Corners of buildings shall be properly closed with standard corner roll, but jointed and

battened. Corner roll shall be fastened directly to the siding with fasteners spaced 600 mm

centres maximum.

2.9 Roof ridge shall be properly closed with standard fitting.

2.10 Flashing shall be as specified on the drawings. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all fasteners

necessary for the complete installation of the flashing.

2.11 Details at window and door openings shall be as shown on OWNER's design drawings.

2.12

The corrugated sheets and specials shall be applied with two coats of white washing oninner surface before fixing in position and to touch up scratches, if any, after erection. Rate

quoted by the party shall include the cost of white washing also.

2.13 Fittings like Ridge pieces, north light curves, barge boards etc shall be of approved

manufacture and shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s specifications.

3.0 MEASUREMENT :

For the purpose of measurement the superficial area of roof covering & cladding as laid

shall be measured in units of sq.m.or part thereof without allowance for laps & corrugations

and payment shall be effected based on the rates quoted by CONTRACTOR for the

respective items of work after making necessary deductions for openings such as for doors,

windows, ventilators, skylights and air extractors,etc. and areas covered by North light

curves, redge pieces, barge board, etc. The portion of roof coverings with ridge or hip, etc.

shall be included in the measurement of roof. No deduction shall be made for openings

having area less than 0.4 Sq.M.







TESTING OF BUILDING MATERIALS

The contractor shall carry out the following tests, unless otherwise mentioned and as directed by

the engineer in charge at his own expense. The Engineer in charge reserves the right to ask thecontractor to carry out any further tests on the materials which is being used in the project.

For particle size test, it is recommended that the set of sieves and weighing machines be arranged

by the contractor at site. Necessary manpower for conduction of the tests also to be arranged by

the contractor.

For crushing strength of concrete, it is recommended that the contractor arrange the compression

testing machine at the site along with the calibration certificate for gauge.

In case, if any of the machine comes to repairs and tests could not be carried out at the site,

contractor shall arrange to transport the material to an approved laboratory to carry out the tests.

All transports and labour costs also are to borne by contractor.

Sl.

No.

Material Tests Test

procedure

Acceptance

criteria

Periodicity

1 Water a) PH value

b) Limits of Acidity

c)

Limits of Alkalinityd) Percentage of solids

e) Chlorides

f) Suspended matter

g) Sulphates

h) Inorganic solids

i) Organic solids

I.S. 3025 I.S. 456 From the

source at the

beginning of

work / change

of source.

2 Cement a) Fineness

b) Soundness

c)

Setting time ( Initial &Final )

I.S. 4031 I.S. 8112 / Manufacturer’stest certificate







d) Compressive strength

e) Consistency

12269 and Lab test for

each batch

brought to site.

3 Sand

For

concreting

a) Particle Size distribution

b) Sp. Gravity

c) Deleterious substance

d) Organic impurities

e) Water absorption

f) Fineness modulus

IS 2386 IS 383 Every 40 Cum

or part thereof.

4. Coarse

aggregate

For

concreting

a)

Percentage of soft /

deleterious material

b) Particle Size distribution

c) Organic impurities

d) Sp. Gravity

e) Bulk density

f) Aggregate crushing

strength

g) Aggregate impact value

h) Alkali Reactivity

i)

Flakiness index

I.S. 2386 I.S. 383 One test for

each source

Every 40 cum or

part thereof

5 Reinforcem

ent steel

a) Physical properties

b) Chemical test

c) Bend & rebend test

d) Elongation test

e) 0.2% Proof stress

f) Tensile strength

I.S. 1608 I.S. 1786 Each lot from

each source for

each dia.

Min. Qty 10

MT. Test to be

repeated for

every 10 MT or

part there of.

6. Cement

Concrete

(For PCC)

a) Slump test I.S. 1199 I.S. 456 15 Cum or part

thereof

7 Cement

concrete

a) Slump test

b)

Cube test ( three cubesfor 7 days strength and 3

I.S. 1199 I.S. 456 Every 5 cum

Qty. No. of







(For RCC)

cubes for 28 days strength

for every sample )

Samples

1-5 M

3

: 1

6-15 M3 : 2

16-30 M3 : 3

31-50 M3: 4

51 & above: 4

plus one

additional

sample for each

additional 50

M3 or part

thereof.

8 Sand for

filling

a) Particle size distribution

b) Organic content

c) Silt content

d) Uniformity coefficient

(D60/D10)

e)

Max. Dry density

f) Optimum Moisture

content

I.S. 2386

I.S. 2720

Max.

organic

content 3%

by wt.

Silt content

10% by

weight

Particle size

max. 5mm

Uniformity

coefficient

2.0 to 8.0

Compaction

as per PO

specs.

One lab test for

each source.

Field

compactiontest:

1 test for 500

M2 area of

each layer.

There shall be

min. 10 density

measurements

for each test.

9 Bricks a) Compressive strength

b) Water absorption

c) Efflorescence

IS 3495

IS 5454

IS 1077 1 no. per lot o

2000 nos

5 nos. per lot o

2001-10000







10nos per lot o

10001- 35000

15nos per lot o

35001- 50000

10 Structural

Steel

a) Tensile strength

b) Bend Test

IS 1599

IS 1894

IS 226 1 Test per every

20 Tonne or part

thereof.

11 Tubular

steel

a) Tensile test

b) Bend test

IS 1599

IS 1894

IS 1161 1 Test per every

20 Tonne or partthereof.







LIST OF APPROVED BRANDS OF MATERIALS

(Only approved brand of materials as mentioned below shall be used in the work.Equivalent brands are applicable only in the case non-availability of the approved brands.)

1. Portland Cement : BIRLA / ACC / Ultra Tech/RAMCO/Ambuja or

equivalent Brands with prior approval of Engineer in-

charge

2. Tor / Mild Steel : SAIL / RINL / TISCO or any equivalent brand

with TSRI approval with prior approval of

Engineer-in-charge.

3. Roofing sheets : EVEREST or equivalent brand with prior approval

of Engineer-in-charge.

4. Structural steel : SAIL / TISCO or equivalent brand with

prior approval of Engineer-in-charge

5. Paint :

a) Water Proof Cement Paint : 'SNOWCEM' / 'SUPERCEM’ or equivalent brand

with prior approval of Engineer-in-charge

b) Synthetic Enamel Paint : ICI / 'ASIAN' / 'NEROLAC' or equivalent

brand with prior approval of Engineer-in-charge

c) Red-oxide : 'SHALIMAR' or equivalent brand with prior

approval of Engineer-in-charge

NOTE : In the absence of availability of Brands of Materials in total mentioned above, any

Equivalent to be used shall be got approved from Consultant / Engineer-In-Charge before

procurement.







JOB SPECIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL ERECTION & PRE-COMMISSIONING

ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT

1 SCOPE

1.1 This specification defines the minimum requirements for mechanical erection and pre-

commissioning work related to Rotating Equipment.

2 CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE OF WORK

The work shall consist of transportation of Rotating Equipment from stores to

site, assembly of sub-assemblies/parts, placing of Rotating Equipment on foundation,

leveling, aligning and grouting, cleanup and pre-commissioning work, return of any unused

material to owner and handing over of the equipment in fit condition for the start-up of the

plant, as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge (of Owner).

Defects due to Contractor's fault noticed during plant startup / commissioning shall be

rectified by him. Schedule of Quantities given, indicate estimated numbers, dimensions and

weights of the Rotating Equipment. The actual data on dimensions and weights will be in

the vendor data manuals.

For DG Sets, following activities shall also be there in the contractor’s scope:

- Installation of connected piping from & to diesel engine and its fuel tank

- Installation of exhaust / silencer piping, provision of safety insulation (material supplied by

purchaser)

- Installation of local control panel (AMF Panel), battery charger

- Minor civil works

3 APPLICABLE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES:

The following documents, for free issue items, will be provided by the Owner, which are to

be followed for mechanical erection of each Rotating Equipment.

i) General Arrangement drawings with outline dimensions including layout and foundation

details.

ii) Manufacturer's instruction manuals/erection drawings as available from them. For items

procured by contractor the relevant vendor drawing shall be followed.

4 PREPARATION FOR MECHANICAL ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT:







4.1 The Contractor shall carefully study the vendor drawings, manuals and other data before

start of the job to ensure correct erection, alignment and commissioning.

4.2 Mechanical erection of all Rotating Equipment shall be done by experienced fitters. Forthis purpose the Contractor shall employ experienced and suitably qualified erection

supervisor and crew who have done similar jobs.

4.3 Shims & wedges as required for alignment shall be supplied by the Contractor. The

Contractor's quoted rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of these works/supplies.

5 MECHANICAL ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT:

5.1 In case the Rotating Equipment is received in knocked down condition, the various parts

shall be assembled as per the instructions of the Engineer-inCharge and as per

manufacturer's instructions. All parts of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned with

solvents to remove protective compounds if any, before assembly.

5.2 In case of electrical drives, the motor shall be decoupled and turned over to other agencies

doing electrical work for testing and no load running of motors. If same contractor is doing

the electrical woks, the above shall be done by that contractor only. The driven equipment

shall be rotated by barring & its freeness checked. After these checks/tests are completed

satisfactorily the Contractor shall re-couple the motors to the Rotating Equipment and

recheck the alignment. For drivers other than electric motors, both driven equipment &

the driver shall be rotated by manual barring and their freeness checked. After these

checks are completed satisfactorily the Contractor shall re-couple the driver-driven

equipment and recheck the alignment.

5.3 For all Rotating Equipment, the Contractor shall follow the proper sequence for assembly

and erection. Couplings of Rotating Equipment received along with driver in assembled

condition, shall be dismantled by the Contractor, and alignment shall be rechecked.

Realignment, if required, shall be done before re-coupling.

5.4 All process(such as seal purging, flushing etc.) and utility (such as lubricating oil etc.)

connections connected with Rotating Equipment and its auxiliaries shall be fabricated

and/or installed by the Mechanical Contractor from materials supplied by the vendor as

per drawings, specifications and instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge.

5.5 After initial alignment, the Rotating Equipment shall be properly grouted. Grouting shall be

carried out as per the specifications and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge. The specialgrouting materials used i.e. whether nonshrinking grout or epoxy grout shall be as per the







equipment manufacturer's specifications. Wherever grout holes are provided in the base

plates, grout shall be filled through these also. The type of grout to be filled in the

baseplate shall be non-shrinking grout and the cost of the same shall be included in theSOR. Unless otherwise specified by the equipment manufacturer, the grouting material

shall be non-shrinking grout of pre-mix type with a minimum compressive strength (28

days) of 40 N/mm². The grout material shall be supplied and applied by the Contractor and

deemed to be included in the quoted rates in the Schedule of Rates (SOR). Makes for Non

Shrink Grout Mix are SHRINKKOMP-30 & FOSROC CONBEXTRA-GP2.Where the equipment

manufacturer recommends epoxy grout, the same shall be supplied and applied by the

Contractor. Extra cost for the same shall be applicable as quoted by the contractor in the

Schedule of Rates (SOR).

5.6 Final alignment shall be done after all the piping connections such as drains and

connection to coolers etc. are made. Tolerances for alignment shall be maintained as

specified in the Manufacturer's Instruction Manual. To ensure that piping connections do

not induce any undue stresses on the Rotating Equipment, the alignment shall be checked

once again by the Contractor after the piping has been connected. Any correction

necessary for proper alignment shall be done by the Contractor.

5.7 All the instruments such as pressure gauges, tempertature gauges, sight glasses

temperature recorders etc. including instrument panels, if any, with necessary inter-

connections, shall be installed by the Contractor as part of Rotating Equipment mechanical

erection.

5.8 All protective and safety guards shall be installed and all foundation bolts shall be checked

before starting the trial runs.

6 PRE-COMMISSIONING WORK

6.1 All the piping main & auxiliaries (for utilities) shall be cleaned (water flushing) and then

connections completed.

6.2 All the lubricants/chemicals/additives as required for flushing, cleaning, first fill or as

required for pre-commissioning/commissioning activities shall be supplied by contractor.

6.3 All temporary strainers shall be installed and their cleanliness checked.

7 HANDING OVER FOR COMMISSIONING







7.1 After the mechanical completion while handing over to the client or to the commissioning

agency, the Contractor will provide a list of construction defects which are rectified by

them. The Owner or commissioning agency will check the Contractor's work before takingover.

7.2 The Contractor shall also provide a team of skilled labor to client or to the commissioning

agency during their commissioning period if requisitioned by them.

7.3 If some defects are noticed during commissioning and are attributed to Contractor, he

shall arrange to rectify to the satisfaction of Engineer-inCharge.







SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION AND ERECTION FOR PIPING

1 SCOPE

This specification covers general requirements of fabrication and erection of above ground

and trench piping systems at site. The specification covers the scope of work of contractor,

basis of work to be carried out by contractor and standards, specifications and normal

practice to be followed during fabrication and erection by the contractor.

1.1 ABBREVIATION AND DEFINITION

1.1.1 ABBREVIATION

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

P&ID Process and Instrumentation Diagram

1.1.2 DEFINITIONS

The following terms are used in this specification:

Company/Purchaser Shall mean Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd.

Contractor Shall mean Party to whom contract of pipeline/piping works is awarded.

Shall shall indicate a mandatory requirement

2 SCOPE OF WORK OF CONTRACTOR

Generally the scope of work of contractor shall include the following:

2.1 Supply and transportation of required piping materials (as described in Clause 2.1.1), pipe

support (material as described in Clause 2.3) and all other necessary piping materials from

Company's storage point or contractor's storage point (in case of contractor's scope of

supply) to work site/shop including raising store requisitions for issue of materials in the

prescribed format & maintaining an account of the materials received from Company's

stores.

2.1.1 Piping materials include the following but not limited to the same.

a. Pipes (All sizes and schedule).

b. Flanges (All sizes, types & Pressure ratings).

c. Fittings (All sizes, types and schedule).

d. Valves (All sizes, types and Ratings).

e. Gaskets (All sizes, types & Ratings).

f. Bolts, Nuts or M/C Bolts (All types).

g. Expansion Joint/Bellows (All types).







h. Speciality items like online filters, ejectors, sample coolers, strainers, flame arresters,

excess flow check valves, hoses, couplings, etc.

i. Online instruments like control valve, orifice flange, rotameter, safety valves etc.

2.2 Shop & field fabrication and erection of piping in accordance with documents listed under

Clause No 3.0 (BASIS OF WORK) including erection of all piping materials enumerated

above.

2.3 Fabrication and erection of pipe supports like shoe, saddle, guide, stops, anchors, clips,

cradles, hangers, turn buckles, supporting fixtures, bracket cantilevers, struts, tee-posts

including erection of spring supports and sway braces.

2.4 Fabrication of the following:

2.4.1 Fabrication of piping specials like special radius bends, reducers, miters etc.

2.4.2 Fabrication of plain and threaded nipples from pipes as required during erection.

2.4.3 Fabrication of swage nipples as and when required.

2.4.4 Fabrication of odd angle elbow like 60°, 30° or any other angle from 90/45° elbows as and

when required.

2.4.5 Fabrication of flange, reducing flange, blind flange, spectacle blinds as and when required.

2.4.6 Fabrication of stub-in connection with or without reinforcement.

2.4.7 Fabrication of grinding of edges of pipes, fittings, flanges etc. to match mating edges of

uneven/different thickness wherever required.

2.5 Modifications like providing additional cleats, extension of stem of valve, locking

arrangement of valves etc. as and when required.

2.6 Preparation of Isometrics, bill of materials, supporting details of all NON-IBR lines upto

11/2" within the unit battery limit and get subsequent approval from Company Site

Representative as and when called for.

2.7 Obtaining approval for drawings prepared by Contractor from statutory authority, if

required.

2.8 Spun concrete lining of the inside of pipes 3” NPS and above including fittings and flanges as

required in accordance with specification.

2.9 Rubber lining inside pipes, fittings, flanges as and when required, in accordance withspecification.







2.10 Radiography, stress relieving, dye penetration, magnetic particle test etc. as required in

specification.

2.11 Performing PMI using alloy analyzers as per technical specification attached along with bid.

2.12 Casting of concrete pedestals and fabrication & erection of small structures for pipe

supports including supply of necessary materials.

2.13 Providing insert plates from concrete structures and repair of platform gratings around pipe

openings.

2.14 Making material reconciliation statement and return of Company’s left over free issuematerials to Company’s storage.

2.15 Flushing and testing of all piping systems as per standard specification for inspection,

flushing and testing of piping systems in accordance with project specification.

2.16 Painting of all lines in accordance with the project painting specification.

2.17 Insulation work in accordance with the project insulation specification.

3 BASIS FOR WORK

3.1 The complete piping work shall be carried out in accordance with the following

3.1.1 "Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued to the Contractor - Plans and/or

Isometrics.

3.1.2 Approved standards and specifications.

3.1.3 Drawings, sketches and documents prepared by Contractor duly approved by Company Site

Representative (such as isometrics of small bore piping and offsite piping etc.)

3.1.4 Specifications/documents as below:

a. Process and Instrument Diagram.

b. Piping Materials Specification.

c. Piping support standards.

d. Line list.

e. Piping support indices (only in offsite), if supports are not shown in plan.

f. Specification of Non-destructive Requirement of Piping.

g. Specification for Pressure Testing of Erected Piping System.







h. Welding specification for fabrication of piping.

i. Any OTHER specifications attached with Piping Material

Specification or special condition of contract (such as standard for cement lining ofpipe, standard of jacketed piping, standard for steam tracing, Dimensional

Tolerances etc.)

j. Procedures for storage, preservation and positive identification of materials at

Contractors works / stores.

3.1.5 Following codes, standards and regulations

ASME B31.3 (2012) Process Piping

ASME Sec. VIII (2010) Pipeline transportation System for Liquid Hydrocarbon Code

for unfired pressure vessel

3.2 DEVIATIONS

Where a deviation from the "Basis of Work" and approved job procedure described above is

required or where the basis of work does not cover a particular situation, the matter shall

be brought to the notice of Company Site Representative (CSR) and the work carried out

only after obtaining written approval from him in each case.

4 FABRICATION

4.1 PIPING MATERIAL

Pipe, pipe fittings, flanges, valves, gaskets, studs bolts etc. used in a given piping system

shall be strictly as per the "Piping Material Specification" for the "Pipe Class" specified for

that system. To ensure the above requirement, all piping material supplied by the

Company/Contractor shall have proper identification marks as per relevant standards

specifications. Contractor shall provide identification marks on left over pipe lengths

wherever marked up pipe lengths have been fabricated / erected. Material traceability is to

be maintained for all materials by way of transferring heat number, etc. (hard punching) as

per approved procedure. This shall be in addition to colour coding for all piping materials to

avoid mix-up.

For the purpose of common understanding the construction job procedure, to be submitted

by the contractor, shall include proposal for

- Maximizing prefabrication, inspection and testing at fabrication shop with minimum

field joints.

- Positive material identification, handling, storage and preservation.

4.2 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES

Dimensional tolerances for piping fabrication shall be as per the following drawing :







LINEAR TOLERANCE

± 3.2 mm maximum upto 10” NPS, ± 4.8 mm maximum for 12” NPS through 36” NPS and ±

4.8 mm ± 0.8 mm through to 48” NPS

A = ± 3 mm maximum from indicated dimensions for face-to-face, centre- to-centre location

of attachments etc. Tolerances are not accumulative.

B = ± 1.5 mm maximum lateral translation in any direction from the indicated position

FLANGE ALIGNMENT







C = ± 1.5 mm maximum rotation from the indicated position measured across as shown

D = ± 1 mm out of alignment from the indicated position measured across any diameter asshown

BEND TOLERANCE

1. Bending radius ‘R’ shall be as specified on the isometric in terms of multiple pipe diameters.

Tolerances on the radius shall be ± 6.4 mm for radii up to 24”NPS and ± 2.8 mm bending

radii above 24” NPS

2. The angular dimensions of bends shall be within ± ¼o

E = Flattening measured as difference between the maximum and minimum OD at any

cross-section - 3% maximum for pipe with external pressure & 8% maximum for pipe with

internal pressure.

The Contractor shall be responsible for working to the dimensions shown on the drawings.

However, the Contractor shall bear in mind that there may be variations between the

dimensions shown in the drawing and those actually existing at site due to minor variations

in the location of equipments, inserts, structures etc. To take care of these variations "Field

Welds" shall be provided during piping fabrication. An extra pipe length of 100 mm over and

above the dimensions indicated in the drawing may be left on one side of the pipe at each

of the field welds. During erection, the pipe end with extra length at each field weld, shall

be cut to obtain the actual dimension occurring at site. Isometrics, if supplied may have the

field welds marked on them. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide

adequate number of field welds. In any case no extra claims will be entertained from the

Contractor on this account. Wherever errors / omissions occur in drawings and Bills of

Materials it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Company Site

Representative prior to fabrication or erection.

4.3 PIPE JOINTS

The piping class of each line specifies the type of pipe joints to be adopted. In general,

joining of lines 2" and above in process and utility piping shall be accomplished by butt-

welds. Joining of lines 1-1/2" and below shall be by socket welding/butt welding/threaded

joints as specified in "Piping Material Specifications". However, in piping 1-1/2" and below

where socket welding/ threaded joints are specified butt - welds may be used with the

approval of Company Site Representative for pipe to pipe joining in long runs of piping. This

is only applicable for non-galvanised piping without lining. Flange joints shall be used at

connections to Vessels, Equipments, Valves and where required for ease of erection and

maintenance as indicated in drawings.

4.4 BUTT WELDED AND SOCKET WELDED PIPING







End preparation, alignment and fit-up of pipe pieces to be welded, welding, pre-heating,

post heating and heat treatment shall be as described in the welding specification and NDTspecification.

4.5 SCREWED PIPING

In general, Galvanized piping shall have threads as per ASME B1.20.1 NPT as required to

match threads on fittings, valves etc. All other piping shall have threads as per ASME

B1.20.1, tapered unless specified otherwise.

Threads shall be clean cut, without any burrs or stripping and the ends shall be reamed.

Threading of pipes shall be done preferably after bending, forging or heat treating

operations. If this is not possible, threads shall be gauge checked and chased after weldingheat treatment etc.

During assembly of threaded joints, all threads of pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly

cleaned of cuttings, dirt, oil or any other foreign matter. The male threads shall be coated

with thread sealant and the joint tightened sufficiently for the threads to seize and give a

leak-proof joint. Threaded joints to be seal-welded shall be cleaned of all foreign matter,

including sealant and made up to full thread engagement before seal welding.

4.6 FLANGE CONNECTIONS

All flange facings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of pipe to which they are

attached. Flanged bolt holes shall straddle the normal centrelines unless different

orientation is shown in the drawing.

Wherever a spectacle blind is to be provided, drilling and tapping for the jack screws in the

flange, shall be done before welding it to the pipe.

4.7 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

Branch connections shall be as indicated in the piping material specifications. For end

preparation, alignment, spacing, fit-up and welding of branch connections refer welding

specifications. Templates shall be used wherever required to ensure accurate cutting and

proper fit-up.

For all branch connections accomplished either by pipe to pipe connections or by using

forged tees the rates quoted for piping shall be inclusive of this work.

Reinforcement pads shall be provided wherever indicated in drawings/ specifications etc.

4.8 BENDING

Bending shall be as per ASME B31.3 except that corrugated or creased bends shall not beused. Cold bends for lines 1-1/2" and below, with a bend radius of 5 times the nominal







diameter shall be used as required in place of elbows wherever allowed by piping

specifications.

The completed bend shall have a smooth surface, free from cracks, buckles, wrinkles,

bulges, flat spots and other serious defects. They shall be true to dimensions. The flattening

of a bend, as measured by the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters

at any cross-section, shall not exceed 8% and 3% of the nominal outside diameter, for

internal and external pressure respectively.

4.9 FORGING AND FORMING

Forging and forming of small bore fittings, like reducing nipples for piping 1-1/2" and below,

shall be as per ASME B 31.3.

4.10 CUTTING AND TRIMMING OF STANDARD FITTINGS & PIPES

Components like pipes, elbows, couplings, half-couplings etc. shall be cut / trimmed / edge

prepared wherever required to meet fabrication and erection requirements, as per

drawings and instructions of Company Site Representative. Nipples as required shall be

prepared from straight length piping.

4.11 GALVANISED PIPING

Galvanised carbon steel piping shall be completely cold worked, so as not to damage

galvanised surfaces. This piping involves only threaded joints and additional external

threading on pipes may be required to be done as per requirement.

4.12 SHOP FABRICATION / PREFABRICATION

The purpose of shop fabrication or pre-fabrication is to minimise work during erection to

the extent possible. Piping spool, after fabrication, shall be stacked with proper

identification marks, so as facilitate their withdrawal at any time during erection. During this

period all flange (gasket contact faces) and threads shall be adequately fabricated by

coating with removable rust preventive. Care shall also be taken to avoid any physical

damage to flange faces and threads.

4.13 MISCELLANEOUS

Contractor shall fabricate miscellaneous elements like flash pot, seal pot, sample cooler,

supporting elements like turn buckles, extension of spindles and interlocking arrangement

of valves, operating platforms as required by Company Site Representative.

5 ERECTION

5.1 CLEANING OF PIPING BEFORE ERECTION

Before erection all pre-fabricated spool pieces, pipes, fittings etc. shall be cleaned insideand outside by suitable means. The cleaning process shall include removal of all foreign







matter such as scale, sand, weld spatter chips etc. by wire brushes, cleaning tools etc. and

blowing with compressed air/or flushing out with water. Special cleaning requirements for

some services, if any shall be as specified in the piping material specification or isometric orline list.

5.2 PIPING ROUTING

No deviations from the piping route indicated in drawings shall be permitted without the

consent of Company Site Representative.

Pipe to pipe, pipe to structure / equipments distances / clearances as shown in the drawings

shall be strictly followed as these clearances may be required for the free expansion of

piping / equipment. No deviations from these clearances shall be permissible without the

approval of Company Site Representative.In case of fouling of a line with other piping, structure, equipment etc. the matter shall be

brought to the notice of Company Site Representative and corrective action shall be taken

as per his instructions.

5.3 SLOPES

Slopes specified for various lines in the drawings / P&ID shall be maintained by the

Contractor. Corrective action shall be taken by the Contractor in consultation with Company

Site Representative wherever the Contractor is not able to maintain the specified slope.

5.4 FLANGE CONNECTIONS

While fitting up mating flanges, care shall be exercised to properly align the pipes and to

check the flanges for trueness, so that faces of the flanges can be pulled together, without

inducing any stresses in the pipes and the equipment nozzles. Extra care shall be taken for

flange connections to pumps, turbines, compressors, cold boxes, air coolers etc. The flange

connections to these equipments shall be checked for misalignment, excessive gap etc. after

the final alignment of the equipment is over. The joint shall be made up after obtaining

approval of Company Site Representative.

Temporary protective covers shall be retained on all flange connections of pumps, turbines,

compressors and other similar equipments, until the piping is finally connected, so as to

avoid any foreign material from entering these equipments.

The assembly of a flange joint shall be done in such a way that the gasket between these

flange faces is uniformly compressed. To achieve this, the bolts shall be tightened in a

proper sequence. All bolts shall extend completely through their nuts but not more than

1/4". Steel to Cast iron flange joints, if any, shall be made up with extreme care, tightening

the bolts uniformly after bringing flange flush with gaskets with accurate pattern and lateral

alignment.

5.5 VENTS AND DRAINS







High point vents and low point drains shall be provided as per the instructions of Company

Site Representative, even if these are not shown in the drawings. The details of vents and

drains shall be as per piping material specifications /job standards.

5.6 VALVES

Valves shall be installed with spindle / actuator orientation / position as shown in the layout

drawings. In case of any difficulty in doing this or if the spindle orientation / position is not

shown in the drawings, the Company Site Representative shall be consulted and work done

as per his instructions. Care shall be exercised to ensure that uni-directional valves bearing

"Flow direction arrow "on the valve body are installed with the arrow pointing in the correct

direction. If the direction of the arrow is not marked on such valves, this shall be done in the

presence of Company Site Representative before installation. Fabrication of stemextensions, locking arrangements and interlocking arrangements of valves (if called for),

shall be carried out as per drawings/ instructions of Company Site Representative.

5.7 INSTRUMENTS

Installation of in-line instruments such as restriction orifices, control valves, safety valves,

relief valves, rota meters, orifice flange assembly, venturimeters, flow meters etc. shall form

a part of piping erection work.

Fabrication and erection of piping upto first block valve / nozzle / flange for installation of

offline Instruments for measurement of level, pressure, temperature, flow etc. shall also

form part of piping construction work. The limits of piping and instrumentation work will be

shown in drawings / standards / specifications. Orientations / locations of take-offs for

temperature, pressure, flow, level connections etc. shown in drawings shall be maintained.

Flushing and testing of piping systems which include instruments mentioned above and the

precautions to be taken are covered in Specification for flushing, testing and inspection of

piping. Care shall be exercised and adequate precautions taken to avoid damage and entry

foreign matter into instruments during transportation, installation, testing etc.

5.8 LINE MOUNTED EQUIPMENTS / ITEMS

Installation of line mounted items like filters, strainers, steam traps, air traps,

desuperheaters, ejectors, samples coolers, mixers, flame arrestors, excess flow check

valves; sight glasses etc. including their supporting arrangements shall form part of piping

erection work.

5.9 BOLTS AND NUTS

The Contractor shall apply molycoat grease mixed with graphite powder (unless otherwise

specified in piping classes) all bolts and nuts during storage, after erection and wherever







flange connections are broken and made-up for any purpose whatsoever. The grease and

graphite powder shall be supplied by the Contractor within the rates for piping work.

5.10 PIPE SUPPORTS

Pipe supports are designed and located to effectively sustain the weight and thermal effects

of the piping system and to prevent its vibrations. Location and design of pipe supports will

be shown in drawings for lines 2” NPS and above, for lines 1 1/2” NPS & below, the

Contractor shall locate and design the pipe supports in line with Standards and obtain the

approval of Company Site Representative on drawings prepared by Contractor, prior to

erection. However, any extra supports desired by Company Site Representative shall also beinstalled No pipe shoe/cradle shall be offset unless specifically shown in drawings.

Hanger rods shall be installed inclined in a direction opposite to the direction in which the

pipe moves during expansion.

Preset pins of all spring supports shall be removed only after hydrostatic testing and

insulation is over. Springs shall be checked for the range of movement and adjusted if

necessary to obtain the correct positioning in cold condition. These shall be subsequently

adjusted to hot setting in operation condition. The following points shall be checked after

installation, with the Company Site Representative and necessary confirmation shall be

obtained certifying that:

- All restraints have been installed correctly.

- Clearances have been maintained as per support drawings.

- Insulation does not restrict thermal expansion.

- All temporary tack welds provided during erection have been fully removed.

- All welded supports have been fully welded.







SPECIFICATION FOR INSPECTION,FLUSHING AND TESTING OF PIPING

1 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements for inspection, flushing and testing of

piping systems. Flushing and testing of all piping systems shall be witnessed by the

Company Site Representative.

1.1 ABBREVIATION AND DEFINITION

1.1.1 ABBREVIATION


P&ID Process and Instrumentation Diagram

PPM Parts Per Million

S.S. Stainless Steel

1.1.2 DEFINITIONS



Contractor Shall mean Party to whom contract of pipeline/piping works is awarded.

Shall Shall indicate a mandatory requirement

2 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

ASME B31.3 (2012) ASME Code for Pressure Piping

3 INSPECTION

During various stages and after completion of fabrication and erection, the piping system

shall be inspected by the Company Site Representative to ensure that:

− Proper piping material has been used.

− Piping has been erected as per drawings and instructions of Company Site

Representative.

− All supports have been installed correctly.

− Test preparations mentioned in this specification have been carried out.

4 FLUSHING

Flushing of all lines shall be done before pressure testing.

Flushing shall be done by fresh potable water or by dry compressed air, wherever water

flushing is not desirable, to clean the pipe of all dirt, debris or loose foreign material.







Required pressure for water flushing shall meet the fire hydrant pressure or utility water

pressure. For air flushing, the line / system will be pressurised by compressed air at the

required pressure which shall be 50 psi maximum. The pressure shall then be released byquick opening of a valve, already in line or installed temporarily for this purpose. This

procedure shall be repeated as many times as required till the inside of the pipe is fully

cleaned.

In line instruments like control valves, orifice plates, rotameters, safety valves and other

instruments like thermowells which may interfere with flushing shall not be included in

flushing circuit.

The screens / meshes shall be removed from all permanent strainers before flushing.

Screens / meshes shall be reinstalled after flushing but before testing.

During flushing temporary strainers shall be retained. These shall be removed, cleaned and

reinstalled after flushing but before testing.

In case any equipment such as column, vessel, exchanger etc. form part of a piping circuit

during flushing, this shall be done with the approval of Company Site Representative.

However, equipments thus included in the circuit shall be completely drained and dried

with compressed air after flushing is completed.

During flushing discharged water/air shall be drained to the place directed by the Company

Site Representative. If necessary, proper temporary drainage shall be provided by the

contractor.

Care shall be taken during flushing so as not to damage/spoil work of other agencies.

Precautions shall also be taken to prevent entry of water/foreign matter into equipments,

electric motors, instruments, electrical installations etc. in the vicinity of lines being flushed.

The contractor shall carry out all the activities required before, during and after the flushing

operation, arising because of flushing requirements, such as but not limited to the

following:

Dropping of valves, specials, distance pieces, inline instruments and any other piping part

before flushing. The flanges to be disengaged for this purpose shall be envisaged by the

contractor and approved by the Company Site Representative. These flanges shall be

provided with temporary gaskets at the time of flushing.

After flushing is completed and approved, the valve distance pieces, piping specials etc.

shall be reinstalled by the contractor with permanent gaskets. However, flanges at

equipment nozzles and other places where isolation is required during testing, only

temporary gaskets shall be provided.







Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping

system for the flushing done in the proforma provided/approved by the Company Site

Representative.

5 PRESSURE TESTING

Pressure testing, in general shall be as per Clause 345 of ASME B31.3, unless otherwise

specified, herein. Lines carrying highly hazardous/poisonous fluids must have a sensitive

leak test.

5.1 EXTENT OF TESTING

With the exclusion of instrumentation, piping systems fabricated or assembled in the fieldshall be tested irrespective of whether or not they have been pressure tested prior to site

welding or fabrication.

To facilitate the testing of piping systems, vessels and other equipments may be included in

the system with the prior approval of Company Site Representative if the test pressure

specified is equal to or less than that for the vessels and other equipments.

Pumps, compressors and other rotary equipments shall not be subjected to field test

pressure. Lines which are directly open to atmosphere such as vents, drains, safety valves

discharge need not be tested, but all joints shall be visually inspected. Wherever necessary,

such lines shall be tested by continuous flow of fluid to eliminate the possibility of blockage.

However, such lines if provided with block valve shall be pressure tested up to the first block

valve.

Seats of all valves shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum cold

working pressure of the valve. Test pressure applied to valves shall not be greater than the

manufacturer's recommendation nor less than that required by the applicable code. Where

allowable seat pressure is less than test pressure, test shall be made through an open valve.

Instruments in the system to be tested, shall be excluded from the test by isolation or

removals, unless approved otherwise by the Company Site Representative.

Restrictions which interfere with filling, venting and draining such as orifice plates etc. shall

not be installed unless testing is complete.

Control valves shall not be included in the test system. Where bypasses are provided test

shall be performed through the bypass and /or necessary spool shall be used in place of the

control valve.

Pressure gauges which are part of the finished system, but cannot withstand test pressure

shall not be installed until the system has been tested. Where piping systems to be tested

are directly connected at the battery limits to piping for which the responsibility rests with

other agencies, the piping to be tested shall be isolated from such piping by physicaldisconnection such as valve or blinds.







5.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / TEST PREPARATION FOR TESTING

Testing shall be carried out with permanent gaskets installed unless specified otherwise or

instructed by the Company Site Representative.

No pressure test shall be carried out against closed valve unless approved by the


The Company Site Representative shall be notified in advance by the Contractor, of the

testing sequence and programme, to enable him to be present for witnessing the test.

Before testing, all piping shall be cleaned by flushing to make it free from dirt, loose scale,

debris and other loose foreign materials.

All piping systems to be hydrostatically tested shall be vented at the high points and the

systems purged of air before the test pressure is applied.

Wherever in the line any void exists due to any reasons, like absence of control valves,

safety valves, check valves etc. it shall be filled with temporary spools.

All joints welded, screwed or flanged shall be left exposed for examination during the test.

Before pressuring the lines, each weld joint shall be cleaned by wire brush to free it from

rust and any other foreign matter.

Where a system is to be isolated at a pair of companion flanges, a blank shall be inserted

between the companion flanges. Minimum thickness of the blank shall be designed in

accordance with applicable design code.

Open ends of piping system where blanks cannot be used, such as pumps, compressors,

turbines or wherever equipment or pipe spools have been recovered or disconnected prior

to hydrostatic testing, shall be blinded off by using standard blind flanges of same rating as

the piping system being tested.

Pressure gauges used in testing shall be installed as close as possible to the lowest point in

the piping system to be tested, to avoid overstressing of any of the lower portions of the

system.

For longer lines and vertical lines, two or more pressure gauges shall be installed at

locations decided by the Company Site Representative.

For lines containing check valves any of the following alternatives shall be adopted for

pressure testing:

• Whenever possible pressurise up-stream side of valve.

• Replace the valve by a temporary spool and reinstall the valve after testing.







• Provide blind on valve flanges and test the upstream and downstream of the

line separately and remove the blind after testing. At these flanges,

temporary gaskets shall be provided during testing and shall be replaced bypermanent gaskets subsequently.

• For check valves in lines 1 1/2" and below flapper or seat shall be removed

during testing (if possible). After completion of testing the flapper / seat shall

be refitted.

Gas lines when hydrostatically tested shall be provided with additional temporary supports

during testing as directed by the Company Site Representative. Piping which is spring or

counter-weight supported shall be temporarily supported, where the weight of the fluid

would overload the support. Retaining pins for spring supports shall be removed only after

testing is completed and test fluid is completely drained. When testing any piping system,

air or steam of approximately 2 kg/cm2g may be used as preliminary test to detect missing

gaskets etc. as this avoids the necessity of draining the line to make repairs. However,

steam shall not be used for this purpose, if the steam temperature is more than the design

temperature of the line.

5.3 TESTING MEDIA, TEST PRESSURE AND TEST PRESSURE GAUGES

5.3.1 TESTING MEDIA

In general all pressure tests shall be hydrostatic using iron free water, which is clean and

free of silt. Maximum chlorine content in water for hydrostatic testing for S.S. piping shall

be 15- 20ppm.

Air shall be used for testing only if water would cause corrosion of the system or

overloading of supports etc. in special cases as directed by Company Site Representative.

Where air/water tests are undesirable, substitute fluids such as gas oil, kerosene, methanol

etc. shall be used as the testing medium, with due consideration to the hazards involved.

These test fluids shall be specified in the line list given to the contractor.

5.3.2 TEST PRESSURE

The hydrostatic/pneumatic test pressure shall be as indicated in the line list or as per the

instruction of Company Site Representative.

The selection of the piping system for one individual test shall be based on the following:

• Test pressure required as per line list.

• Maximum allowable pressure for the material of construction of piping.

Depending upon the above requirements and based on construction progress, maximum

length of piping shall be included in each test.







5.3.3 TEST PRESSURE GAUGE

All gauges used for field testing shall have suitable range so that the test pressure of thevarious systems falls in 35% to 65% of gauge scale range. Pressure gauge dial shall be a

minimum of 150mm. Size of Bourdon tube shall not be less than 75% of nominal diameter

of dial range. Gauge shall be of a good quality and in first class working condition.

Prior to the start of any test or periodically during the field test programme, all test gauges

shall be calibrated using a standard dead weight gauge tester or other suitable approved

testing apparatus. Any gauge showing an incorrect zero reading or error of more than ± 2%

of full scale range shall be discarded .The Company Site Representative shall check the

accuracy of master pressure gauge used for calibration.

5.4 TESTING PROCEDURE

5.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST

All vents and other connections used as vents shall be left open while filling the line with

test fluid for complete removal of air. In all lines for pressurising and depressurising the

system, temporary isolating valves shall be provided if valves, vents, drains do not exist in

the system.

Pressure shall be applied only after the system / line is ready and approved by the


Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump or other pressure source which

shall be isolated from the system as soon as test pressure is reached and stabilised in the

system.

A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for guidance in bringing the

system to the required pressure.

The pump shall be attended constantly during the test by an authorized person. The pump

shall be isolated from the system whenever the pump is to be left unattended.

Test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time to permit thorough

inspection of all joints for leakage or signs of failure. Any joint found leaking during a

pressure test shall be retested to the specified pressure after repair. Test period shall be

maintained for a minimum of three hours.

The pump and the piping system to be tested are to be provided with separate pressure

Indicating test gauges. These gauges are to be checked by the standard test gauge before

each pressure test.

Care shall be taken to avoid increase in the pressure due to temperature variation duringthe test.







5.4.2 PNEUMATIC TEST

When testing with air, pressure shall be supplied by means of a compressor. Thecompressor shall be portable type with a receiver, after cooler and oil separator.

Piping to be tested by air shall have joints covered with a soap and water solution so that

the joints can be examined for leaks.

All other details shall be same as per hydrotesting procedure (specified above)

5.5 COMPLETION OF TESTING

After the hydrostatic test has been completed, pressure shall be released in a manner and

at a rate so as not to endanger personnel or damage equipments.

All vents and drains shall be opened before the system is to be drained and shall remain

open till all draining is complete, so as to prevent formation of vacuum in the system. After

draining, lines / systems shall be dried by air.

After testing is completed the test blinds shall be removed and equipment / piping isolated

during testing shall be connected using the specified gaskets, bolts and nuts. These

connections shall be checked for tightness in subsequent pneumatic tests to be carried out

by the contractor for complete loop / circuit including equipments (except rotary

equipments).

Pressure test shall be considered complete only after approved by the Company Site

Representative. Defects, if any, noticed during testing shall be rectified immediately and

retesting of the system / line shall be done by the contractor at his cost.

5.6 TEST RECORDS

Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping

system, for the System Flushing Report/Certificate & for the pressure test done in the

proforma provided/approved by the Company Site Representative.







SPECIFICATION FOR NONDESTRUCTION EXAMINATION

1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements for the non-destructive examination of

shop & field fabricated piping.

2 ABBREVIATION AND DEFINITION

2.1 ABBREVIATION

ASME American Society for Mechanical Engineers

ASNT American Society for Non Destructive Testing

ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials

CS Carbon Steel

DP/LP Dye/liquid Penetrant

LTCS Low Temperature Carbon Steel

MPE Magnetic Particle Examination

NDT Non Destructive Testing

PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment

PMS Piping Material Specification

2.2 DEFINITIONS



Company/Purchaser shall mean Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd.

Contractor shall mean Party to whom contract of pipeline/piping works is awarded.


3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

Reference has also been made to the latest edition (edition enforce at the time of issue

of enquiry) of the following standards, codes and specifications:

OISD – OIL INDUSTRY SAFETY DIRECTORATE

OISD STD-141 (July-2012) Design and Construction requirements for Cross

Country

OISD STD-214 (Oct-2006) Cross- Country LPG Pipelines

ASME - AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS







ASME B31.3 (2012) Process piping

ASME B31.4 (2009) Pipeline Transportation System for LiquidHydrocarbons and Other Liquids

ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (NPS 1/2 through

NPS 24)

ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End

ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE:

Section V (2010) Non Destructive Examination

Section VIII, DIV I (2010) Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code

Section IX (2011) Qualification Procedure for Welding & Brazing

Procedures, Welders, Brazers and Welding & Brazing

Operators

4 VISUAL EXAMINATION

4.1 Weld shall be visually inspected wherever accessible in accordance with the following

requirements: (as applicable)

1. Internal misalignment 1.5 mm or less

2. Cracks or lack of fusion Not permitted

3. Incomplete penetration Depth shall not exceed the lesser of 0.8

(for other than 100% radiography mm or 0.2 times thickness of thinner butt

welded end.) Component joined by butt-weld. The total

length of such imperfections shall not exceed

38 mm in any 150 mm of weld length.

4. Surface porosity and exposed Not permitted

slag inclusions (For nominal wallthickness 4.7mm & less)

5. Concave root surface (suck up) For single side welded joints concavity of the

root surface shall not reduce the total

Thickness of joint, including reinforcement to

less than the thickness of the thinner of the

components being joined.

6. Weld ripples irregularities 2.5 mm or less

7. Lack of uniformity in bead width 2.5 mm or less







8. Lack of uniformity of leg length 2.5 mm or less

9. Unevenness of bead 2.0 mm or less

10. Weld undercutting 0.8 mm or ¼ thicknesses of thinner

components joined by butt weld, whichever is

less. (shall be smooth finished)

11. Overlap 1.5 mm or less

12. Bead deflection 2.5 mm or less

13. External weld reinforcement and internal weld protrusion (when backing rings are notused) shall be fused with and shall merge smoothly into the component surfaces. The

height of the lesser projection of external weld reinforcement or internal weld

protrusion from the adjacent base material surface shall not exceed the following

limits;

Wall thickness of Thinner Weld reinforcement or internal weld

component joined by butt weld protrusion (mm) max

(mm)

6.4 and under 1.6

Over 6.4 – 12.7 3.2

Over 12.7 – 25.4 4.0

Over 25.4 4.8

14. Throat thickness of fillet welds:

Nominal thickness of the thinner component x 0.7 or more.

15. Flattening:

Flattening of a bend, as measured by difference between the nominal outside

diameter and minimum or maximum diameter at any cross section shall not exceed

5% of the nominal outside diameter.

16. Reduction of wall thickness:

Reduction of wall thickness of a bend, as measured by difference between the

nominal thickness and minimum thickness shall not exceed 10% of the nominal wall

thickness of pipe.

4.2 Welds having any of imperfections which exceed the limitations specified in variousclauses of 4.1 shall be repaired by welding, grinding or overlaying etc. Number of







times of repair welding for the same weld, however shall conform to Clause No. 8(b)

b.5.

5 GENERAL NOTES

5.1 The type and extent of weld examination shall be in accordance with Table –1. All

visual and supplementary methods of girth weld examination shall be in accordance

with ASME B31.3 and the requirements of this Specification.

5.2 Welds between dissimilar materials shall be examined by method & to the extent

required for the material having the more stringent examination.

5.3 For Carbon Steel (P.No.1,) materials NDT of welds shall be performed before & afterPWHT. In order to avoid any repair after PWHT it is recommended that for P.No 1

material NDT shall also be performed before PWHT. UT instead of RT is not

acceptable.

5.4 Internal weld protrusion for welded fittings shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

5.5 Branch welds shall consist of the welds between the pipe and reinforcing element (if

any), nozzles and reinforcing element, the pipe and nozzle under the reinforcing

element. Reinforcing element shall be interpreted as pads, saddles, weldolets,

sockolets, etc.

5.6 Seal welds of threaded joints shall be given the same examination as socket welds.

6 LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

The liquid penetrant & the magnetic particle method of examination shall be in accordance

with section V of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Article 6 and 7 respectively.

The entire area of the accessible finished weld surface shall be examined. Selected root

runs, subject to a maximum of 10%, before finished weld may also be examined to the

discretion of the Company representative.

Wherever MPE/LP testing is specified, either MPE or LP test may be carried out. But

wherever only MPE test is specified LP method of examination may be used only if MP

examination is impracticable in the field.

“Random 10%, 20%” of liquid penetrant / magnetic particle test shall mean testing by

applicable test, one weld for each ten / five welds respectively or less made by the same

welding procedure or operator or both.







When liquid penetrant examination is specified, the surface shall be free of peened

discontinuities. Abrasive blast cleaning shall be followed by light surface grinding prior to

liquid penetrant examination.

Inspection shall be performed in the welds excluding those for which radiography has been

done.

7 RADIOGRAPHY

a) “Random 10%, 20% radiography” shall mean examining not less than one from each

ten / five welds respectively or less made by the same welding procedure or welder

or both. Irrespective of percentage, no. of welds to be radiographed shall be

minimum 1. However, first two welds made by each welder shall also beradiographed in case of “random radiography”.

In process examination shall not be substituted for any required radiographic

examination.

Welds selected from examination shall not include flange welds and shall be

radiographed for their entire length. However, where it is impossible or

impracticable to examine the entire weld length of field welds for either random or

100% radiography, and if the same impossibility is agreeable to the Company Site

Representative, then a single 120° exposure of the weld length may be given

Magnetic Particle test or Liquid Penetrant test.

b) In-process examination shall not be substituted for any required radiographic

examination.

c) Number of radiograph per one circumferential weld shall be as per ASME SEC V

Article 2 and 22.Radiography acceptance standard shall be as per normal service

requirement of ASME B31.3

Type of source and films to be used for Radiographic Examination shall be in

accordance with Table-2.

8 REPAIRS OR DEFECTS / ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

When radiography or other non destructive inspection is specified, acceptance criteria for

repairs or defects shall be as follows:

a) In case of 100% examination, any unacceptable weld shall be repaired and re-

inspected.

b) In case random examination reveals a defect requiring repair, then;

b.1 Two additional examinations of same type shall be made of the same kind of item (if

welded joint, then by the same welding procedure or operator or both).







b.2 If the group of items examined as required by b.1 above is acceptable, the items

requiring repair shall be repaired or replaced and re-examined as required and allitems represented by this additional examination shall be accepted.

b.3 If any of the items examined as required by b.1 above reveals a defect requiring

repair, two further comparable items shall be examined for each defective item

found by examination.

b.4 If all the items examined as required by b.3 are acceptable, the items requiring

repair shall be repaired or replaced and re-examined as required, and all it

represented by this further examination shall be accepted.

b.5 Number of times repair welding could be done for the same weld beforeacceptance shall be as follows:

MATERIAL NO. OF TIMES REPAIR

WELDING IS ALLOWED

C.S.

Killed Steel

Low alloy steel

Austenitic S.S.

Others

2 or less

2 or less

2 or less

2 or less

2 or less

b.6 Welds not found acceptable for allowed number of times of repair as per b.5 above

shall be replaced and re-examined.

b.7 If any of the items examined (as required by b.4) above reveals a defect requiring

repair, all items represented by these examinations shall be either: Repaired or

replaced and re-examined as required. Fully examined and repaired or replaced as

necessary, and re-examined as necessary.

9 HARDNESS TEST

Hardness test shall be in accordance with ASTM E10. Hardness tests of the heat affected

zone shall be made at a point as near as practicable to the edge of the weld. One test per

weld shall be performed.

All welds which are given heat treatment shall be hardness tested. Hardness test for each

weld (unless mentioned otherwise in NDT Table-1) shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3

para 331.1.7 and as called for in NDT table-1, and shall be made after final heat treatment

(wherever specified in welding specification).







A minimum of 10% of welds of hot formed and hot bent materials in each heat treatment

batch which are furnace heat treated and 100% of those which are locally heat treated,

shall be hardness tested.

Following values shall be maintained.

Base metal

grou Nom.

Wall thickness

(mm)

Min. Specified

tensile strength

(MPa)

Max Brinell

hardness remarks

(BHN) CS All All 238

10 FABRICATED FITTINGS

10.1 Bevel edges shall be 100% Dye Penetrant / Magnetic Particle tested.

10.2 Internal weld protrusion shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

10.3 Visual examination, LP/ MP test shall be done on the Completed welds.

10.4 Circumferential & longitudinal pressure retaining butt welds shall be examined by 100%

radiography.

11 MITERS AND FABRICATED REDUCERS

11.1 Bevel edges shall be 100% Liquid Penetrant / Magnetic Particle tested.

11.2 LP/MP test shall be done on root pass in addition to radiography applicable to

circumferential joint of respective piping class.

11.3 Internal weld protrusion shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

11.4 Circumferential & longitudinal pressure retaining butt welds shall be examined by 100%

radiography.

12 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

LP / MP test shall be done on root pass and final pass.

13 EVALUATION

Evaluation shall be done by ASNT level II or higher qualified personnel.

14 TECHNIQUE







Radiography shall be X-ray or Gamma ray with 2-2T sensitivity.

15 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE

Specification

Codes and standards

16 ATTACHMENTS

Appendix – A: Table 1

PENDIX - A

TABLE 1 : CLASS, TYPE & EXTENT OF WELD EXAMINATION

INSPECTION CLASS : I

Inspecti Service Materi Te Pressu Type of Type of Weld Examined







on Class al mp

.

De

g.C

.

re

Class

B16.5

/

B16.34

Examinati

on

Girth

Butt

Wel

d

Sock

et

Weld

Attachme

nt

Weld

Fabricat

ed

Branch

Weld

FabricatedWeld of

Miter/Red

uc

er/Fittings

Remar

ks

I

Category

D Fluid

Services

Carbon

Steel

0

to

65

150#

UPTO

20

KG/CM

²

a) Visual100

%100% 100% 100% 100%

b)

MPT/LPT- - - 10% 100%

TABLE 1 : CLASS, TYPE & EXTENT OF WELD EXAMINATION (CONTD.)

INSPECTION CLASS : IV

Insp Service Mate Te Press Type of Type of Weld Examined







SPECIFICATION FOR STRAINER 1 SCOPE

This specification covers the minimum requirements for design, manufacture, testing and

supply of Strainer to be installed in pump suction / pipeline systems handling liquidhydrocarbons including Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG).

ecti

on

Clas

s

rial mp.

Deg

.C.

ure

Class

B16.5

/

B16.3

4

Examinati

on

GirthButt

Weld

Socket

Weld

Attac

hmen

t

Weld

Fabrica

ted

Branch

Weld

Fabrica

ted

Weld

of

Miter/

Reduc

er/Fitti

ngs

Remarks

IV

All

service

s

Carb

on

Steel

All

Above

600#

Above

104.1

13

KG/CM²

a) Visual 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

Notes :

1) For non

pressure

parts to pressure

parts. 2)

Refer Cl. No. 8 &

9. 3)

Radiography

including

'T' joints.

4) All NDT shall

be carried

out before and

after PWHT for

No.1.(Ref.clause

no.5) 5)

Miters and

Fabricated

fittings are

permitted only if

specified in PMS.

b)

MPT/LPT - 100% - 100% -

c)

Radiograp

hy

100%

Note 3 - - - 100%

d)

Hardnessafter

PWHT Cl.No.9

Cl.No.1

0

Cl.No.

11

Cl.No.1

2

Cl.No.1

3







2 ABBREVIATIONS

2.1 ABBREVIATIONS


ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

NPT (F) Nominal Pipe Thread (Female)

IS Indian Standards

HPCL Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

2.2 DEFINITIONS


Manufacturer / Vendor shall mean the manufacturer or supplier of the

materials covered by this Specification.

Purchaser / Company shall mean Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd.

Shall shall mean a mandatory requirement

Should indicates a strong recommendation to comply with the

requirements of this document based on sound

engineering judgement.

3 CODES AND STANDARDS

The Strainers shall conform to the applicable codes and standards besides the following:

ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe flanges & flanged fittings

ASME Sec VIII Div 1 (2010) Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

4 MATERIAL

4.1 Material of construction of body, flanges, stud bolts & nuts, gaskets and internals shall be as

per data sheet.

4.2 The material composition, physical properties, mandatory tests, dimensions & tolerances

and marking for various components of strainers shall conform to the applicable

specifications / technical notes as specified herein below:

a) Specification for Pipeline Fittings,.

b) Specification for Gaskets.

c) Specification for Bolts and Nuts.

d) Strainer mesh as per Data Sheet.







5 DESIGN & MANUFACTURE

5.1 Design and fabrication of strainers shall be in accordance with standard Drg for T-typepermanent strainers as indicated in attached data sheets.

5.2 Ends of body shall be Flanged / Butt welded as indicated in the Datasheets and shall be as

per applicable specifications.

5.3 Flange face finish and Type of Gaskets shall be as specified in data sheets.

5.4 The blind flange of strainer shall be drilled with a hole of specified size for connections to

piping to be used for draining of strainer. The location of hole shall be such that product

from the strainer can be completely drained off. A pipe nipple of size as indicated inattached data sheet in place of plug shown in attached standard shall be welded for further

hook up of drain piping.

Nipple shall extend outside the blind flange for a length of 200 mm or diameter of drain

pipe whichever is more. Temporary cap shall be used during testing of strainer in

manufacturer’s works.

5.5 Construction of all strainers shall be such that filter element can be removed with strainer

installed in line.

5.6 Flow direction shall be marked on the body of strainer.

5.7 Threaded joints shall be minimized to the maximum extent possible. If used, the threaded

connections shall be seal welded.\

6 INSPECTION & TESTING

6.1 Visual & dimension checks on all strainers shall be carried out by manufacturer as per

Purchaser approved drawings.

6.2 Manufacturer shall review & check all materials test certificates & mandatory inspection &

test reports for the compliance to the requirements of applicable material

specifications/technical notes.

6.3 All strainers shall be hydrostatically tested at test pressure specified in data sheet.

6.4 All BW joints including those of parent material shall be 100% radiographed and fillet welds

shall be 100% DP/MP checked.

6.5 The bevel Ends of all Butt Welded strainers shall undergo 100% MP/DP test.

6.6 Pressure test to demonstrate the values indicated in offer for pressure drop across thestrainer at rated flow in “clean” and “50% clogged” condition shall be carried out by vendor







and proof of such records shall be submitted (or) depending on the discretion of client such

test shall be conducted in presence of client/his representative

6.7 Purchase reserves the right to carry out stage wise inspection of all strainers prior to

despatch. Manufacturer shall give reasonable access and facilities to purchaser’s inspector

for carrying out such inspection.

In no case shall any action of purchaser or his inspector shall relieve the Manufacturer of his

responsibility for material, design, quality or operation of strainers.

Inspection and tests performed/witnessed by the Purchaser’s inspector shall in no way

relieve the Manufacturer’s obligation to perform the required inspection and tests.

7 TEST CERTIFICATES

7.1 Manufacturer shall submit the following certificates:

a) All material test certificates relevant chemical analysis & mechanical properties of

the materials used for fabrication of strainers.

b) Test certificates of hydrostatic test carried out for strainers.

8 MARKING AND SHIPMENT

8.1 Each strainer shall be legibly and conspicuously marked on the body, in accordance with the

requirements of applicable standards.

8.2 SS Name Plate shall be provided for each strainer indicating Tag No., Material of

construction, Design conditions, Capacity, Size, Type and Weights of assembly & Screening

Element.

8.3 Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as Zinc,

Lead or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.

8.4 All items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign material of any

kind.

8.5 All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion, and mechanical damage during

transportation, shipment and storage.

8.6 All open ends shall be provided with covers to prevent ingress of dust & other foreign

materials into the strainer assembly during shipment & storage.

9 DOCUMENTATION

9.1 After placement of order the manufacturer shall submit the four copies of followingdocuments:







a) Detailed fabrication drawing giving overall dimension, materials of various

components including internals, welding details, inspection & testing requirements,etc.

b) Pressure drop calculation across the strainer under clean and 50% clogged condition.

c) Vendor shall also submit his Quality plan subsequent to award of contract for review

of Purchaser.

Approval on above documents shall be obtained from Purchaser. Any change in

design, material & method of manufacture shall not be allowed after Purchaser’s

approval.

9.2 Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies of the

following documents:

a) All tests certificates as per clause 7.0 of this specification

b) Installation instruction

c) All documents approved by Purchaser.

DATA SHEET FOR STRAINER

STANDARD FIELDS DESCRIPTION

STRAINER TYPE T- TYPE STRAINER

PIPE CLASS 900#

SERVICE MS/HSD/SKODESIGN PRESSURE (kg/cm2 g)

REFER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION







DESIGN TEMPERATURE (°C)

CLASS / PRESSURE RATING 900#

SIZE 12” CORROSION ALLOWANCE (mm) REFER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

Construction Details

FLANGE (BOTTOM FLANGE) 900# , RING TYPE JOINT, FINISH UPTO 63μIN

AARH

STR.ELEMENT AREA (mm2) 3 TIMES PIPE SECTION (VENDOR TO

CONFIRM)

MESH NO. REFER REFERNCE 2

MAX. PRESSURE DROP AT 50% CLOGGED

CONDITION (kg/cm2 g)

(VENDOR TO INDICATE)

MAX. PRESSURE DROP AT - CLEANCONDITION (kg/cm2 g)

(VENDOR TO INDICATE)

MANUFACTURER (VENDOR TO INDICATE)

MANUFACTURER DRG. NO (VENDOR TO INDICATE)

DIMENSION : FACE TO FACE

& CENTRE LINE TO BOTTOM

ASME B16.9,

BOTTOM FLANGE TAPPED FLANGE WITH ¾” NPTF FOR DRAIN

END CONNECTION THICKNESS MATCHING TO CONNECTING PIPE, REFER

PMS

Material of Construction

BODY ASTM A234 GR WPB, SMLS

MESH S304

PLUG ( ¾ ”) ASTM A105

FLANGE ( BOTTOM FLANGE ) ASTM A105

GASKET SOFT IRON OVAL RING

BOLTS ASTM A 193 GR B7

NUTS ASTM A 194 GR 2H

CONDITIONS

DESIGN STANDARD ASME SECTION VIII DIV. 1

DESIGN FLOW RATE (m³/hr) 790m3

/HrDESIGN PR. (kg/cm²g) 104

DESIGN TEMP. (°C) (-)29 / 65

OPTG. TEMP. (°C) 10 - 45

SP. GR. AT OPTG. TEMP. 0.73-0.845

VISCOSITY AT OPTG TEMP (cP) 0.7-4.5

BODY HYD. TEST PR. (kg/cm²g) 1.5 TIMES THE DESIGN PRESSURE

Standard

DESIGN STANDARD ASME SECTION VIII DIV. 1

END CONNECTION STANDARD ASME B16.25

GASKET ASME B16.20







WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR THE FABRICATION OF PIPING

1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

This specification shall be followed for the fabrication of all types of welded piping joints of

piping system within the battery limits of the plant.







The following welded pipe joints shall be included:

a) All pipe joints, longitudinal butt welds, circumferential butt welds, groove welds and

fillet welds.

b) Attachments for forging, flanges and other supports of pipes.

c) Welded manifold headers and other sub-assemblies.

d) Welded branch connections with or without reinforcing pads.

e) Joints in welded/fabricated piping components.

f) The attachments of smaller connections for vents, drain drips and other instrument

tapping.

Any approval granted by the Company / Site Representative or Company inspectorsshall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities and guarantee.

This specification shall be applicable for welding of pipelines for transportation of

liquid petroleum, gas and other similar products.

This specification shall be read in conjunction with the Welding Specification Charts.

2 ABBREVIATION AND DEFINITION

2.1 ABBREVIATION

ASME American Society for Mechanical Engineers

ASNT American Society for Non Destructive Testing

ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials

AWS American Welding Society

BPVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

CS Carbon Steel

DP/LP Dye/liquid Penetrant

DWDI Double Wall Double Image

DWSI Double Wall Single Image

GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding

IQI Image Quality Indicator

LTCS Low Temperature Carbon Steel

MP Magnetic Particle

NDT Non Destructive Testing

PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment

PMS Piping Material Specification

RT Radiographic Testing

SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding

SWSI Single Wall Single Image

UTS Ultimate Tensile Strength







2.2 DEFINITIONS



Contractor Shall mean Party to whom contract of

pipeline/piping works is awarded.


3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

All welding work, equipment’s for welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary functions and the

welding personnel shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of the following

accepted standards and procedures unless otherwise specified in the Welding Specification

Chart and the Technical Notes attached thereof. In the case of conflicting requirements, the

requirements mentioned in Welding Specification Chart/Technical Notes shall be applicable.

Reference has also been made to the latest edition (edition enforce at the time of issue of

enquiry) of the following standards, codes and specifications:

OISD – OIL INDUSTRY SAFETY DIRECTORATE

OISD STD-141 (July-2012) Design and Construction requirements for Cross

Country

OISD STD-214 (Oct-2006) Cross- Country LPG Pipelines

ASME - AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS

ASME B31.3 (2012) Process piping

ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (NPS 1/2 through

NPS 24)

ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End

ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE:

Section V (2010) Non Destructive Examination

Section VIII, DIV I (2010) Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code

Section IX (2011) Qualification Procedure for Welding & Brazing

Procedures, Welders, Brazers and Welding & BrazingOperators







Note: All codes/standards mentioned above shall be the latest at the time of awarding of

contract In the event of any differences due to additional requirements mentioned

in this specification, over and above those obligatory as per codes, this specification

shall be binding.

4 BASE METAL

4.1 In general, use of carbon steel is envisaged. The details of the material specifications are

given in the Welding Specification Chart.

4.2 The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s test certificates for every heat of the

materials supplied by him.

5 WELDING CONSUMABLES

5.1 The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all the welding consumables necessary for

the execution of the job such as electrodes, filler wires, argon etc. and these should bear

the approval of the Company Site Representative.

5.2 The welding electrodes and filler wires supplied by the Contractor shall conform to the class

specified in the Welding Specification Chart. The material shall be of the make approved by

the Company Site Representative

5.3 Electrode qualification test records should be submitted in accordance with Suggested

Format - A (Appendix A) in the respected of the electrodes tested by the Contractor, for

obtaining the approval of the Company Site Representative.

5.4 The Contractor shall submit batch test certificates, from the electrode manufacture’s, giving

details of physical and chemical tests carried out by them, for each batch of electrodes to be

used.

5.5 All electrodes shall be purchased in sealed containers and stored properly to prevent

deterioration. The electrodes removed from the containers shall be kept in holding ovens at

temperature. “Out of the oven time” of electrodes, before they are consumed, shall not

exceed the limits recommended by the electrode manufacturer. The electrodes shall be

handled with care to avoid any damage to the flux covering.

5.6 All low hydrogen type of electrodes shall be re-baked at 350°C for 1 hour minimum and

stored in ovens kept at 80-100°C before use. Recommendation of the electrode

manufacturer shall be followed if available.







5.7 The electrodes, filler wires and flux used shall be free from rust, oil, grease, earth and other

foreign matter which affect the quality of welding.

5.8 Tungsten electrodes used shall conform to ASME Sec. II C SFA 5.12 specification.

6 SHIELDING & PURGING GAS

6.1 Argon gas used in GTA welding for shielding purposes shall be 99.995% pure. The purity of

the gas shall be certified by the manufacturer. The rate of flow for shielding purposes shall

be established through produced qualification tests. Normally this rate may be 12-20 CFH.

6.2 Argon gas with a purity level of 99.995% shall be used for purging.

6.3 When GTAW process alone or a combination of GTAW and SMAW processes is

recommended for the production of a particular joint, the purging shall be maintained

during the root pass and for the first filling pass to minimize oxidation on the inner side of

the pipe, unless otherwise specified in Welding Specification Chart.

6.4 Initial purging shall be maintained for sufficient period of time so that at least 4-5 times the

volume between the dams is displaced, in order to completely remove the entrapped air. In

no case should the initial purging period be less than 10minutes. High gas pressure should

be avoided.

6.5 After initial purging, the flow of the backing gas should be reduced to a point where only a

slight positive pressure prevails. For systems, which have a volume (up to 1/2 cubic foot) to

be purged, a gas flow rate of 6-CFH is usually adequate. Systems of larger volume may

require higher flow rates and these should be established during procedure qualification

tests.

6.6 Gas backing (purging) is not required for socket type of welded joints.

6.7 Dams, used for conserving inert gas during purging, shall be removed after completion of

the welding, and shall be accounted for. Wherever, removal of dams is not possible after

welding, use of water-soluble dams should be made.

7 EQUIPMENTS & ACCESSORIES

7.1 The Contractor should have the arrangement of sufficient number of welding and cutting

equipment’s, auxiliaries, and accessories of sufficient capacities so as to meet the

target/schedule.

7.2 All the equipment’s for performing the heat treatment, including transformers,thermocouples, pyro-meters, automatic temperature recorders (with suitable calibration







arrangement etc.) shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expenses and these should

bear the approval of the Company Site Representative.

7.3 Contractor shall make necessary arrangements at his own expense, for providing the

radiographic equipment’s, radiographic films, processing equipment all other darkroom

facilities and all the equipment’s/materials required for carrying out the liquid-penetrant /

magnetic particle test/ultrasonic testing for satisfactory and timely completion of the job.

7.4 Repair of any work, necessitated by faulty equipment’s or operation used by the Contractor,

will be done at his own expense.

8 WELDING PROCESS

8.1 Welding of various materials under this specification shall be carried out using one or more

of the following processes with the approval of the Company Site Representative.

a) Shielded Metal Arc Welding Process (SMAW).

b) Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Process (GTAW).

8.2 The welding processes to be employed are given in the Welding Specification Chart. Any

deviation desired by the Contractor shall be obtained through the express consent of the


8.3 Automatic and semi-automatic welding processes shall be employed only with the express

approval of the Company Site Representative. The welding procedure adopted and

consumables used shall be specifically approved.

8.4 A combination of different welding processes could be employed for a particular joint only

after duly qualifying the welding procedure to be adopted and obtaining the approval of


9 EDGE PREPARATION

9.1 GENERAL

The edges to be welded shall be prepared to meet the joint design requirements by any of

the following methods recommended:

a) Carbon Steel

Gas cutting, machining or grinding methods shall be used. After gas cutting, oxides shall be

removed by chipping or grinding.

9.2 CLEANING







a) The ends to be welded shall be properly cleaned to remove paint, oil, grease, rust,

oxides, sand, earth and other foreign matter. The ends shall be completely dry before

the welding commences.`

b) On completion of each run, craters, welding irregularities, slag etc., shall be removed by

grinding and chiselling. Separate grinding wheels and brushes should be used for carbon

steels and other materials.

10 ALIGNMENT & SPACING

10.1 Components to be welded shall be aligned and spaced as per the requirements laid down in

applicable code. Special care must be taken to ensure proper fitting and alignment when

the welding is performed by GTAW process. Flame heating for adjustment and correction ofends is not permitted unless specifically approved by the Company Site Representative.

10.2 A wire spacer of suitable diameter may be used for maintaining the weld root opening while

tacking, but it must be removed after tack welding and before laying the root bead.

10.3 For pipes of wall thickness 5 mm and above, the ends to be welded shall be secured in

position with the aid of couplers, yokes and ‘C’ clamps, to maintain perfect alignment. Yokes

shall be detached after the completion of weld, without causing any surface irregularity.

Any irregularity caused on the pipe surface must be suitably repaired to the satisfaction of

the Company Site Representative.

10.4 Tack welds, for maintaining the alignment, of pipe joints shall be made only by qualified

welders using approved WPS. Since the tack welds become part of the final weld joint, they

shall be executed carefully and shall be free from defects. Defective tack welds must be

removed prior to the actual welding of the joints.

10.5 Tacks should be equally spaced. Minimum number of tacks shall be:

3 tacks - for 2 1/2” and smaller dia. Pipes.

4 tacks - for 3” to 12” dia. Pipes.

6 tacks - for 14” and larger dia. Pipes.

10.6 Welding shall commence only after approval of fit-up by the Company Site Representative.

11 WEATHER CONDITIONS

11.1 The part being welded and the welding personnel should be adequately protected from rain

and strong winds. In the absence of such a protection no welding shall be carried out.

11.2 During field welding using GTAW process, particular care shall be exercised to prevent anyair current affecting the welding process.







12 WELDING TECHNIQUE

12.1 ROOT PASS

a) Root pass shall be made with electrodes/filler wires recommended in the welding

specification chart. For fillet welding, root welding shall be done with consumables

recommended for filler passes. The preferred size of the electrodes is 2.5 mm

diameter (12 SWG) but in any case not greater than 3.25 mm (10 SWG).

b) Upward technique shall be adopted for welding pipe held fixed with its axis

horizontal.

c) The root pass of butt joints should be executed so as to achieve full penetration with

complete fusion of the root edges. Weld projection inside the pipe shall be as perapplicable code. It shall be limited 3mm max. when the applicable code does not

place any restriction.

d) Any deviation desired from the recommended welding technique and electrodes

indicated in the welding specification chart should be adopted only after obtaining

explicit approval of the Company Site Representative.

e) Welding shall be uninterrupted.

f) While the welding is in progress care should be taken to avoid any kind of movement

of the components, shocks, vibrations and stresses to prevent occurrence of weld

cracks.

g) Peening shall not be used.

12.2 JOINT COMPLETION

a) Joint shall be completed using the class of electrodes, recommended in the Welding

Specification Chart.

b) Two weld beads shall not be started at the same point in different layers.

c) Butt joints shall be completed with a cover layer that would affect good fusion at the

joint edges and a gradual notch free surface.

d) Each weld joint shall have a workmanship like finish. Weld identification work shall

be stamped clearly at each joint, just adjacent to the weld. Metal stamping shall not

be used on thin pipe having wall thickness less than 3.5mm. Suitable paint shall be

used on thin wall pipes for identification.

e) Rust preventive/protective painting shall be done after the weld joint has been

approved.

13 HEAT TREATMENT

13.1 PREHEATING

a) No welding shall be performed without preheating the joint to 10°C (50°F) when the

ambient temperature is below 10°C.







b) Preheating requirements for the various materials shall be as per the Welding

Specification chart attached.

c) Preheating shall be performed using resistance or induction heating methods.Preheating by gas burners, utilizing oxy-acetylene or oxy-propane gas mixtures, with

neutral flame may also be carried when permitted by the Company Site

Representative.

d) Preheating shall extend uniformly to at least three times the thickness of the joint,

but not less than 50 mm, on both sides of the weld.

e) Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the joint

during welding. Temperature recorders shall be provided by the Contractor to record

the temperature.

13.2 POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT

a) Post weld heat treatment, wherever required for joints between pipes, pipes and

fittings, pipe body and supports shall be carried out as per the welding specification

chart, applicable codes standards and the instructions of the Company Site

Representative. In this regard, procedure qualification shall be done before carrying

out PWHT in production weld.

b) The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Company Site

Representative, well before carrying out actual heat treatment, the details of the

post weld heat treatment procedure as per Suggested Format - B (Appendix A), that

he proposes to adopt for each of the materials/assembly/part involved.

c) Post weld heat treatment shall be done in a furnace or by using an electric resistance

or induction-heating equipment, as decided by the Company Site Representative.

d) While carrying out local post weld heat treatment, technique of application of heat

must ensure uniform temperature attainment at all points of portion being heat-

treated. Care shall be taken to ensure that width of heated band over which

specified post weld heat treatment temperature attained is at least that specified in

the relevant applicable standards/codes. Control of temperature shall be done using

microprocessor/computer controlled system. The desired time-temperature cycle

shall be entered into the microprocessor/computer.

e) Throughout the cycle of heat treatment, the portion outside the heated band shall

be suitably wrapped under insulation so as to avoid any harmful temperature

gradient at the exposed surface of pipe. For this purpose temperature at the

exposed surface should not be allowed to exceed 50% of the peak temperature.

f) The temperature attained by the portion under heat treatment shall be recorded by

means of thermocouple pyrometers. Adequate number of thermocouples should be

attached to the pipe directly at equally spaced location along the periphery of thepipe joint. The minimum number of thermocouples attached per joint shall be 1 up







to 6” dia., 2 up to 10” dia. and 3 for 12” dia. and above. However, the Company Site

Representative can increase the required number of thermocouples to be attached if

found necessary.

g) Automatic temperature recorders, which have been suitably calibrated, should be

employed for measuring & recording the temp. Both, the actual time-temperature

graph and the designed time-temperature graph shall be available on every chart.

The time-temp graph shall be submitted to Company Site Representative

immediately on completion of Stress Relieving Cycle. The calibration chart of each

recorder should be submitted to Company / Site Representative prior to starting the

heat treatment operations and his approval should be obtained.

h) Manufacturer’s test certificate shall be submitted for the thermocouple materialsand record shall be maintained by the contractor.

i) Immediately on completion of the Heat Treatment, the Post Weld heat Treatment

chart/records along with the hardness test results on the weld points and Heat

Affected Zone, wherever required as per the Welding Specification Chart, shall be

submitted to Company Site Representative for his approval.

j) Each joint shall bear an identification number, which shall be maintained in the

piping sketch to be prepared by the Contractor. The weld joint identification number

should appear on the corresponding post weld heat treatment charts. The chart

containing the identification numbers and piping sketch shall be submitted to the

Company Site Representative in suitable folders.

14 CLEANING OF THE WELD JOINT

All weld joints shall be free from adherent weld spatters slag, arc strike, sward, dirt or

foreign matter. This can be achieved by brushing.

15 INSPECTION AND TESTING

15.1 GENERAL

a) The Company/Company’s inspector shall have free access to all concerned areas,

where the actual work is being performed. The Contractor shall also accord the

Company’s Inspector all means and facilities necessary to carry out inspection.

b) The Company is entitled to depute his own inspector to the shop or field where

prefabrication and erection of pipe lines is in progress for (but not limited to) the

following objectives:

i) To check the conformance to relevant standards and suitability of variouswelding equipment’s and the welding performance.







ii) To witness the welding procedure qualification.

iii) To witness the welder performance qualification.

iv) To check whether shop/field welding being executed is in conformity with therelevant specifications and codes of practice followed in piping construction.

b) Contractor shall intimate sufficiently in advance the commencement of qualification

tests, welding works and acceptance tests, to enable the Company’s Inspector to be

present to supervise them, as decided by the Company / Company Site

Repesentative.

15.2 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION

Welding procedure qualification shall be carried out in accordance with the applicablerequirements of ASME Sec. IX latest edition and/or other applicable codes and the Technical

Specifications. The Contractor shall submit the welding procedure specification in format as

per QW-482, ASME Section IX immediately after the receipt of the order.

Company inspector will review, check and approve the welding procedure submitted and

shall release the procedure for qualification tests. The procedure qualification test shall be

carried by the Contractor at his own expense. A complete set of test results in the format as

per QW-483, ASME Section IX shall be submitted to the Company inspector for his approval

immediately after completing the procedure qualification test at least

2 weeks before the commencement of actual work. Standard test as specified in the code

shall be carried out in all cases. In addition to these tests, other tests like macro/micro

examination, hardness tests, dye penetrant examination, Charpy V – notch, Corrosion tests,

impact tests etc. shall be carried out on specimens depending upon the type of base

material, operating conditions and requirements laid down in the detailed drawings and

specifications. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to carry out all tests required to

the satisfaction of the Company inspector.

15.3 WELDER’S QUALIFICATION

a) Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the ASME Section-IX or other

applicable codes. The Company’s inspector shall witness the test and certify the

qualification of each welder separately. Only those welders who have been approved

by the Company’s Inspector shall be employed for welding. Contractor shall submit

the welder qualification test reports in the format as per QW-484, ASME Section IX-

2008 and obtained express approval before commencement of work. It shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor to carry out the qualification tests of welders.

b) The welders shall always have in their possession the identification card as shown in

Suggested Format - D (Appendix A) and shall produce it on demand by the Company

inspectors. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to issue the identify cardsafter it has been duly certified by the Company’s Inspector.







c) No welder shall be permitted to work without the possession of identify card.

d) If a welder is found to perform a type of welding or in a position for which he is not

qualified, he shall be debarred from doing any further work. All welds performed by

an unqualified welder shall be cut and redone by a qualified welder at the expense

of the Contractor.

15.4 VISUAL INSPECTION

Inspection of all welds shall be carried out as per the latest edition of the applicable codes

and specifications. All finished welds shall be visually inspected for parallel and axial

alignment of the work, excessive reinforcement, concavity of welds, shrinkage cracks,inadequate penetration, unrepaired burn-through, under cuts, dimensions of the weld,

surface porosity and other surface defects. Undercutting adjacent to the completed weld

shall not exceed the limits specified in the applicable standard / code.

15.5 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

a) The radiographic Examination procedures to be adopted shall be submitted by the

Contractor as per Suggested Format - C and shall be approved from the Company

Inspector prior to employment. A person qualified to ASNT Level-II in Radiographic

testing shall prepare the procedure. The Radiographic Procedure shall be established

to demonstrate that required sensitivity can be consistently achieved under the

most unfavourable parameters (e.g. source to film distance, geometric unsharpness,

thickness etc.). The radiographic technique and procedure adopted shall conform of

the requirements mentioned in Article 2 as well as Article 22 (SE 94, 142, 747, 999 &

1025) of ASME Sec. V. The IQI sensitivity obtained shall be equal to or better than

the requirements mentioned in Article 2 of ASME Sec. V. Source side penetrameter

shall be used in establishing radiographic procedure/technique. The acceptance

criteria shall be as per the relevant codes of Fabrication and overriding requirements

if mentioned elsewhere in the technical specifications of the contract. The

Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out Radiography; rectification of defects

and re-radiography of welds repaired/rectified at his cost.

b) The extent of Radiography shall be as per specifications to be supplied to the

Contractor. For welds between dissimilar materials, the extent of Radiographic

Examination shall be the more stringent of the two recommended for the materials

being welded. Wherever random Radiography is called for, in a particular piping

class, the dissimilar materials weld joints shall essentially be included.

c) Type of Radiation source and film to be used shall be as per Specification for NDT

examination of piping, for carrying out radiographic examination. However if

specifications (as given elsewhere in the contract) for some critical material requireusage of X-Radiation, then Radiography shall be done using X-Rays only.







d) The Contractor shall fulfil all the statutory and Company safety requirements while

handling X- ray and Gamma-ray equipment.e) In case of random radiography, the joints for Radiography shall be selected by the

Company Inspector and the Radiography shall be performed in his presence, if he

instructs the Contractor to do so. The Contractor shall furnish all the radiographs, to

the Company inspector immediately after processing along with evaluation by a

person qualified to ASNT Level - II in Radiographic testing, in line with clause T- 292

of article 2 of ASME Sec. V. The certificate of ASNT Level - II (RT) personal shall be

submitted to Company inspector for his approval prior to start of job.

f) The Contractor shall provide the Company Inspector, all the necessary facilities at

site such as a dark room with controlled temperature, illuminator (viewer) suitablefor varying densities, a duly calibrated electronic densitometer with batteries,

magnifying glass, tracing papers, ruler, marking pencils etc. to enable him to review

the radiographs.

g) Where random radiography is specified, the first weld of each welder shall be

completely radiographed. In the case of pipe size 6” and below, the first two welds

shall be completely radio graphed.

h) For each weld performed by a welder found unacceptable, two additional checks

shall be carried out on welds performed by the same welder. This operation is

iterative and the of two additional welds for each welds deemed unsatisfactory shall

be continued till such time that two consecutive welds of satisfactory quality are

found for every defective weld.

i) The Contractor shall carry out these additional radiographic testing at his own

expense. To avoid the possibility of too many defective welds by a single welder

remaining undetected for a long period to time, the Contractor shall promptly

arrange for Radiographic Examination so that there is no accumulation of defective

joints.

j) Contractor shall quote rates for X- ray as well as Gamma Ray for joints indicated to

be radiographed by X-ray in Specification for NDT examination of piping.

15.5.1 CHECK SHOTS

a) Company shall select 5% of the total joints radiographed on a day for check shots.

Contractor shall carry out check shots as directed.

b) Weld profiled of check shot shall be compared with weld profile observed in the

earlier Radiographs. In the event of any one variation in the check shots and earlier

Radiographs, Contractor shall re-shoot the entire lot of joints radiographed by







particular Radiography agency on the particular date. All the re-shot films shall be

compared with the originally submitted films.

15.6 LIQUID PENETRANT AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

a) Whenever such tests are specified, the tests shall be carried out on joints chosen by the

Company inspector, as per ASME Section V article 6 and 7 respectively. The tests are to be

performed by a person possessing a valid ASNT/ISNT Level II qualification in the method

being used.

15.7 HARDNESS TEST

Hardness requirements for weld shall be as per the Welding Specification Chart (attached).Hardness testing shall be carried out by Vickers Hardness Tester during welding procedure

qualification and shall be cross sectional. For production welds, hardness testing may be

carried out by portable digital hardness tester. Poldi hardness tester shall not be permitted.

Contractor shall produce documentary evidence/calibration certificate to the company’s

Inspector and obtain approval of the hardness testing equipment.

15.8 PROOF TESTS

Hydrostatic and pneumatic tests shall be performed as per the requirements laid down by

respective flushing and Testing specification/applicable codes to demonstrate the

soundness of the welds. The tests shall be conducted after fulfilling the requirement of

visual examinations radiography etc., and after the entire work has been certified by the

Company’s inspector to be fit for being subjected to such tests.

16 REPAIRS OF WELDS

a) Defects ascertained, through the inspection methods, which are beyond acceptable

limits shall be removed after the joint is completely radiographed by the process of

chipping and grinding.

b) When the entire joint is judged unacceptable, the welding shall be completely cut

and edges suitably prepared as per required alignment tolerance. The re-welded

joint shall again be examined following standard practices.

c) No repair shall be carried out without prior permission of the Company’s Inspector.

d) Repairs and/or work of defective welds shall be done in time to avoid difficulties in

meeting the construction schedules.

17 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR (4 COPIES EACH)







a) Electrode and Welding Consumable Qualification Records as per Suggested Format –

A (Appendix A), for the Welding Consumables tested and approved for the work.

b) Batch Test Certificates, for the Electrodes used, obtained from the Electrode

manufacturers.

c) Proposed Heat Treatment Procedure as per Suggested Format - B (Appendix A).

d) Heat Treatment Charts.

e) Weld joint hardness test results.

f) Welding Procedure Specifications as per QW-482, ASME Section IX (latest edition)immediately after receipt of the order.

g) Welding Procedure Qualification records as per QW-483, ASME Section IX (latest

edition).

h) Welder Performance Qualification records as per QW-484, ASME Section IX (latest

edition) immediately after conducting Welder Qualification Tests.

i) Radiography Procedure as per Suggested Format - C (Appendix A) and other NDT

procedures.

j) Radiographic test Report along with Radiographs and other NDT reports.

k) Piping Sketch (Isometric) giving all the details regarding the pipe specifications,

welded joints, joints radiographed, magnetic particle tested, ultrasonic tested,

penetrant tested, joints heat treated, WPS used, welders identification number, etc.







SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1. The Contractor shall submit the bid in two – bid system. Both the bids shall be in sealed

envelope clearly marked as `UNPRICED BID` / `PRICED BID`. In the Unpriced bid any

deviation shall be clearly mentioned. Rates shall not be mentioned in the Unpriced bid.

2. Special terms and Conditions of Contract shall be read in conjunction with other

Attachments of the work contract and any other document forming part of this contract

wherever the context requires.

3.

Wherever it is stated any where in this tender document that such and such a supply is to be

effected or such and such a work is to be carried out , it shall be understood that the same

shall be effected / carried out by the contractor at his own cost, unless a different intention

is in and expressly stated herein or otherwise from the contract.

4. HPCL reserves the right to reject offers not meeting its Technical requirements and commercial

conditions.

5.

HPCL reserves the right to accept any tender in whole or in part or reject any or all tenderswithout assigning any reason.

6. The quantities mentioned in the tender enquiry are approximate and may change at the time of

execution and payment shall be made as per the actual measurement and as certified by HPCL

Engineer.

7. No escalation to item rates will be allowed due to possible increase or decrease in quantities of

various items.

8. The work shall be carried out strictly as per HPCL’s stipulated/ ordered specifications /

drawings. Any deviations must be duly authorized by HPCL.

9. All the safety and security regulations and other statutory rules as applicable at the Site shall be

meticulously complied with. In the event of any damage caused due to non – observance of

such rules/regulations the contractor shall be solely responsible for the same and shall keep

HPCL indemnified against all losses and claims arising from the same.







10. The Party shall agree to keep HPCL indemnified and save HPCL harmless from any and all claims

whatsoever inclusive of damage/ costs or otherwise arising from injuries to or death of person

what so ever or damages or alleged damages to the property.

11. Party shall not be entitled to sub-let, sub-contract or assign the work against order placed

without HPCL’s consent in writing.

12. HPCL RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND OR DELETE ANY ITEM OF THE BILL OF QUANTITIES IN A

LATER DATE AT ITS DESCRATION DEPENDING ON THE JOB REQUIREMENTS AND ALSO SPILT THE

ENTIRE JOB BETWEEN TWO OR MORE PARTIES WITHOUT ASSIGNING ANY REASON.

13. JOB COMPLETION :

TIME SCHEDULE

Name of Work

Composite works (Piping, Civil, Structural,

Miscellaneous Works) for Khopoli Booster

Station

A) SUPPLY, ERECTION OF ALL STATION WORKS

INCLUDING PRE-COMMISSIONING – 3 MONTHS

FROM FAX OF ACCEPTANCE

B) COMMISSIONING ASSISTANCE – 01 MONTH

AFTER PRE-COMMISSIONING

14. The Party shall prepare a detailed program / Bar chart jointly with the Engineer-In-Charge. The

work shall be executed strictly as per the time schedule given in the documents. The period of

construction given includes the time required for testing, rectifications, if any, resetting and

completion in all respects in accordance with the contract and in the entire satisfaction of the

Engineer-In-Charge.

15. PO Validity-Deleted

16. Contractor has to follow Work Permit System (Hot/Cold/Height) to carry out the work at

Plant and no work should be start without approval of work permit by officer-in-charge.

17. The contractor has to provide proper uniforms, hand gloves, Safety helmets, Safety shoes,

safety Sunglasses / Goggles and other PPE & Safety gadgets as required to all their workmen

and contractor shall also ensure that their all the workmen should wear / use the concern

PPE at all times while they are working in the Plant premises. Contractor shall also providethe Identity cards to his workmen & supervisor.







18.

All the works shall be carried out in the operating Plant premises. Contractor shall adhere to allthe safety regulations, permission procedures, operating timings of the plant etc. Extended

hours on regular days and working on holidays are NOT possible due to operational / security /

safety reasons. Contractors shall arrange for proper schedule of all activities for carrying out the

works at site. Contractor shall visit the site before quoting for the work and shall acquaint

themselves about the timings, permissions, procedures etc., including labour contracts,

verifications required for labour etc. No extension of completion period shall be admissible for

the above reasons. Contractor shall take all necessary approvals / permissions on daily basis

before commencement of works at site.

19. In case there is any suspension of work on account of damage to the property or misconduct of

the contractor’s personnel, the contractor has to settle the dispute and provide additional

resources to make up for the construction activity loss during the period of suspension.

20. The Party shall submit their quality control and quality Assurance plan for approval from

MPSPL’s Engineer-In-Charge. The contractor is to have established system for planning which

ensures that all activities can be performed in accordance with the bid specifications and

stipulated time period.

21. TERMS OF PAYMENT:

Monthly partial payment shall be allowed for the actual work done at site.

Along with final bill contractor shall close and submit all the hot / cold work permits, Approved

Welding procedure qualification record, Welders qualification reports, Radiography films and

third party inspection reports, copy of gate passes for incoming material / returnable material and

complete reconciliation of HPCL issued materials. All Bills shall be submitted in duplicate along with

HPCL certified measurement sheet to MPPL Trombay office, for processing and payment.

Payment will be made monthly against the work done during the preceding month on the basis

of accepted unit rates as per contract in the following manner:

PIPING

55% on fabrication of piping.

30% on erection, alignment, welding complete to achieve mechanical completion.

10% on flushing, testing, draining, drying etc.

5% on completion of all works in all respects and acceptance thereof.







CIVIL WORKS

95% on completion of work on prorata basis as certified in running bills.5% after completion of all works in all respects and acceptance thereof.

STRUCTURAL WORKS

55% on supply and acceptance of material at Site.

20% on fabrication.

20% on erection, alignment, welding, painting etc.

5% on completion of all work in all respects and acceptance thereof.

ITEMS INCLUDING SUPPLY OF FINISHED GOODS (MECHANICAL)

65% on receipt of material at site and acceptance thereof.

25% on erection, alignment, welding, grouting, painting etc.

5% on testing.

5% on completion of all work in all respects and acceptance thereof.

EQUIPMENT ERECTION WORKS

45% on Unloading, Shifting and installation in position

30% after initial alignment, levelling and grouting.

20% after final alignment and making ready for trial run.

5% on completion of all works in all respects and acceptance thereof.

FOR LUMPSUM ITEMS

For all lumpsum item included in Schedule of Rates, CONTRACTOR shall furnish breakup of

lumpsum prices for the approval of Engineer-in-Charge. Payment for such items shall be made

accordingly.

18 The Party shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to the correctness and

sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices quoted in the schedule of

quantities which rates and prices shall except as otherwise provided cover all his obligations

under the contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper completion and

maintenance of the works.

19 Measurement : The quantities shown against the various items are approximate. Payment

will be made on the basis of actual measurement at the site.

20 Mobilization Advance : No mobilization advance shall be payable to the contractor. No request for

mobilization advance request from the contractor shall be entertained.







21 Income tax : Income tax at the prevailing rate shall be deducted from the Contractor’s bill as per

Income Tax Act. The rates quoted by the contractor shall be inclusive of all such charged.

22 All terms and conditions, specifications shall be meticulously followed. No extra work will be

allowed unless they are not essential for the completion of the specified job in written by HPCL.

23 Before filling the Tender the Contractor will check all drawings and Schedule of Quantities and will

get immediate clarification from HPCL as required on items which are not being understood.

24 The actual specifications / drawings can vary as per the site conditions and HPCL shall be the

deciding authority.

25 All necessary fire fighting necessities such as DCP extinguishers etc. has to be arranged by

vendor. The Contractor should employ skilled personnel to operate DCP fire extinguisher.

However, during hooking up job if Gully sucker is required, the same will be provided by HPCL.

26 HPCL’s Officer concerned shall have free access to all areas, where the actual work is being

performed. The contractor shall also provide all means and facilities necessary to carry out

inspection. This clause shall also applicable for the Third party inspection agency as mentionedabove.

27 Flushing of mainline will be done by HPCL. Contractor has to cut the mainline by cold cutting

method.

28 In case of conflict between requirements stipulated by HPCL and those specified in applicable

standards, specification, scope of work, drawings etc. forming part of this tender, the more

stringent requirement shall be complied with.

29 Supplying and arranging Power / DG set /water/dewatering pump is in the scope of Contractor.

30. Contractors have to quote for all the items of Tender.

Note : Before filling the tender, Contractor’s are suggested to visit the site at Khopoli Booster

station of HPCL.







31. THIRD PARTY INSPECTION:

Vendor shall arrange to get the Welding procedure qualification test inspection, welderqualification test inspection, Radiography interpretation of weld joints by one of the following

TPI agencies:

i) DNV

ii) EIL

iii) Lloydds

iv) Bureau Veritas

v) M/s. Germanischer Lloyd

vi) Mecon

vii) IR Class

Name of the finalised TPI agency, shall be submitted to HPCL for approval.







MEASUREMENT OF WORK

1. Measurement of works shall be based on the execution/final drawings. When such details are

not available or inadequate, physical measurements will be taken by the Contractor in the

presence of the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2. Measurement of weights will be in metric tonnes corrected to the nearest kilogram. Linear

measurement will be in meters corrected to the nearest centimetre.

3.

All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works in progress will be jointly measuredby the representative of the Engr-in-charge and the contractor's authorised agent

progressively. Such measurements will be either recorded/typed by the contractor in the

numbered measurement sheets to be supplied by Engineer-in-Charge /Owner or computerized

by Contractor themselves. The measurements shall be signed in token of acceptance by the

contractor or his authorised representative. The contractor shall submit the bill in the

approved performa in quintriplicate to the Engr-in-Charge of the work.

4.0 PIPING

4.1 Payment will be based on linear measurement as per execution drawings:

i) All lines shall be measured along the centre lines of pipes, curvilinear centre lines of bends and

elbows, centre line of flanges and all other fittings such astees, reducers, expansion joints etc.

all in line instruments, line mounted fittings, ejectors, eductors, mixers, sight glasses, trays,

filters, de-super heaters etc. All types of valves shall be excluded from this measurement.

ii) All Socket weld fittings & hot/cold bends, reducers etc. for size 1-1/2" and below shall be

fabricated and erected as per requirements by the contractor at no additional cost and his rates

for piping of size 1-1/2" and below shall be inclusive of this work.

iii) The forged tees shall be supplied by the contractor as per the requirement of the drawings. All

other branch connections including reinforcement pads shall be accomplished by pipe to pipe

connections. The rates quoted for piping shall be inclusive of making branch connections. The

reinforcement pads shall be measured separately.

iv) Vents and drains shall be measured from O.D. of pipe lines and shall be paid for at the

corresponding unit rates for similar sizes of pipe. Other piping attachment such as couplings,

earthing lugs etc. shall be supplied & erected by the contractor within his quoted rates for

piping.







v) Fabrication of spool pieces for temporary use to aid Contractor's work such as fabrication,

erection, flushing and testing of piping etc. shall be done by Contractor as part of piping work

and no separate payment shall be made for this.

vi) In case of branch piping, the measurement shall be made from outer surface of the main line

except in case of equal size branches, in which case measurement shall be made from centre

line of the branching header.

vii) Fabrication of Specials :Fabrication of mitre bends and reducers (concentric & eccentric) from

the pipes/Steel plates/ fabricated pipes shall be carried out by contractor within their quoted

prices, payment will be made on numbers of such specials at the rates given separately in

Schedule of Rates. However, the erection of mitre bends and reducers shall be part of piping

erection work and the rates for piping will be inclusive of this work. Reducers will be paid alongwith piping of larger diameter except in the case of funnels where they are welded only to the

smaller dia pipes. Payment will be made along with piping of such smaller dia.

viii) Erection of Valves : Erection of all types of valves such as gate/ globe / check / plug / needle/

ball / control/ safety valves etc. will be paid on number basis at the rates given separately in

the Schedule of Rates. Any dismantling and re-erection of the valves required for the purpose

of testing, calibration etc. will be carried out by the contractor within his quoted rates.

ix) Fabrication of Supports:

I) Fabrication of all types of pipe supports, provided as per drawings & instructions of the

Engineer-in-Charge, will be paid on weight basis. Bolts, nuts and washers including U-bolt will

be supplied by contractor. Weight of bolts, nuts and clamps etc. shall not be added to the

weight of pipe support for payment purpose.

ii) Erection of all types of supports, spring supports and turn buckles, including grouting of

supports, if required, shall be carried out by the Contractor as part of piping work and no

separate payment will be made for it.

iii) While fabricating the supporting elements, the contractor will ensure that the dimensions

shown in the drawings match with site conditions. No payment shall be made for rectification

arising out of discrepancies in dimensions of the fabricated items of supporting elements due to

site conditions.

iv) Additional supports as necessary with the site condition shall be fabricated and erected in

accordance with the standard engineering practices and instructions of Engineer-in-charge.

5.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

5.1 Payment for steel work shall be made on basis of admissible weight of the structure accepted,

the weight being determined as described below.







5.2 The weight for payment will be assessed from the approved fabrication drawings and the

respective bill of materials prepared by the contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

The weight of structural material/ Plate shall be calculated wherever necessary on the basis ofIS Hand Book. If sections are different from IS sections, then Manufacturer Hand Book shall be

referred to.

5.3 Sections built out of plates/structural shall be paid on the actual weight incorporated except for

gussets which will be paid on the weight of the smallest rectangle enclosing the shape.

5.4 Gratings shall be paid on the basis of calculated weights as determined from the dimensions

given on the design drawings/ bill of materials. Full deduction shall be made for all opening

above 300 mm size and skews.

5.5 Welds, bolts, nuts, washers etc. shall not be measured. Rate of structural steel work shall be

deemed to include the same.

5.6 No other payment either for temporary works or for any other item such as welds, shims,

packing plates etc., shall be made. Such items shall be deemed to have been included in the

rate quoted for steel work.







LIST OF SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR BOUGHT-OUT ITEMS

A) Mainline & Mechanical

i) PIPE CARBON STEEL TO INDIAN STANDARDS

a. A.S.T. PIPES PVT. LTD. (AST GROUP)

b. ADVANCE STEEL TUBE LTD.

c. APL APOLLO TUBES LTD. (ER. BIHAR TUBES LTD.

d. ASIAN MILLS PVT. LTD.

e. ASRANI TUBES LIMITED

f. DADU PIPES (P) LTD.

g. ESSAR STEEL LIMITED(ER HAZIRA PIPES MILL)

h. GAURANG PRODUCTS PVT LTD. (AST GROUP)

i. GOODLUCK STEEL TUBES LTD.

j. HI-TECH PIPES LIMITED

k. INDUS TUBE LIMITED

l. JINDAL INDUSTRIES LTD

m. JINDAL PIPES LTD.

n. JINDAL SAW LTD (KOSI WORKS)

o. JOTINDRA STEEL & TUBE LTD

p. LALIT PIPES AND PIPES LTD.

q. MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD.

r. MAN INDUSTRIES (INDIA) LTD. – PITHAMPUR

s. MAN INDUSTRIES (INDIA) LTD. ANJAR

t. MUKAT TANKS & VESSELS LTD.

u. NEZONE TUBES LIMITED

v. NORTH EASTERN TUBES LIMITED

w. PRATIBHA INDUSTRIES LIMITED

x. PRATIBHA PIPES & STRUCTURAL LTD.y. PSL LTD (CHENNAI)

z. PSL LTD (V1, V2 & NC)

aa. RAMA STEEL TUBES LTD.

bb. RATNAMANI METALS AND TUBES LTD.

cc. RAVINDRA TUBES LIMITED

dd. SAMSHI PIPE INDUSTRIES LIMITED

ee. SURYA ROSHNI LTD.

ff. SWASTIK PIPES LTD.

gg. UTKARSH TUBES & PIPES LTD. (FORMLY BMW)

hh. WELSPUN CORP. LIMITED (DAHEJ)ii. ZENITH BIRLA (INDIA) LIMITED







ii) PIPE & TUBULARS TO A.P.I. STANDARDS

1. ARCELORMITTAL TUBULAR PRODUCTS ROMAN SA, ROMANIA

2. BHEL (TRICHY),INDIA

3. DALMINE SPA (ENQUIRY TO TENARIS),UAE

4. EEWKOREA CO. LTD (GERMANY), KOREA

5. EEW KOREA CO. LTD. (KOREA), KOREA

6. EISENBAU KRAMER GMBH, GERMANY

7. HYUNDAI RB CO. LTD. SOUTH KOREA

8. ILVA LAMIERE E TUBI SRL (ENQ TO ILVA SPA, ITALY9. INOX TECH. SPA, ITALY

10. ISMT LTD. AHMEDNGR, INDIA

11. ISMT LTD. BARAMATI, INDIA

12. JINDAL PIPES LTD., INDIA

13. JINDAL SAW LTD. (KOSI WORKS), INDIA

14. JINDAL SAW LTD. (NASHIK WORKS), INDIA

15. LALIT PIPES AND PIPES LTD. INDIA

16. MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD., INDIA

17. MAN INDUSTRIES (I) LTD. (PITHAMPUR), INDIA

18. MUKAT TANKS & VESSELS LTD., INDIA19. PRATIBHA INDUSTRIES LIMITED, INDIA

20. RATNAMANI METALS AND TUBES LTD., INDIA

21. SIDERCA S.A.I.C (ENQUIRY TOTENARIS), UAE

22. SUMITOMO METAL IND. LTD., INDIA

23. SURYA ROSHNI LTD., INDIA

24. SWASTIK PIPES LTD, INDIA

25. TATA STEEL UK LIMITED (FORMERLY C702)

26. TUBOS DE ACERO DE MEXICO SA (ENQ. TENARIS), UAE

27. TUBOS REUNIDOS SA SPAIN

28. UMRAN STEEL PIPE INC (TURKEY), TURKEY29. VALCOVNY TRUB CHOMUTOV, CZECH REPUBLIC

30. VALLOUREC AND MANNESMANN TUBES, FRANCE

31. WELSPUN CORP LIMITED (DAHEJ), INDIA

iii) PIPE/TUBE CS (SEAMLESS) TO ASTM STDS

1. ARCELORMITTAL TUBULAR PRODUCTS ROMAN SA, ROMANIA

2. BHEL (TRICHY), INDIA

3. CHANGSHU SEAMLESS STEEL TUBE CO. LTD., CHINA

4. DALMINE SPA (ENQUIRY TO TENARIS, UAE

5. HEAVY METALS & TUBES LIMITED (MEHSANA), INDIA







6. ISMT LTD. AHMEDNGR, INDIA

7. ISMT LTD. BARAMATI INDIA

8. JFE STEEL CORPORATION, UAE9. JINDAL SDAW LTD (NASHIK WORKS) INDIA

10. KLT AUTOMOTIVE AND TUBULAR PRODUCTS LTD., INDIA

11. MAHALAXMI SEAMLESS LIMITED, INDIA

12. MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD, INDIA

13. PRODUCTS TUBULARES S.A.U, SPAIN

14. RATNADEEP METAL TUBES LTD., INDIA

15. STAINEEST TUBES PVT LTD., INDIA

16. SUMITOMO METAL IND. LTD., INDIA

17. TUBOS REUNIDOS SA SPAIN

18. VALCOVNY TRUB CHOMUTOV, CZECH REPUBLIC19. VALLOUREC ANDMANNESMANN TUBES FRANCE

20. YANGZHOU CHENGDE STEEL PIPE CO. LTD DUBAI (UAE)

iv) PIPE CARBON STEEL (WELDED) TO ASTM STDS

1. EEW KOREA CO. LTD. (GERMANY), KOREA

2. EEW KOREA CO. LTD. (KOREA), KOREA

3. EISENBAU KRAMER GMBH, GERMANY

4. HYUNDAI RB CO. LTD., SOUTH KOREA

5. INOX TECH. SPA, ITALY

6. JINDAL SAW LTD (KOSI WORKS), INDIA

7. LALIT PIPES AND PIPES LTD., INDIA

8. MAN INDUSTERIES (I) LTD.(PITHAMPUR), INDIA

9. MAN INDUSTRIES (INDIA) LTD. ANJAR, INDIA

10. MUKAT TANKS & VESSELS LTD., INDIA

11. RATNAMANI METALS AND TUBES LTD., INDIA

12. SUMITOMO METAL INDIA LTD., INDIA

13. TATA STEEL UK LIMITED

v) Valve

a) Globe Valves

1) M/s Weir BDK Valves (Aunit of Weir India Pvt. Ltd.)

2) M/s Datre Corpn (Calcutta)

3) M/s KSB Pumps Ltd., Coimbatore, India

4) M/s L&T Audco

5) M/s Neco Schuber & Salzer Ltd. (New Delhi)

6) M/s Niton Valve India Pvt. Ltd., India

7) M/s Ornate Valves (Mumbai)

8) M/s Panchavati Valves & Flages (P) Ltd., India







9) AV Valves Ltd., India

10) BHEL (Trichy), India

11) Econo Valves Pvt Ltd, India12) Fouress Engg (I) Ltd (Aurangabad), India

13) Leader Valves Ltd, India

14) Oswal Industries Ltd, India

15) Petrochemical Engineering Enterprises, India (Fouress Group)

16) Sakhi Engineers Pvt Ltd., India

17) Shalimar Valves Pvt Ltd., India

18) Steel Strong Valves India Pvt Ltd, India

19) Petro Valves Pvt. Limited, Ahmedabad

20) Fluid Line Valves Co. (P) Ltd., India

21) MICON Engineers (Hubli) (P) Ltd., India

b) Check Valves

1. M/s Advance Valves Pvt. Ltd., Noida

2. M/s Aksons & Mechanical Enterprises, Mumbai

3. M/s Larsen & Toubro Limited (M/s Audco India Limited, Chennai)

4. M/s AV Valves Ltd., India

5. M/s Weir BDK Valves (A unit of Weir India Pvt. Ltd.)

6. M/s BHEL, Trichy

7. M/s Datre Coroportion Limited, Calcutta

8. M/s Leader Valves Ltd., Jalandhar

9. M/s Neco schubert &Salzer Ltd., New Delhi

10. M/s Niton Valves Industries (P) Ltd., Mumbai

11. M/s Precision Engg.Co., Mumbai

12. Econo Valves Pvt Ltd, India

13. Fouress Engg (I) Ltd (Aurangabad)

14. KSB Pumps Ltd (Coimbattore), India

15. NSSL Ltd. (Neco Schubert & SalzerLtd)

16. Oswal Industries Ltd, India

17. Panchvati Valves & Flanges Pvt Ltd, India

18. Petrochemical Engineering Enterprises, India (Fouress Group)

19. Sakhi Engineers Pvt Ltd

20. Shalimar Valves Pvt Ltd

21. Steel Strong Valves India Pvt Ltd, India

22) Fluid Line Valves Co. (P) Ltd., India

22. MICON Engineers (Hubli) (P) Ltd., India

c) Plug Valves

1. M/s Breda Energia Sesto Industria Spa, Italy

2. M/s Fisher Sanmar Ltd., Chennai3. M/s Larsen & Toubro Ltd., (Audco) New Delhi







4. M/s Nordstrom Valves, USA

5. M/s Serck Audco Valves, UK

6. M/s Sumitomo Corporation India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi7. M/s Z Corporation, Korea

8. M/s Hawa Valves (India) Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai

9. M/s Steel Strong Valves India Pvt. Ltd., Navi Mumbai

10. M/s Econo Valves Pvt. Ltd., India (WSSL Ltd. Group Co.)

11. M/s Flow-Serve PTE (Mfr. SERCK), India

12. M/s Galli Cassina SPA, Italy

d) Ball Valves

1. M/s Hawa Valves (India) Pvt. Ltd, Navi Mumbai

2. M/s Larsen & Toubro (Audco), India

3. M/s Oswal Industries Ltd., India

4. M/s Virgo Engineers Ltd., Delhi

5. M/s Boteli Valve Group Co. Ltd., China

6. M/s Cameron Italy s.r.l., Italy

7. M/s Dafram S.P.A., Italy

8. M/s Fangyuan Valve Group Co. Ltd., China

9. M/s Franz Schuck GmbH, Germany

10. Kita Mura Valve Manufacturing Co.Ltd., India

11. Petrol Valve S.R. Italy

12. Piplviesse S.P.A. Italy

13. Tormene Gas Technology S.P.A. Valvetalia Group, Italy

14. Valbeot S.R.L. Italy

15. KMC Corporation, South Korea

16. MSA a.s. Czeek Republic

17. OMS Aleri, Italy

18. PCC Valves s.r.l. Italy

19. Perar s.p.a. (Engineering. To TRP srl), Italy

20. Italy s.r.l., Italy

21. MIR Valves, Malaysia

e) Gate Valves

1. M/s Associated Toolings (India) Pvt. Ltd,

2. M/s BDK Engineering Industries Ltd.,

3. M/s BHEL (Trichy)

4. M/s KSB Pumps Ltd (Coimbattore)

5. M/s Larsen & Toubro Ltd.

6. M/s Leader Valves Ltd.

7. M/s M.H. Valves Pvt. Ltd.8. M/s Niton Valve Industries Pvt Ltd.







9. M/s Oswal Industries Ltd.,

10. M/s Petrochemical Engineering Enterprises

11. M/s Steel Strong Valves India Pvt. Ltd.

vi) Flanges

1. M/s Aditya Forge Ltd., Vadodara

2. M/s Amforge Industries Ltd., Mumbai

3. M/s CD Engineering Co., Ghaziabad

4. M/s Echjay Forgings Pvt. Ltd. (Bombay), Mumbai

5. M/s Echjay Industries Ltd., Rajkot

6. M/s Forge & Forge Pvt. Ltd., Rajkot

7. M/s Golden Iron & Steel Works, New Delhi

8. M/s JK Forgings, New Delhi

9. M/s Metal Forgings Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai

10. M/s Perfect Marketings Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

11. M/s Sky Forge, Faridabad

12. M/s S&G, Faridabad

13. Chaudhry Hammer Works Ltd, India

14. JAV Forgings (P) Ltd, India

15. Kunj Forgings Pvt Ltd, India

16. MS Fittings Mgf. Co. Pvt. Ltd.

17. R.N. Gupta & Co. Ltd, India

18. R.P. Engineering Pvt Ltd, India

19. Sanghvi Forgings & Engineering Ltd

20. Shri Ganesh Forgings Ltd., India

21. Uma Shankar Khandelwal & Co., India

22. Sawan Engineers, Baroda

23. Stewarts & Lloyds of India Ltd., Kolkata

24. Engineering Services Enterprises

25. Abasi Engineersing Works, India

26. Anandmayee Forgings Pvt Ltd, India

27. CD Industries., India

28. Fivebros Forgings Vot Ltd., India29. Good Luck Engineering Co., India

30. Korea Flange, South Korea

31. Lal Metal Forge Ltd, India

32. Melesi Officine

33. Amlrojie Melesi & C. srl. Italy

34. Nicola Galperti & Figlio S.P.A India

35. Paramount Forge, India

36. Pradeep Metal Limited, India

37. Punjab Steel Works (the), India

38. R.D.Forge, India39. Shah Industrial & Comml. Corporation, India







40. Ulma Forja S. Coop.

41. Vivial Forge Pvt. Ltd., Vadodara

vii) Fittings

1. M/s Commercial Supplying Agency, Mumbai

2. M/s Dee Development Engineers Ltd.

3. M/s Eby Industries, Mumbai

4. M/s Flash Forge Pvt. Ltd., Vishakhapatnam

5. M/s Gujarat Infra Pipes Pvt. Ltd., Vadodara

6. M/s M.S. Fittings Mfg. Co. Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata

7. M/s Stewarts & Lloyds of India Ltd., Kolkata

8. M/s Teekay Tubes Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai9. M/s Pipe Fit,Baroda

10. M/s Sky Forge, Faridabad

11. M/s S&G, Faridabad

12. M/s Sawan Engineers, Baroda

13. Eby Fasteners, India

14. R.N. Gupta & Co. Ltd, India

15. Exten Engg Pvt Ltd

16. Sivananda Pipe & Fittings Ltd

17. Chero Piping SPA, Italy

18. CSA Fittings, India19. EBY Fasteners, India

20. Fittnox SRL, Italy

21. Keonsae High Pressure Co. Ltd., South Korea

22. Munro & Miller Fittings Ltd., U.K.

23. TK Corporation, South Korea

24. Tube Turn (India) Pvt Ltd., India

25. Topaz Piping Industries, India

26. Technoforge SPA, Italy

27. P.K. Tubes & Fittings Pvt. Ltd., India

28. Vivial Forge Pvt. Ltd., Vadodara

viii) Gaskets

1. IGP Engineers (P) Ltd., Madras

2. Madras Industrial Products, Madras

3. Dikson & Company, Bombay

4. Banco Products (P) Ltd., Vadodara

5. Goodrich Gaskets Pvt Ltd

6. Starflex Sealing India Pvt Ltd, India

7. Teekay Meta Flex Pvt Ltd

8. UNIKLINGER Ltd







9. HEM Engg. Corp.

10. Unique Industrial Packing Pvt. Ltd.

ix) Fasteners

1. Nireka Engg. Co. (P) Ltd., Calcutta

2. Precision Taps & Dies, Bombay

3. AEP Company, Vithal Udyoug Nagar

4. Fix Fit Fasteners, Calcutta

5. Precision Engg. Industries, Baroda

6. Echjay Forgings Pvt. Ltd., Bombay

7. Capital Industries, Bombay8. Boltmaster India Pvt Ltd, India

9. Deepak Fasteners Limited, India

10. Fasteners & Allied Products Pvt Ltd, India

11. Hardwin Fasteners Pvt Ltd, India

12. J.J. Industries, India

13. Multi Fasteners Pvt Ltd, India

14. Nexo Industries, India

15. Pacific Forging & Fasteners Pvt Ltd, India

16. Pioneer Nuts & Bolts Pvt Ltd, India

17. Precision Auto Engineers, India

18. President Engineering Works, India

19. Sandeep Engineering Works, India

20. Syndicate Engineering Industries, India

21. BEA SRL, Italy

22. Korea Parts & Fasteners (KPF), South Korea

23. Kundan Industries Ltd., India

24. Mega Engineering Pvt. Ltd., India

25. OME Metallurgica ERBESE S.R.L, Italy

26. Pankaj International, India

27. Udehra Fasters Ltd., India

x) Welding Electrodes : Lincoln, D&H or equivalent make

GENERAL REMARKS FOR VENDOR

1) For procuring bought out items from vendors other than those listed above, the same

may be acceptable subject to the following:

-

a) The vendor/ supplier of bought out item(s) is a manufacturer/ supplier of said item(s) for

intended services and the sizes being offered is in their regular manufacturing/ supplyrange.







b) The vendor / supplier should not be in the Holiday list of HPCL / other PSU Should have

supplied at least one single random length (i.e. 5.5 meters to 6.5 meters) for item assorted

pipes / tubes and for other items, which are to be supplied in quantity on number-basis(other than assorted pipes / tubes) minimum 01 (One) number of same or higher in terms

of size and rating as required for intended services.

The bidder should enclose documentary evidences i.e. PO copies, Inspection Certificate etc.

for the above, along with their bids.

2) For any other item(s) for which the vendor list is not provided, bidders can supply those

item(s) from vendors/ suppliers who have earlier supplied same item(s) for the intended

services in earlier projects and the item(s) offered is in their regular manufacturing/ supply

range.

The bidder is not required to enclose documentary evidences (PO copies, Inspection

Certificate etc.) along with their offer, however in case of successful bidder, these

documents shall required to be submitted by them within 30 days from date of Placement

of Order for approval to HPCL.

3) For any new agencies/ vendors, bidders can submit the PTR of the agencies/ vendors who

have earlier successfully completed the works for the intended services in earlier similar

type of projects.

The bidder is not required to enclose documentary evidences (PO copies, Inspection

Certificate etc.) along with their offer, however in case of successful bidder, these

documents shall require to be submitted by them for approval to HPCL.







SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY

ITEM

NO

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY.

1 Earthwork in excavation upto a depth of 1.5m to the required profile for

all types of soil (including hard rock, concrete slab breaking etc.) including

shoring, strutting, de-watering, if any, disposal of total excavated earth

inside/outside the plant premises as directed by the Engineer-in-charge

including all labour, transportation vehicles, loading & unloading,spreading, compacting for all leads & lifts etc. complete as per the

detailed technical specifications and as directed by the site-in-charge. The

surplus earth to be dumped out of the plant premises at a place which is

not objectionable to any private / Govt. Agencies and HPCL is not

responsible for any issues arising due to dumping of surplus earth outside

plant premises.

Cu.m 80

2 Supplying, providing, mixing and placing in position R.C.C of mix ratio

1:1:3 (M30) as per specification and drawings with 20 mm downsize

crushed graded coarse aggregates for two pump foundation (of Approx.

8.3m X 2.4 m) for all depths and heights, including bailing out water

manually, compacting, mechanical mixing & vibrating, finishing, curingcomplete as per Technical specifications (Group : 2) mentioned in the

tender and as directed by the site-in-charge. Rate includes providing

required good quality MS shuttering also. ( Reinforcement steel to be

paid separately)

Cu.m 60

3 Supplying, providing, mixing and placing in position R.C.C of mix ratio

1:1.5:3 (M20) as per specification and drawings with 20 mm downsize

crushed graded coarse aggregates for columns, pipie supports,

equipment foundation, cable trenches , RCC covers & other cast-in-situ

works etc. for all depths and heights, including mechanical mixing &

vibrating, curing complete as per Technical specifications (Group : 2)

mentioned in the tender and as directed by the site-in-charge. Rateincludes providing required good quality MS shuttering also. (

Reinforcement steel to be paid separately)

Cu.m 40

4 Supplying transporting, stacking, straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending,

placing, tying in position (including providing 16 gauge annealed binding

wire) High yield strength deformed ( HYSD ) TMT bars of FE 415(thermo

mechanically treated bars) conforming to IS 1786 ( latest edition /

revision ) as reinforcement steel as per drawings, technical specifications

(Group : 2) mentioned in the tender & as directed by the site-in-charge.

(The rate shall be applicable for any height & depth).

TM 8







5 Supplying & laying rubble stone soling to the required grade and profile

in buildings’ flooring, road works, paving, ramps etc. using approved

quality black stone properly hand packed & filling up the crevices with

smaller size stones followed by stone dust and watering so as to fill all

voids for thickness as shown on drawing, including rolling with power

roller etc. Complete as per the Technical specifications (Group : 5)

mentioned in the tender document and as advised by the site-in-charge.

Cu.M 5

6 Erection of Mainline Pumps : Taking delivery of Owner's supplied

materials within a radius of 500 meters, equipments, shifting /

transporting within station premises, placing on pre-constructed

foundations, assembling together all sub-assemblies, leveling, alignment,

grouting, cleaning and flushing by water, draining, checking, testing, pre-

commissioning and commissioning, including supply of all necessary

manpower / fitter / rigger etc.including supply of all necessary tools &

tackles, dressing and making good of the foundation and completing the

work in all respects in accordance with the relevant drawings,

manufacturer's installation instruction, specifications and instructions of

Site Engineer / EIC.

No. 1

7 Alignment of ML pump : Alignment of pump base frame, Alignment of

pump & motor without piping ,Alignment of pump & motor with piping by

mean to latest equipment as per direction of Engineer-in-charge

No 1

8 FABRICATION, ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF PIPING (Size

12’’): Receiving and taking over of all Owner supplied materials from

Owner's designated place(s) of issue, transportation including loading,

unloading, handling from Owner's designated place(s) of issue to

Contractor's own stock yard(s)/ work site(s)/ work shop(s) including

arranging all necessary intermediate storage area(s) thereof, as required;

supply of all materials (except those specified subsequently in SOR),

equipment, consumables as defined in Contractor's scope of supply and

their transportation to the work site(s); performing all above

ground/buried piping fabrication works including cutting, edge

preparation (inclusive of grinding the edges of pipes, fittings, flanges etc.

to match with the matching edges of uneven/ different thickness

wherever required), fit up, bending, pre-heating wherever required,

welding, threading etc.; erection of pipes of all types and thickness over

sleepers, overhead on racks and at all elevations; hook-up with equipment

nozzles; installation of all type of valves up to size of 1.5" NB, all types of

inline and online instruments such as pressure/thermal safety valves

(other than those covered separately), fittings of all sizes i.e. flow tees,

insulating joints, LR bends, pig signallers, elbows, reducers, tees, 'o' lets,

flanges, blind flanges spectacle blinds, tappings for pressure gauges,

thermowells, hoses and hose couplings of all sizes, if applicable, sample

connections, flame arrestors as applicable, vents and drains required for

process and hydrotesting purposes etc. including fixing of all types of

gaskets (including gaskets for RTJ flanges ), bolts, studs and nuts of all

sizes; fabrication of strainers of sizes up to 1.5", carrying out non-

destructive testing such as magnetic particle/ liquid penetration including

performance of radiographic inspection of piping of all types, sizes,

thickness including providing or hiring of all necessary equipment, supply

Mtr. 20







of all consumables including radiographic films and whatever else even

though not expressly mentioned but required to perform the work as per

specification and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge etc. as required;

hook-up with existing piping/pipeline installed by others as per drawings

wherever required; cleaning and flushing by water/ compressed air,

carrying out hydrostatic test, pneumatic test, valve functional test and any

other type of testing as specified, de-pressurising, dewatering, drying by

compressed air if applicable; cutting/ rebeveling (as required), pre-

commissioning and providing commissioning assistance to Commissioning

Contractor/Agency for process piping and commissioning of non-process

piping if applicable; clean-up and restoration of site, preparation of as

built drawings, documents and project records; transportation of surplus

free issue materials to Owner's designated place(s); completing all works

in all respects as per the AFC drawings, specifications, standards and other

provisions of Contract and instruction of Engineer-in- Charge.

Installation of above ground Carbon Steel Process Piping as per details

given above of Size 12 INCH 14.3 mm thk., 900# API 5L Gr. X-42 PSL1, BE

9 Installation of 12" T-Strainers NO. 1

10 Installation of Basket Filters : Shifting basket filter from the designated

place of Owner's supplied materials within a radius of 500 meters,

equipments, shifting / transporting within station premises, placing on

pre-constructed foundations, assembling together all sub-assemblies,

leveling, alignment, grouting, cleaning and flushing by water, draining,

checking, testing, pre-commissioning, dressing and making good of the

foundation and completing the work in all respects in accordance with the

relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction, specifications

and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC.

No. 1

10 Installation of Lube Oil Skid : Shifting Lube Oil Skid from the designated

place of Owner's supplied materials within a radius of 500 meters,

equipments, shifting / transporting within station premises, placing on

pre-constructed foundations, assembling together all sub-assemblies,

leveling, alignment, grouting, cleaning and flushing by water, draining,

checking, testing, pre-commissioning, dressing and making good of the

foundation and completing the work in all respects in accordance with the

relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction, specifications

and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC.

No. 1

12 Breaking of RCC/PCC : Breaking RCC/PCC to the required profile disposal

of total broken debris inside/outside the plant premises as directed by the

Engineer-in-charge including all labour, transportation vehicles, loading &

unloading, spreading, compacting for all leads & lifts etc. complete as per

the detailed technical specifications and as directed by the site-in-charge.

The surplus debris to be dumped out of the plant premises at a place

which is not objectionable to any private / Govt. Agencies and HPCL is not

responsible for any issues arising due to dumping of surplus debris outside

plant premises.

Cu.m 60







GENERAL TERMS & CONDITION



PUMP DIVISION

COIMBATORE

FS DOCUMENT No.

FPD-GAD-BOM-13-115001-01

SHEET

1 OF 3

CAPACITY AUGMENTATION OF MUMBAI PUNE SOLAPUR PIPELINE

TITLE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING

CUSTOMER : HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED

END USER : HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED

CUSTOMER PO No. : 12000342-OQ-10002/SAP

EQUIPMENT TAG No. : MPSL-KH-MP-01/02

SERVICE : HSD PUMPS

PUMP MODEL : 8X15DMXD

FS REF. No. : BOM-13-115001

QTY. : 2

0 7/23/2013 SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL VKM SRR RVS

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 1 of 10

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS:- LIMITED TENDER

1) This is only a Tender Enquiry and not an order.

2) The tender should be submitted online at website

https://etender.hpcl.co.in only, by the due date and time, as specified in the

tender. Late / delayed tenders submitted on line after the due date andtime, for whatsoever reasons will not be considered. The Server Date & Time

as appearing on the HPCL website https://etender.hpcl.co.in shall only be

considered for the cut-off date and time for receipt of tenders. Offers sentthrough post, telegram, fax, telex, e-mail, courier or by any other mode willnot be considered.

3) Partially completed / incomplete tenders shall not be considered.

4) All communications regarding the tender including queries, if any, andsubmission of offers shall be done online within the e-Procurement system

at website https://etender.hpcl.co.in

5) Two Bid System

Bidders are required to submit offer in Two parts, namely “Unpriced” ( Technical Bid) & “Priced”(Price Bid). The Bidder may modify or withdraw hisonline bid after the bid’s submission on line, prior to the bid due date &

time.

6) Validity

Quoted prices shall be valid for a period of 90 days from the due date /extended due date for the placement of order. Notwithstanding above, theOwner may solicit the Bidder’s consent to an extension of the period of bidvalidity. The request and the responses thereto shall be made on line/ orthrough any other means of communication decided by the owner. The bidsecurity/EMD shall also be accordingly extended by the bidder at no extra

cost to the owner.

7) Bidders shall be required to arrange all resources, including Digital IDsand Internet Connections at their own cost, for participating in onlinetenders at HPCL e-Procurement site http://etender.hpcl.co.in.

8) For any, site related / bidding procedure issues, please contact Eprochelpdesk at : 022- 42100111 on any day between 10.00 AM to 6.00PM except onSundays/Public holidays.) Please refer to help link after logging in, in case you are new to e-Tender.

https://etender.hpcl.co.in/









HPCL: MPSPL

Page 2 of 10

9) HPCL shall not be responsible for any delays reasons whatsoever inreceiving as well as submitting offers, including connectivity issues. HPCLshall not be responsible for any postal or other delays in submitting EMD /tender cost wherever applicable.

10) Request for extension of tender submission due date, if any,received from bidders within 72 hours of tender submission due date /time, shall not be considered.

11) Tender opening (unpriced bid as well as priced bid) will be done online atthe time and dates specified in the tender. Vendors who have responded tothe tender are requested to login at the specified date and time at HPCL e-

procurement website https://etender.hpcl.co.in for witnessing the tender

opening (unpriced bid as well as priced bid in case of technically acceptedvendors).

12) HPCL reserves the right to accept any tender in whole or in part or rejectany or all tenders without assigning any reason. HPCL reserves right toaccept any or more tenders in part. Decision of HPCL in this regard shall befinal and binding on the bidder.

13) Technical and Unpriced Part of the Offer will be opened by HPCL as perthe due date and time mentioned in the NIT (Notice Inviting Tender)/E- Tender Calender .The Priced part of the Offer of technically qualified bidders

will be subsequently opened on-line as per date advised subsequently.

14) Cost of bidding:

The bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation andsubmission of the bid including digital certificate, and Hindustan PetroleumCorporation Limited (HPCL), will in no case, be responsible or liable for thesecosts, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.

15) EMD (NOT Applicable)

BID SECURITY/EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD) :- IMPORTANT NOTE :THE TENDERER WILL BE REQUIRED TO PAY A SUM AS SPECIFIED IN THEETENDER AS Bid Security/EMD. The bid security/EMD is required to protectthe Owner against the risk of Bidder’s conduct, which would warrant the security’s forfeiture.

A) VALIDITY OF EMD

EMD shall be accepted in the form of demand draft, pay order, banker’s

cheque (in favour of Hindustan petroleum Corporation Ltd, payable atMUMBAI, issued by any scheduled bank other than cooperative bank) or





HPCL: MPSPL

Page 3 of 10

Irrevocable Bank Guarantee issued by any scheduled bank (other thancooperative bank). Amount of EMD is mentioned in the tender . In case EMD issubmitted in form of Bank Guarantee, it should be made on non-judicialstamp paper of appropriate value (denomination) and should be valid for SIX

(6) months from due date / extended due date of the tender . Cheque / FDR or

EMD in any other form shall be treated as offer without EMD and shall notbe acceptable. Public Sector Enterprises (Declaration required) and Unitsregistered with NSIC (Copy of valid registration certificate) are exemptedfrom submission of EMD. EMD (original instrument: DD/Pay order/Banker’s Cheque OR Bank Guarantee) should be kept in separate envelope(superscribed with tender number, job & due date) and should be depositedby tender due date and time, in the tender box provided in the office of

CHIEF MANAGER-OPERATIONS, MPSPL Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited,Mumbai Pune Solapur Pipeline,HPCL Fuel Refinery,B.D. Patil Marg, Chembur, Mumbai – 400 074Phone Direct no.:022- 25072716;Thru' Refinery Extension: 25076906;Fax: 25540305.

In case the EMD (original instrument) is not deposited in the tender box (asmentioned above) by tender due date and time, the offer of bidder shall berejected.

Public Sector Enterprises and Units registered with NSIC may also send thehard copy of EMD exemption document by post to Chief Manager -Procurement (P&P) at the address mentioned above.HPCL shall not be responsible for any postal delays or non-receipt of EMDby tender due date and time, reasons whatsoever.While submitting the bid on-line, bidders would be required to upload thescanned copy of EMD instrument (DD / pay order / banker’s cheque orbank guarantee) OR EMD exemption document ( self declaration in case ofPublic Sector Enterprises OR copy of valid registration certificate in case ofunits registered with NSIC) at the place provided for the same.Bidders are requested to advise their BANKS not to post Bank Guarantee/or

any other EMD/Bid security document directly to HPCL , as the BidSecurity/EMD is to be submitted as detailed above.Offer received without requisite EMD as explained above shall be rejected.

B) REFUND OF EMDi) EMD of un-successful bidder(s) will be refunded immediately uponcompletion of Price evaluation by means of A/c Payee Cheques, or byreturning the original BG.

ii) EMD of successful bidder(s) shall be refunded on submission of either the

Security Deposit or the Performance Bank Guarantee as per terms of thetender.



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 4 of 10

16) VALIDITY OF OFFER

Bid submitted by Bidder shall remain valid for a minimum period of 90 days from the date of submission of Bids. Bidders shall not be entitled during this

period of 90 days, without the consent in writing of the Owner, to revoke orcancel their Bid or to vary the Bid given or any term thereof. In case ofBidders revoking or canceling their Bid or varying any of the terms in regardthereof without the consent of Owner in writing, Owner shall reject suchOffers and forfeit Earnest Money paid by them along with their offers.

17) Bidders are requested to quote unit rates (per unit quantity) in the on-lineprice bid only (no separate file is to be uploaded for price bid).

18) Please do not quote / mention rates anywhere else in the tender other thanon-line price bid. In case bidders quote rates at any other place (other thanonline price bid), THE OFFER OF PARTY SHALL BE REJECTED.

19) Service Tax:

Vendor to indicate his entity status (“Corporate Entity- Public Limited/ Private Limited” OR “Non Body Corporate- Individuals/ HinduUndivided Family/ Partnership Firms/ Association of Persons: AOP”)under unpriced bid of the tender. This will be taken into account fordetermining share of HPCL for payment of service tax under theReverse Charge Mechanism. Reverse charges on Service tax is

applicable to this tender for non-body corporate.

Bidders has to quote the Service Tax in % (Percentage) as applicablefor their respective firms as per the latest Service Tax Rules, sincedifferent percentage of Service Tax applicable for different type offirms, companies, partnerships, individuals etc.

Vendor to indicate his liability of service Tax if any on the above jobseparately, as per amended Service Tax provisions w.e.f 1-7-2012.Tax liability of HPCL as per reverse Charge mechanism whereverapplicable will be loaded in the evaluation.

In case if the entity is not liable to pay service tax as per service taxlaws, the same shall be mentioned separately in the place provided.Vendor should quote his applicable service tax rate if any separatelyand not as inclusive. In case if the vendor quotes the rate “Inclusive ofService Tax” it would be considered as if the vendor has included hisliability alone in the rate. Accordingly HPCL’s liability would be loadedfor evaluation purposes.

Bidders should only quote unit basic rate in the online priced bid format.

However, all taxes and duties as applicable for the tender shall be quoted inthe tax section online by the bidders. In case bidders do not quote any tax



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 5 of 10

component/ charges or mention the same as “0”, in online Tax sheet/section, itwill be considered that all the taxes/charges are included in rates quoted bythe bidder and the same shall be binding to the bidder.

Consideration of input service tax for tender Evaluation

Reverse Charge in General:

a) In respect of the Services covered by this tender, where the vendor isIndividual /HUF/Firm/AOP, the service tax liability will be dischargedby Vendor and HPCL in the ratio of 50% and 50% respectively. Hencevendor should mention his entity status along with necessary proofsupporting the same.

b) Vendor should quote his applicable service tax rate if any separately

and not as inclusive.

c) For Individual /HUF/Firm/AOP Vendor: Vendor should indicateHPCL’s service tax portion in his bill, as payable by the recipient(HPCL), however the same will not be added in bill amount. In case ifthe vendor quotes the rate “Inclusive of Taxes” it would be consideredas if the vendor has included his liability as well as HPCL’s liabilitytowards reverse charges on service tax in their quoted rate. If you arequoting service tax separately, please mention whether it is HPCLliability or your liability towards reverse charges on service tax. If youare not mentioning HPCL liability same will be loaded to your quotefor evaluation of lowest bidder. (For example if service tax quoted byyou is X%, then you should mention whether it is your portion only or itis full Service tax considering your portion and HPCL portion. If it isyour portion only, then additional Y% will be loaded to your bid, as perprevailing service tax liability on HPCL In case you have mentioned as,X% is considering full service tax of HPCL portion and vendor’s portionthen no commercial loading will be done.

Specific clause for Works Contract Service.

d) Wherever tender is in the nature of Original works, where compositevalue is mentioned for material and labour, service value shall be @40% of the gross value of the contract for the purpose of dischargingliability as stated in clause a) above. In this case all free issuematerials (if mentioned in tender doc) supplied by HPCL to the vendorshall also be added to the gross value for the purpose of determiningservice value.

e) If bidder can clearly identify the service value portion of the tenderthen service tax shall be @ 14% on the service value. Bidders shouldquote service tax @ 14% only against the pure labour/service items.



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 6 of 10

All free materials supplied by HPCL to the vendor shall also be added to thegross value for the purpose of determining Service Value.

20) The Owner may, at its discretion, on giving reasonable notice online /

(intimation may be published in newspapers), extend the bid due date, inwhich case all rights and obligations of the Owner and the Bidders,previously subject to the bid due date, shall thereafter be subject to the newbid due date as extended.

21) Please note that queries related to scope of job, tender specifications,terms & conditions etc should be submitted on –line only (by logging in athttp://etender.hpcl.co.in) by the query end date / time specified in the onlinetender . The reply of queries sent by bidders/ messages issued by HPCLpertaining to tender shall be available on tender message borad. HPCL, at itssole discretion, may not entertain the queries sent by post / fax/ email orthrough any other mode of communication.

22) BID CLARIFICATIONS/AMENDMENTS BY HPCL:- HPCL may issueclarifications / amendments in the form of online addendum / corrigendumand on Message Board at https://etender.hpcl.co.in during the biddingperiod and may also issue amendments subsequent to receiving the bids.Bidders shall consider the addendum/corrigendum/Messages on MessageBoard while quoting for the tender. Bidders shall examine the BiddingDocument thoroughly and submit to HPCL any apparent conflict,discrepancy or error. HPCL shall issue appropriate clarifications or

amendments, if required. Any failure by Bidder to comply with the aforesaidshall not excuse the Bidder from performing the Services in accordance withthe contract if subsequently awarded.

23) In case of any queries pertaining to this tender before tender due date,please contact the same to:

Shri Anil Kumar Kori (Sr. Purchase Officer)(Phone:- 022-25072716)

Address:-

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, Mumbai Pune Solapur Pipeline,HPCL Fuel Refinery, B.D. Patil Marg, Mahul, Mumbai – 400 074,Fax-25540305

24) Bidders are advised to refrain from contacting by any means HPCLand/or their employees / representatives on their own, on matters related toBids under consideration. HPCL, if necessary, will obtain clarification on theBid by requesting for such information/clarifications from any or allBidders, either in writing or through personnel contact. Bidders will not bepermitted to change the substance of Bids after opening of Bids.



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 7 of 10

25) HPCL may solicit the bidder’s consent to an extension of the period ofvalidity of offer. The request and the response there to shall be made inwriting. If the bidders agree to the extension request, the validity of BankGuarantee towards Earnest money shall also be suitably extended. Biddersmay refuse the request without forfeiting his EMD. However, bidders

agreeing to the request for extension of validity of offer will neither bepermitted to revise the price nor to modify the offer.

26) Bidders shall examine the Bidding Document thoroughly and submit toHPCL any apparent conflict, discrepancy or error. HPCL shall issueappropriate clarifications or amendments, if required. Any failure by Bidderto comply with the aforesaid shall not excuse the Bidder from performingthe Services in accordance with the contract if subsequently awarded.

27) CONFIDENTIALITY OF DOCUMENTS

Bidder shall treat the Bidding Document and contents therein as privateand confidential and shall not use the Bidding Document for any otherpurposes.

28) APPLICABLE LANGUAGE

The bid prepared by the bidder, all correspondences and documents relatedto this bid shall be written in English language only. For document

submitted in any other language, an English translation shall also besubmitted, in which case, for the purpose of interpretation of the bid, theEnglish translation shall govern.

29) CAUTION AND DISCLAIMER

Transfer of Bid document by the bidder is not permitted.

Bidder shall make his own interpretation of any and all information providedin the Bidding Document. HPCL shall not be responsible for the accuracy orcompleteness of such information and/or interpretation.

Although certain information’s are provided in the Bidding Document,however, bidder shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying allnecessary data and information as required by him.

30) EVALUATION OF UNPRICED BIDS

The bids shall be evaluated on the basis of the following criteria :

30.1 RECEIPT OF BID



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 8 of 10

Bids received late i.e. after due date and time, due to any reason (s)whatsoever shall be rejected.

30.2 DEVIATIONS TO TENDER REQUIREMENTS

The bidders are required to submit offers strictly as per the terms andconditions/specifications given in the Bidding Document and not tostipulate any deviations. The offer of bidders stipulating deviations are liablefor rejection. In case Bidders wish to stipulate any deviation to BiddingDocument requirements, they shall indicate (upload at eproc site ) the sameas per the format enclosed in the Bidding Document. Bidder shall notethat clarification/queries/deviations mentioned elsewhere in the offershall not be given any cognizance. However HPCL reserves their right toreject bids containing deviations to any of the Bidding Document

stipulations.

31) UNSOLICITED POST BID MODIFICATION

Bidders are advised to quote strictly as per terms and conditions of theBidding Document and not to stipulate any deviation / exceptions. Once,quoted the bidders shall not make any subsequent price changes, whetherresulting or arising out of any technical / commercial clarificationssought/allowed on any deviations or exceptions mentioned in the bid unlessdiscussed and agreed by HPCL in writing.

32) DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIVENESS

i) Prior to the financial evaluation of bids, the HPCL will determine whethereach bid is substantially responsive to the requirements of the BiddingDocument.

ii) For the purpose of this Clause, a substantially responsive bid is onewhich conforms to all the terms and conditions and specifications of theBidding Document without material deviation or reservation. A materialdeviation or reservation is one which affects in any substantial way thescope, quality, or performance of the works or which limits in any

substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding Document, the HPCL’s rightsor Bidder’s obligation under the Contract and retention of which deviation orreservation would affect unfairly the competitive position of other bidderspresenting substantially responsive bids.

iii) If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the BiddingDocument, it may be rejected by the HPCL. Such rejection may be intimatedto the Bidder.

33) EVALUATION OF PRICE BIDS

33.1 The “PRICE BIDS” of only substantially responsive bidders and techno – commercially accepted shall be considered for opening.



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 9 of 10

33.2 Bidders shall quote the prices in Indian Rupees only.33.3 The quoted prices shall be checked to determine the arithmeticalcorrectness of the same.33.4 HPCL shall follow Purchase preference/ Price preference as perprevailing guidelines of Government of India.

33.5 HPCL reserves the right to delete any of the items in the Schedule ofRates at the time of placement of Fax of Intent/Purchase Order. Thedecision of HPCL shall be final and binding.

34) REBATE

No suo-moto reduction in prices quoted by bidder shall be permitted afteropening of the bid. If any bidder unilaterally reduces the prices quoted byhim in his bid after opening of bids, the bid (s) of such bidder(s) are liable to

be rejected. Such reduction shall not be considered for comparison of pricesbut shall be binding on the bidder in case he happens to be a successfulbidder for award of work.

35) Wherever possible, payment shall be tendered to the contractor inelectronic mode (e-payment) through any of the designated banks. Thecontractor will comply by furnishing full particulars of Bank account(mandate) to which the payments will be routed. Owner reserves theright to make payment in any alternate mode also.

IN CASE THE ORDER IS FINALISED ON YOU AND THE MANDATE FOR

PROCESSING E-PAYMENT HAS NOT BEEN SUBMITTED BY YOU, THEN THE PAYMENT MAY NOT BE EFFECTED TILL THE SUBMISSION OF E-MANDATE BY YOU AND UPDATION OF NECESSARY AT OUR END. ANYCONSEQUENT DELAYS IN PAYMENT WILL BE TO YOUR ACCOUNT ANDHPCL SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAME.

IN CASE THE E-MANDATE HAS BEEN SUBMITTED EARLIER THE SAMEIS NOT REQUIRED TO BE RE-SUBMITTED,

36) EVALUATED LOWEST OFFER VERY LOW COMPARED TO COSTESTIMATE/WORKABILITY ASSESMENT:-

Where the lowest bid is very low compared to the cost estimate and otherhigher bids, the Owner shall review the lowest offered bid for workability ofrates and shall ascertain whether Bidder has properly quoted with referenceto the scope. In such cases, Owner may require the lowest Bidder to producedetailed price analysis for any or all items to demonstrate the internalconsistency of these prices. After evaluation of the price analysis, Ownermay require that the amount of the performance security is increased to alevel sufficient to protect the Owner against financial loss in the event ofdefault of the successful Bidder under the contract.



HPCL: MPSPL

Page 10 of 10

37) PURCHASE ORDER (PO)

37.1 Purchase Order shall be prepared for award of works. Successfulbidder shall be intimated regarding award of works through Fax/Letter ofIntent. Until the final PO is prepared and executed, this Bidding Document

together with the annexed documents, modification, deletions agreed uponby the HPCL and Bidder’s acceptance thereof shall constitute a bindingcontract between the successful bidder and the HPCL based on termscontained in the aforesaid documents and the finally submitted andaccepted prices.

37.2 The Purchase Order shall consist of the following :

a) Original Bidding Document along with its enclosures issued.

b) Addendum/Corrigendum/Messages in Message Board to BiddingDocument issued, if any.

c) Fax/ Letter of Intent, if any.

d) The detailed Letter of Award/Acceptance along with Statement of AgreedVariations (if any) and enclosures attached therewith.

37.3 The statement of agreed variations shall be prepared based on thefinally retained deviations, if any, by the Bidder and accepted by HPCL. Allother correspondences between HPCL and the Bidder prior to issue ofFax/Letter of Intent shall be treated as Null & Void. Any deviations orstipulations made and accepted by HPCL after award of the job shall be

treated as amendments to the contract document as above.

38) Grievance Redressal Mechanism :

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) has developed a“Grievance Redressal Mechanism” to deal with references / grievances if anythat are received from parties who participated / intend to participate in theCorporation Tenders. The details of the same are available on our websitewww.hindustanpetroleum.com

http://www.hindustanpetroleum.com/





SPECIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS :TAXES ,DEVIATIONS ETC.

(1)TAXES & DUTIES:-This is vendor’s responsibility to correctly ascertain all applicable taxes &

duties (including Octroi, if applicable) for subject tender and should quoteaccordingly. The bidder shall be exclusively responsible for taxes & duties quoted in the

offer and evaluation as well as payment shall be made against the quoted taxes & duties

(including Octroi, if applicable) only.

Bidder shall not be allowed to change taxes/duties after tender due date/extended due

date without the written consent of HPCL.

(A)Variations of taxes and duties arising out of the amendments to the Central / State

enactments and introduction of new tax on finished goods, in respect of sale of goods /

services covered under this bid shall be to HPCL’s account, so long as : They relate to the period after the opening of the unprice bid, but before the

contracted completion period ( excluding permitted extensions due to delay on

account of the contractors, if any) or the actual completion period, whichever

is earlier; and The vendor furnishes documentary evidence of incurrence of such variations.(B) However, any increase in the rate of these taxes and duties beyond thecontractual delivery period shall be to Seller’s account.

(C) In case of delay in delivery/Delay in completion due to reasons attributableto bidder, any new or additional taxes or duties levied by statutory authorities duringthis period shall be borne by the Bidder.(D) Any decrease in the rate of these taxes and duties shall be passed on tothe Purchaser even after contractual delivery period.

(E) Irrespective of taxes/duties quoted by bidder in the tender, bidder shall be

fully responsible for the payment of any and all taxes, duties, octroi, rates, cess,levies and statutory payments payable under all or any of the statutes etc.(F) Towards service tax / VAT quoted, bidder would be required to submit tax

invoice (with service tax / VAT registration number) at the time of payment (in

case job is awarded to the bidder).

(G) BIDDERS TO QUOTE CONSIDERING CST/VAT/SALESTAX APPLICABLE AT FULL

RATES SINCE FOR THIS TENDER HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION

LIMITED SHALL NOT ISSUE “C” FORM.

(H) Until & unless specified in tender, Road Permit shall not be issued by HPCL

2) DEVIATIONS TO TENDER TERMS:-

i) Bidders are requested to accept tender terms/conditions in totality and should

avoid deviations.

ii) In case deviations to tender terms/conditions are unavoidable, the same should

be mentioned in ONLINE DEVIATION SHEET. Deviations mentioned

elsewhere shall not be considered by HPCL.

iii) In case, bidder is evaluated L1 bidder and has mentioned deviation to tender

terms not in online deviation sheet , but elsewhere and is not withdrawing

those deviations, HPCL shall forfeit the EMD (IF APPLICABLE) of the

bidder in such cases.iv) No new deviation will be received/ accepted from bidder after bid due date. Incase

bidder submits new deviation, his bid will be rejected. At the sole discretion of the



owner bidder may be given opportunity to withdraw the deviation and in case the

same is not withdrawn by the bidder, the offer of the bidder shall be rejected &

EMD/ bid security (if applicable) submitted by the bidder shall be forfeited.

3) WITHDRAWL OF BIDS BY BIDDER:-No bid shall be allowed to be withdrawn in the interval between the deadline forsubmission of bids and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the

Bidder. Withdrawal of a bid during this interval shall result in the forfeiture of

Bidder’s bid security.

4) UNSOLICITED POST BID MODIFICATION(a) After tender submission due date & time/ extended due date & time (as the case may be) the

bidders shall not make any subsequent price changes, whether resulting or arising out of any

technical / commercial clarifications sought/allowed on any deviations or exceptions

mentioned in the bid unless discussed and agreed by HPCL in writing.

(b) To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of Unpriced bids, the Owner/Owner’s

Consultant may, at its discretion, ask the Bidder clarifications on writing. Bidder(s) to note that

Price changes against Technical/Commercial clarification, if any, in line with terms &

conditions of enquiry documents are not allowed. In case, any bidder gives revised prices/price

implications against such clarification, it would amount to unsolicited bid post bid

modification by the bidder and action shall be taken by the owner as per clause

“MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS” mentioned above

5) REBATENo suo-moto reduction in prices quoted by bidder shall be permitted after tender

submission due date & time/ extended due date & time. If any bidder unilaterally reduces

the prices quoted by him in his bid after opening of bids, the bid (s) of such bidder(s) will

be liable to be rejected. Such reduction shall not be considered for comparison of prices but

shall be binding on the bidder in case he happens to be a successful bidder for award of

work.

6) EMD FORFEITURE (In case EMD is applicable) AND FURTHER ACTION

AS PER CORPORATION’S (HPCL) POLICY:-

EMD SUBMITTED BY THE BIDDER FOR SUBJECT TENDER SHALL BEFORFEITED IN FOLLOWING CASES:-(i) WITHDRAWL OF BID IN INTERVAL BETWEEN THE DEADLINE FOR

SUBMISSION OF BIDS AND THE EXPIRATION OF THE PERIOD OF

BID VALIDITY SPECIFIED BY THE BIDDER. (To be read in conjunction

with clause 3 )

(ii) UNSOLICITED POST BID MODIFICATION. (To be read in conjunctionwith clause 4)

(iii) PRICE CHANGES AGAINST TECHNICAL/COMMERCIAL

CLARIFICATION, IF ANY, IN LINE WITH TERMS & CONDITIONS OF

ENQUIRY DOCUMENTS ARE NOT ALLOWED. (To be read in

conjunction with clause 4 (b))

(iv) BACKING OUT FROM SUBMITTED OFFER OR WITHDRAWINGSUBMITTED OFFER ON ACCOUNT OF THE OFFER BEING

UNWORKABLE.

(v) CONDITIONAL PRICE BIDS.

(vi) NON –WITHDRAWL (BY EVALUATED LOWEST BIDDER) OF

DEVIATIONS MENTIONED ELSEWHERE OTHER THAN DEVATION

SHEET. (To be read in conjunction with clause 2 (iii) )

(vii) ANY NEW DEVIATIONS AFTER TENDER DUE DATE. (To be read in

conjunction with clause 2 (iv))

(viii) UNSOLICITED POST BID REVISION IN TAXES & DUTIES.



(ix) VIOLATION OF INTEGRITY PACT (IF APPLICABLE).

DISCLAIMER:- Besides above, HPCL reserves the right to forfeit the EMD of bidder

(In case EMD is applicable) and take further action as per corporation’s(HPCL’s)policy in case bidder deviates from his submitted offer/adopt unfair practice.

7) A firm which is not a PSU or an associate or a joint venture of a PSU and

which has been engaged to provide goods or works for a project and any of itsaffiliates will be disqualified from providing consultancy services for the same

project. Conversely, a firm which is not a PSU or an associate or a joint

venture of a PSU, hired to provide consultancy services for the preparation or

implementation of a project, and any of its affiliates, will be disqualified from

subsequently providing goods or works or services related to the initial

assignment for the same project.

Consultants or any of their affiliates who are not PSUs or an associate or a joint

venture of a PSU will not be hired for any assignment, which by its nature, may

be in conflict with another assignment of the consultants .

The above clauses, however, will not be applicable to a firm engaged in

preparation of Detailed Feasibility Report (DFR) but will apply to an EPC(Engineering Procurement Contractor) or PMC (Project Management

Consultant)

If a contractor submits his bid, qualifies and does not get the contract because of

his being not the lowest, he will be prohibited from working as a subcontractor

for the contractor who is executing the contract.8) HPCL reserves the right to accept any tender in whole or in part or reject any or all

tenders without assigning any reason. HPCL reserves right to accept any or more

tenders in part. Decision of HPCL in this regard shall be final and binding on the

bidder.

9) HPCL shall follow Purchase Preference / Price Preference as per prevailing

guidelines of Government of India.

10) In case any deviations sought by bidder is accepted by HPCL, HPCL reservesthe right to suitably load the bidder for evaluation purpose only.

11) Grievance Redressal Mechanism :

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) has developed a “Grievance

Redressal Mechanism” to deal with references / grievances if any that are received

from parties who participated / intend to participate in the Corporation Tenders. The

details of the same are available on our website www.hindustanpetroleum.com.12) Wherever possible, payment shall be tendered to the contractor in electronic mode

(epayment)

through any of the designated banks. The contractor will comply by

furnishing full particulars of Bank account (mandate) to which the payments will be

routed. Owner reserves the right to make payment in any alternate mode also.

IN CASE THE ORDER IS FINALISED ON YOU AND THE MANDATE FORPROCESSING E-PAYMENT HAS NOT BEEN SUBMITTED BY YOU, THEN THE

PAYMENT MAY NOT BE EFFECTED TILL THE SUBMISSION OF E-MANDATE BY

YOU AND UPDATION OF NECESSARY AT OUR END. ANY CONSEQUENT

DELAYS IN PAYMENT WILL BE TO YOUR ACCOUNT AND HPCL SHALL NOT

BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAME.

IN CASE THE E-MANDATE HAS BEEN SUBMITTED EARLIER THE SAME IS

NOT REQUIRED TO BE RE-SUBMITTED.



Payment Office:- Finance department , MPSPL, HP Fuel Refinery, B.D.Patil Marg,

Cembur,Mumbai-400074.



GTC OF WORKS CONTRACT

Page 1

GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF WORKS CONTRACT

1 PRELIMINARY

1.1 This is a Contract for execution of job as defined in tender document at the specified

Location

1.2 The tenderer for the abovementioned item of work is the company/ proprietary concern/individual (as per details & address mentioned in the unpriced bid) and undersigned(digitally) is authorized to submit the bid on behalf of tenderer.

1.3 The terms and conditions mentioned hereunder are the terms and conditions of theContract for the execution of the work mentioned under item 1.1 above.

1.4 It is the clear understanding between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited and thetenderer that in case the bid of tenderer is accepted by Hindustan Petroleum CorporationLimited and an intimation to that effect is so issued and also a Procurement Order is on the

tenderer this document shall form part of the Contract between the parties and terms andconditions hereunder would govern the parties interest.

1.5 Interpretation of Contract Documents: All documents forming part of the Contract are tobe taken mutually explanatory. Should there be any discrepancy, inconsistency, error oromission in the contract, the decision of the Owner/Engineerin- Charge/Site-in-Charge shallbe the final and the contractor shall abide by the decision. The decision shall not bearbitrable. Works shown upon the drawings but not mentioned in the specification ordescribed in the specifications without being shown on the drawings shall nevertheless bedeemed to be included in the same manner as if they are shown in the drawings anddescribed in the specifications.

1.6 Special conditions of Contract : The special conditions of contract, if any provided andwhenever and wherever referred to shall be read in conjunction with General Terms andConditions of contract, specifications, drawings, and any other documents forming part ofthis contract wherever the context so requires. Notwithstanding the subdivision of thedocuments into separate sections, parts volumes, every section, part or volume shall bedeemed to be supplementary or complementary to each other and shall be read in whole. Incase of any misunderstanding arising the same shall be referred to decision of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and their decision shall be final and binding and thedecision shall not be arbitrable.

It is the clear understanding that wherever it is mentioned that the Contractor shall

do/perform a work and/or provide facilities for the performance of the work, the doing or theperformance or the providing of the facilities is at the cost and expenses of the Contractornot liable to be paid or reimbursed by the Owner.

2. DEFINITIONS

In this contract unless otherwise specifically provided or defined and unless a contraryintention appears from the contract the following words and expressions are used in thefollowing meanings;

2.1 The term "Agreement" wherever appearing in this document shall be read as "Contract".

2.2 The "Authority" for the purpose of this Contract shall be the Chairman and ManagingDirector or any other person so appointed or authorised.




Page 2

2.3 The "Chairman and Managing Director " shall mean the Chairman and ManagingDirector of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED or any person soappointed, nominated or designated and holding the office of Chairman & ManagingDirector.

2.4 The "Change Order " means an order given in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or byOwner to effect additions to or deletion from or alterations into the Work.

2.5 The "Construction Equipment" means all appliances and equipment of whatsoevernature for the use in or for the execution, completion, operation or maintenance of the workexcept those intended to form part of the Permanent Work.

2.6 The "Contract" between the Owner and the Contractor shall mean and include alldocuments like enquiry, tender submitted by the contractor and the procurement orderissued by the owner and other documents connected with the issue of the procurementorder and orders, instruction, drawings, change orders, directions issued by theOwner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the execution, completion and commissioning

of the works and the period of contract mentioned in the Contract including such periods oftime extensions as may be granted by the owner at the request of the contractor and suchperiod of time for which the work is continued by the contractor for purposes of completion ofthe work.

2.7 "The Contractor " means the person or the persons, firm or Company whose tender hasbeen accepted by the Owner and includes the Contractor's legal heirs, representative,successor(s) and permitted assignees.

2.8 The "Drawings" shall include maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with anymodifications approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and such other drawings asmay, from time to time, be furnished or approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.9 The "Engineer-in-Charge or Site-in-Charge" shall mean the person appointed ordesignated as such by the Owner and shall include those who are expressly authorised bythe owner to act for and on its behalf.

2.10 "The Owner " means the HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITEDincorporated in India having its Registered office at PETROLEUM HOUSE, 17, JAMSHEDJITATA ROAD, BOMBAY - 400020 and Marketing office at the address mentioned for thispurpose in the tender header or their successors or assignees.

2.11 The "Permanent Work" means and includes works which form a part of the work to behanded over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of the contract.

2.12 The "Project Manager " shall mean the Project Manager of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUMCORPORATION LIMITED, or any person so appointed, nominated or designated.

2.13 The "Site" means the land on which the work is to be executed or carried out and suchother place(s) for purpose of performing the Contract.

2.14 The "Specifications" shall mean the various technical and other specificationsattached and referred to in the tender documents. It shall also include the latest editions,including all addenda/corrigenda or relevant Indian Standard Specifications and Bureau OfIndian Standards.




Page 3

2.15 The "Sub-Contractor" means any person or firm or Company (other than theContractor) to whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor with the priorwritten consent of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge and their legal heirs,representatives, successors and permitted assignees of such person, firm or Company.

2.16 The "Temporary Work" means and includes all such works which are a part of thecontract for execution of the permanent work but does not form part of the permanent workconfirming to practices, procedures applicable rules and regulations relevant in that behalf.

2.17 The "Tender" means the document submitted by a person or authority for carrying outthe work and the Tenderer means a person or authority who submits the tender offering tocarry out the work as per the terms and conditions.

2.18 The "Work" shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract orpart thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or substitutedworks as maybe required for the purposes of completion of the work contemplated under theContract.

3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER

3.1 Before submitting the Tender, the Tenderer shall at their own cost and expenses visit thesite, examine and satisfy as to the nature of the existing roads, means of communications,the character of the soil, state of land and of the excavations, the correct dimensions of thework facilities for procuring various construction and other material and their availability, andshall obtain information on all matters and conditions as they may feel necessary for theexecution of the works as intended by the Owners and shall also satisfy of the availability ofsuitable water for construction of civil works and for drinking purpose and power required forfabrication work etc. Tenderer, whose tender may be accepted and with whom the Contractis entered into shall not be eligible and be able to make any claim on any of the said counts

in what so ever manner for what so ever reasons at any point of time and such a claim shallnot be raised as a dispute and shall not be arbitrable.

A pre-bid meeting may be held as per the schedule mentioned in the tender.

3.2 The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied fully before tendering as to thecorrectness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices quoted inthe schedule of quantities which rates and prices shall except as otherwise provided coverall his obligations under the contract.

3.3 It must be clearly understood that the whole of the conditions and specifications areintended to be strictly enforced and that no work will be considered as extra work and

allowed and paid for unless they are clearly outside the scope, spirit, meaning of theContract and intent of the Owner and have been so ordered in writing by Owner and/orEngineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge, whose decision shall be final and binding.

3.4 Before filling the Tender the Contractor will check and satisfy all drawings and materialsto be procured and the schedule of quantities by obtaining clarification from the Owner on allthe items as may be desired by the Tenderer. No claim for any alleged loss or compensationwill be entertained on this account, after submission of Tender by the Tenderer/Contractorand such a claim shall not be arbitrable.

3.5 Unless specifically provided for in the tender documents or any SpecialConditions, no escalation in the Tender rates or prices quoted will be permittedthroughout the period of contract or the period of actual completion of the job




Page 4

whichever is later on account of any variation in prices of materials or cost of labouror due to any other reasons. Claims on account of escalation shall not be arbitrable.

3.6 The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of ratesof the contract will be applicable for variations upto plus or minus 25% of the contract value.No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such variations in the contract value,including variations of individual quantities, addition of new items, alterations,additions/deletions or substitutions of items, as mentioned above. Quantities etc. mentionedand accepted in the joint measurement sheets shall alone be final and binding on theparties.

3.7 Owner reserve their right to award the contract to any tenderer and their decision in thisregard shall be final. They also reserve their right to reject any or all tenders received. Nodisputes could be raised by any tenderer(s) whose tender has been rejected.

3.8 The Rates quoted by the Tenderer shall include Costs and expenses on all counts viz.cost of materials, transportation of machine(s), tools, equipments, labour, power,

Administration charges, price escalations, profits, etc. etc. except to the extent of the cost ofmaterial(s), if any, agreed to be supplied by Owner and mentioned specifically in that regardin condition of Contract, in which case, the cost of such material if taken for preparation ofthe Contractor's Bill(s) shall be deducted before making payment of the Bill(s) of theContractor. The description given in the schedule of quantities shall unless otherwise statedbe held to include wastage on materials, carriage and cartage, carrying in and return ofempties, hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other expenses necessary inand for the full and complete execution and completion of works and in accordance withgood practice and recognised principles in that regard.

3.9 Employees of the State and Central Govt. and employees of the Public SectorUndertakings, including retired employees are covered under their respective service

conditions/rules in regard to their submitting the tender. All such persons should ensurecompliance to the respective/applicable conditions, rules etc. etc. Any person not complyingwith those rules etc. but submitting the tender in violation of such rules, after being sonoticed shall be liable for the forfeiture of the Earnest Money Deposit made with the tender,termination of Contract and sufferance on account of forfeiture of Security Deposit andsufferance of damages arising as a result of termination of Contract.

3.10 In consideration for having a chance to be considered for entering into a contractwith the Owner, the Tenderer agrees that the Tender submitted by him shall remainvalid for the period prescribed in the tender conditions, from the date of opening ofthe tender. The Tenderer shall not be entitled during the said validity period, to revokeor cancel the tender without the consent in writing from the Owner.

In case the tenderer revokes or cancels the tender or varies any of terms of the tenderwithout the Consent of the Owner, in writing, the Tenderer forfeits the right to the refund ofthe Earnest Money paid along with the tender.

3.11 The prices quoted by the Tenderer shall be firm during the validity period of thebid and Tenderer agrees to keep the bid alive and valid during the said period. TheTenderers shall particularly take note of this factor before submitting their tender(s).

3.12 The works shall be carried out strictly as per approved specifications. Deviations, if any,shall have to be authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing prior toimplementing deviations. The price benefit, if any, arising out of the accepted deviation shallbe passed on to the Owner. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final in this matter.




Page 5

3.13 The contractor shall make all arrangements at his own cost to transport the requiredmaterials outside and inside the working places and leaving the premises in a neat and tidycondition after completion of the job to the satisfaction of Owner. All materials except thoseagreed to be supplied by the Owner shall be supplied by the contractor at his own cost andthe rates quoted by the Contractor should be inclusive of all royalties, rents, taxes, duties,octroi, statutory levies, if any, etc. etc.

3.14 The Contractor shall not carry on any work other than the work under this Contractwithin the Owner’s premises without prior permission in writing from the Engineer -in-Charge/Site-in-charge.

3.15 The Contractor shall be bound to follow and ensure compliance to all the safety andsecurity regulations and other statutory rules applicable to the area. In the event of anydamage or loss or sufferance caused due to non-observance of such rules and regulations,the contractor shall be solely responsible for the same and shall keep the Owner indemnifiedagainst all such losses and claims arising from the same.

3.16 At any time after acceptance of tender, the Owner reserves the right to add, amend ordelete any work item, the bill of quantities at a later date or reduce the scope of work in theoverall interest of the work by prior discussion and intimation to the Contractor. The decisionof Owner, with reasons recorded therefor, shall be final and binding on both the Owner andthe Contractor. The Contractor shall not have right to claim compensation or damage etc. inthat regard. The Owner reserves the right to split the work under this contract between twoor more contractors without assigning any reasons.

3.17 Contractor shall not be entitled to sublet, sub contract or assign, the work under thisContract without the prior consent of the Owner obtained in writing.

3.18 All signatures in tender document shall be dated as well as all the pages of all sectionsof the tender documents shall be initialled at the lower position and signed, whereverrequired in the tender papers by the Tenderer or by a person holding Power of Attorneyauthorising him to sign on behalf of the tenderer before submission of tender.

3.19 The tender should be quoted in English, both in figures as well as in words. The ratesand amounts tendered by the Tenderer in the Schedule of rates for each item and in such away that insertion is not possible. The total tendered amount should also be indicated both infigures and words with the signature of tenderer.

If some discrepancies are found between the rates given in words and figures oftheamount shown in the tender, the following procedure shall be applied :

(a) When there is a difference between the rates in figures and words, the ratewhich corresponds to the amount worked out by the tenderer shall be taken ascorrect.

(b) When the rate quoted by the tenderer in figures and words tallies but theamount is incorrect, the rate quoted by the tenderer shall be taken as correct.

(c) When it is not possible to ascertain the correct rate in the manner prescribedabove the rate as quoted in words shall be adopted.

3.20 All corrections and alterations in the entries of tender paper will be signed in full by thetenderer with date. No erasures or over writings are permissible.




Page 6

3.21 Transfer of tender document by one intending tenderer to the another one is notpermissible. The tenderer on whose name the tender has been sent only can quote.

3.22 The Tender submitted by a tenderer if found to be incomplete in any or all manner isliable to be rejected. The decision of the Owner in this regard is final and binding.

4. DEPOSITS

a) EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)

The tenderer will be required to pay a sum as specified in the covering letter, as earnestmoney deposit along with the tender either thru a crossed demand draft or a non-revokableBank Guarantee in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, from any ScheduledBank (other than a Co-Operative Bank) payable at Mumbai in favour of Hindustan PetroleumCorporation Limited, Mumbai in the proforma enclosed. The earnest money deposit will berefunded after finalisation of the contract.

Note: Public sector enterprises and small scale units registered with National Small ScaleIndustries are exempted from payment of Earnest Money Deposit. Small scale unitsregistered with National Small Scale Industries should enclose a photocopy of theirregistration certificate with their quotation to make their quotation eligible for consideration.The Registration Certificate should remain valid during the period of the contract that may beentered into with such successful bidder. Such tenderers should ensure validity of theRegistration Certificate for the purpose.

b) SECURITY DEPOSIT:

The tenderer, with whom the contract is decided to be entered into and intimation is so givenwill have to make a security deposit of one percent (1%) of the total contract value in the

form of account payee crossed demand draft drawn in favour of the Owner, within 15 daysfrom the date of intimation of acceptance of their tender, failing which the Owner reservesthe right to cancel the Contract and forfeit the EMD.

1% of PO/Contract value as Security deposit will be acceptable in the form of Demanddraft upto r50,000/- and in the form of Demand draft / Bank guarantee beyond r

50,000/-.

Composite Performance Bank Guarantee (CPBG) for 10% of PO value towardsPerformance Bank Guarantee inclusive of Security Deposit shall be accepted (in lieuof deduction of retention money); such CPBG shall be valid upto a period of 3 monthsbeyond the expiry of defect liability period.

Demand Draft should be drawn on Scheduled Banks, other than co-operative bank.

5. EXECUTION OF WORK

All the works shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the contractdocuments and with such explanatory details, drawings, specifications and instructions asmay be furnished from time to time to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge, whether mentioned in the Contract or not. The Contractor shall be responsible forensuring that works throughout are executed in the most proper and workman- like mannerwith the quality of material and workmanship in strict accordance with the specifications andto the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge.




Page 7

The completion of work may entail working in monsoon also. The contractor must maintainthe necessary work force as may be required during monsoon and plan to execute the job insuch a way the entire project is completed within the contracted time schedule. No extracharges shall be payable for such work during monsoon. It shall be the responsibility of thecontractor to keep the construction work site free from water during and off the monsoonperiod at his own cost and expenses.

For working on Sundays/Holidays, the contractor shall obtain the necessary permission fromEngineer Incharge/Site Incharge in advance. The contractor shall be permitted to workbeyond the normal hours with prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge/Site-In-Charge and thecontractors quoted rate is inclusive of all such extended hours of working and no extraamount shall be payable by the owner on this account.

5.a. SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND SITE INSTRUCTIONS

5.a.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the fourcorners of the work site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set out the works

and shall provide an efficient staff for the purpose and shall be solely responsible for theaccuracy of such setting out.

5.a.2. The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of allnecessary stakes, templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take allnecessary precautions to prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible forconsequences of such removal or disturbance should the same take place and for theirefficient and timely reinstatement. The Contractor shall also be responsible for themaintenance of all existing survey marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by theContractor. The work shall be set out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The approval thereof or joining in setting out the work shall not relieve theContractor of his responsibility.

5.a.3. Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide allnecessary reference and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags ranging rods, strings and othermaterials for proper layout of the work in accordance with the scheme, for bearing marksacceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The Centre longitudinal or face linesand cross lines shall be marked by means of small masonary pillars. Each pillar shall havedistinct marks at the centre to enable theodolite to be set over it. No work shall be starteduntil all these points are checked and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge inwriting. But such approval shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities. TheContractor shall also provide all labour, materials and other facilities, as necessary, for theproper checking of layout and inspection of the points during construction.

5.a.4. Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under constructionshould be protected and fenced by the Contractor.

5.a.5. On completion of works, the contractor shall submit the geodetic documents accordingto which the work was carried out.

5.a.6. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall communicate or confirm his instructionsto the contractor in respect of the executions of work in a "work site order book" maintainedin the office having duplicate sheet and the authorised representative of the contractor shallconfirm receipt of such instructions by signing the relevant entries in the book.

5.a.7. All instructions issued by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be in writing.The Contractor shall be liable to carry out the instructions without fail.




Page 8

5.a.8. If the Contractor after receipt of written instruction from the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge requiring compliance within seven days fails to comply with such drawings or'instructions' or both as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may issue, owner mayemploy and pay other persons to execute any such work whatsoever that may be necessaryto give effect to such drawings or `instructions' and all cost and expenses incurred inconnection therewith as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall be borneby the contractor or may be deducted from amounts due or that may become due to thecontractor under the contract or may be recovered as a debt.

5.a.9. The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal andvertical alignment, the levels and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectifyeffectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out by theContractor, at his own cost.

5.a.10. In case any doubts arise in the mind of the Contractor in regard to any expressions,interpretations, statements, calculations of quantities, supply of material rates, etc. etc., the

contractor shall refer the same to the Site-in-Charge/ Engineer-in-Charge for his clarification,instructions, guidance or clearing of doubts. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be final and the contractor shall be bound by such a decision.

5.a.11."The Contractor shall take adequate precautions, to ensure that his operations do notcreate nuisance or misuse of the work space that shall cause unnecessary disturbance orinconvenience to others at the work site".

5.a.12. "All fossils, coins articles of value of antiquity and structure or other remains ofgeological or archaeological discovered on the site of works shall be declared to be theproperty of the Owner and Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent hisworkmen or any other persons from removing or damaging any such articles or thing and

shall immediately inform the Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge."

5.a.13. "Contractor will be entirely and exclusively responsible to provide and maintain at hisexpenses all lights, guards, fencing, etc. when and where even necessary or/as required bythe Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the protection of works or safety and convenienceto all the members employed at the site or general public."

5.b. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

The contractor shall after paying the requisite security deposit, commence work within 15days from the date of receipt of the intimation of intent from the Owner informing that thecontract is being awarded. The date of intimation shall be the date/day for counting the

starting day/date and the ending day/date will be accordingly calculated. Penalty, if any, forthe delay in execution shall be calculated accordingly.

Contractor should prepare detailed fortnightly construction programme for approval by theEngineer-in-Charge within one month of receipt of Letter Of Intent. The work shall beexecuted strictly as per such time schedule. The period of Contract includes the timerequired for testing, rectifications, if any, re-testing and completion of work in all respects tothe entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

A Letter of Intent is an acceptance of offer by the Owner and it need not be accepted by thecontractor. But the contractor should acknowledge a receipt of the purchase order within 15days of mailing of Purchase Order and any delay in acknowledging the receipt will be abreach of contract and compensation for the loss caused by such breach will be recovered




Page 9

by the Owner by forfeiting earnest money deposit/bid bond.

5.c. SUBLETTING OF WORK

5.c.1. No part of the contract nor any share or interest thereof shall in any manner or degreebe transferred, assigned or sublet, by the Contractor, directly or indirectly to any firm orcorporation whatsoever, without the prior consent in writing of the Owner.

5.c.2. At the commencement of every month the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-incharge/Site-in-Charge list of all sub-contractors or other persons or firms engaged by theContractor.

5.c.3 The contract agreement will specify major items of supply or services for which theContractor proposes to engage sub-Contractor/sub-Vendor. The contractor may from time totime propose any addition or deletion from any such list and will submit the proposals in thisregard to the Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-in-charge for approval well in advanceso as not to impede the progress of work. Such approval of the Engineer-in-

charge/Designated officer-in-charge will not relieve the contractor from any of his obligations,duties and responsibilities under the contract.

5.c.4. Notwithstanding any sub-letting with such approval as resaid and notwithstanding thatthe Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of any sub-contract, the Contractor shallbe and shall remain solely to be responsible for the quality and proper and expeditiousexecution of the works and the performance of all the conditions of the contract in allrespects as if such subletting or sub-contracting had not taken place and as if such work hadbeen done directly by the Contractor.

5.c.5 Prior approval in writing of the Owner shall be obtained before any change is made inthe constitution of the contractor/Contracting agency otherwise contract shall be deemed to

have been allotted in contravention of clause entitled “sub-letting of works” and the sameaction may be taken and the same consequence shall ensue as provided in the clause of“subletting of works”.

5.d EXTENSION OF TIME

1) If the Contractor anticipates that he will not be able to complete the work within thecontractual delivery/ completion date (CDD), then the Contractor shall make a requestfor grant of time extension clearly specifying the reasons for which he seeksextension of time and demonstrating as to how these reasons were beyond thecontrol of the contractor or attributable to the Owner. This request should be madewell before the expiry of the Contractual Delivery/ Completion Date (CDD).

2) If such a request for extension is received with a Bank Guarantee for the full PriceReduction amount calculated on the Total Contract Value, the concerned GeneralManager of the Owner shall grant a Provisional extension of time, pending a decisionon the request.

3) The concerned General Manager of the Owner shall expeditiously decide upon therequest for time extension and decide the levy of price reduction within a maximumperiod of 6 months fom the CDD or date of receipt of the request, whichever is earlier.

4) Grant of any extension of time shall be by means of issuance of a Change Order.




Page 10

5) In order to avoid any cash crunch to the Contractor, a Bank Guarantee could beaccepted against Price Reduction, as stated above. Once a decision is taken, thePrice Reduction shall be recovered from any pending bills or by encashment of theBG. Any balance sum of Contractor or the BG (if Price Reduction is fully recoveredfrom the bills) shall be promptly refunded/returned to the Contractor.

5.e. SUSPENSION OF WORKS

5.e.1. Subject to the provisions of this contract, the contractor shall if ordered in writing bythe Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for reasons recorded suspend the works or any partthereof for such period and such time so ordered and shall not, after receiving such, proceedwith the work therein ordered to suspended until he shall have received a written order to re-start. The Contractor shall be entitled to claim extension of time for that period of time thework was ordered to be suspended. Neither the Owner nor the Contractor shall be entitled toclaim compensation or damages on account of such an extension of time.

5.e.2. In case of suspension of entire work, ordered in writing by Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-

Charge, for a period of 30 days, the Owner shall have the option to terminate the Contract asprovided under the clause for termination. The Contractor shall not be at liberty to removefrom the site of the works any plant or materials belonging to him and the Employer shallhave lien upon all such plant and materials.

5.e.3. The contractor shall, in case of suspension have the right to raise a dispute and havethe same arbitrated but however, shall not have the right to have the work stopped fromfurther progress and completion either by the owner or through other contractor appointed bythe owner.

5.f. OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK

Not withstanding anything contained elsewhere in this contract, the owner upon failure of theContractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with the provisions of thiscontract, may instead of Contract and undertaking charge of entire work, place additionallabour force, tools, equipment and materials on such parts of the work, as the Owner maydecide or engage another Contractor to carryout the balance of work. In such cases, theOwner shall have the right to deduct from the amounts payable to the Contractor thedifference in cost of such work and materials with ten percent overhead added to cover alldepartmental charges. Should the total amount thereof exceed the amount due to thecontractor, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner within 15 days of makingdemand for payment failing which the Contractor shall be liable to pay interest at 24% p.a.on such amounts till the date of payment.

5.g. INSPECTION OF WORKS

5.g.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and Officers from Central or StateGovernment will have full power and authority to inspect the works at any time wherever inprogress, either on the site or at the Contractor's premises/workshops of any person, firm orcorporation where work in connection with the contract may be in hand or where thematerials are being or are to be supplied, and the Contractor shall afford or procure for theEngineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge every facility and assistance to carryout such inspection.The Contractor shall, at all times during the usual working hours and at all other times atwhich reasonable notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or hisrepresentative to visit the works shall have been given to the Contractor, either himself bepresent to receive orders and instructions, or have a responsible agent, duly accredited in




Page 11

writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's agent shall be consideredto have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor himself. The Contractorshall give not less than seven days notice in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge before covering up or otherwise placing beyond reach of inspection andmeasurement any work in order that the same may be inspected and measured. In the eventof breach of above, the same shall be uncovered at Contractor's expense for carrying outsuch measurement and/or inspection.

5.g.2. No material shall be removed and despatched by the Contractor from the site withoutthe prior approval in writing of the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor is to provide at alltimes during the progress of the work and the maintenance period proper means of accesswith ladders, gangways, etc. and the necessary attendance to move and adapt as directedfor inspection or measurements of the works by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

5.h. SAMPLES

5.h.1. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge for approval

when requested or required adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be used in thework.

5.h.2. Samples shall be furnished by the Contractor sufficiently in advance and beforecommencement of the work so as the Owner can carry out tests and examinations thereofand approve or reject the samples for use in the works. All material samples furnished andfinally used/applied in actual work shall fully be of the same quality of the approved samples.

5.i. TESTS FOR QUAL ITY OF WORK

5.i.1. All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the contract documentsand in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site in- Charge and shall

be subjected from time to time to such tests at Contractor's cost as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the site orat all or any such places. The Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, labour andmaterials as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any workmanshipas may be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

5.i.2. All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of the work asdecided by the Engineer-in- charge/Site-in-Charge shall be carried out at the contractorscost and expenses.

5.i.3. If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials orworkmanship to be supplied by the owner, such tests shall be carried out by the Contractor

as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and expenses for such tests, if any,incurred by the contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner. The contractor should file hisclaim with the owner within 15 (fifteen) days of inspection/test and any claim made beyondthat period shall lapse and be not payable.

5.j. AL TERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS, DESIGNS AND WORKS

5.j.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall have powers to make any alterations,additions and/or substitutions to the schedule of quantities, the original specifications,drawings, designs and instructions that may become necessary or advisable or during theprogress of the work and the Contractor shall be bound to carryout such altered/extra/newitems of work in accordance with instructions which may be given to him in writing signed bythe Engineer-in-Charge/Site- in-Charge. Such alterations, omissions, additions or




Page 12

substitutions shall not invalidate the contract. The altered, additional or substituted workwhich the Contractor may be directed to carryon in the manner as part of the work shall becarried out by the Contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which he has agreedto do the work. The time for completion of such altered added and/or substituted work maybe extended for that part of the particular job. The rates for such additional altered orsubstituted work under this Clause shall, be worked out in accordance with the followingprovisions:

5.j.2. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the contractfor similar class of work, the Contractor is bound to carryout the additional, altered orsubstituted work at the same rates as are specified in the contract.

5.j.3. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically provided inthe contract for the work, the rates will be derived from the rates for similar class of work asare specified in the contract for the work. In the opinion of the Engineer in- Charge/Site-in-Charge as to whether or not the rates can be reasonably so derived from the items in thiscontract, will be final and binding on the Contractor.

5.j.4. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work cannot be determined in themanner specified above, then the Contractor shall, within seven days of the date of receipt oforder to carry out the work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site in- Charge of the rate atwhich he intends to charge for such class of work, supported by analysis of the rate or ratesclaimed and the Engineer-In-Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall determine the rates on the basisof the prevailing market rates for both material and labour plus 10% to cover overhead andprofit of labour rates and pay the Contractor accordingly. The opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge as to current market rates of materials and the quantum of labourinvolved per unit of measurement will be final and binding on the contractor.

5.j.5. In case of any item of work for which there is no specification supplied by the Owner

and is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance withIndian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not cover thesame, the work should be carried out as per standard Engineering Practice subject to theapproval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site in- Charge.

5.k. PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE

Acceptance of sections of the works for purposes of equipment erection, piping, electricalwork and similar usages by the Owner and payment for such work or parts of work shall notconstitute a waiver of any portion of this contract and shall not be construed so as to preventthe Engineer from requiring replacement of defective work that may become apparent afterthe said acceptance and also shall not absolve the Contractor of the obligations under this

contract. It is made clear that such an acceptance does not indicate or denote or establish tothe fact of execution of that work or the Contract until the work is completed in full inaccordance with the provisions of this Contract.

5.l. COMPLETION OF WORK AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

As soon as the work is completed in all respects, the contractor shall give notice of suchcompletion to the site in charge or the Owner and within thirty days of receipt of such noticethe site in charge shall inspect the work and shall furnish the contractor with a certificate ofcompletion indicating:

a) defects, if any, to be rectified by the contractorb) items, if any, for which payment shall be made in reduced rates




Page 13

c) the date of completion.

5.m. USE OF MATERIALS AND RETURN OF SURPLUS MATERIALS

5.m.1. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all of the clauses of thiscontract, where any materials for the execution of the contract are procured with theassistance of Government either by issue from Government stocks or procurement madeunder orders or permits or licences issued by Government, the contractor shall use the saidmaterials economically and solely for the purpose of the contract and shall not dispose themof without the permission of the Owner.

5.m.2. All surplus(serviceable) or unserviceable materials that may be left over after thecompletion of the contract or at its termination for any reason whatsoever, the Contractorshall deliver the said product to the Owner without any demur. The price to be paid to theContractor, if not already paid either in full or in part, however, shall not exceed the amountmentioned in the Schedule of Rates for such material and in cases where such rates are notso mentioned, shall not exceed the CPWD scheduled rates. In the event of breach of the

aforesaid condition the contractor shall become liable for contravention of the terms of theContract.

5.m.3. The surplus (serviceable) and unserviceable products shall be determined by jointmeasurement. In case where joint measurement has failed to take place, the Owner maymeasure the same and determine the quantity.

5.m.4. It is made clear that the Owner shall not be liable to take stock and keep possessionand pay for the surplus and unserviceable stocks and the Owner may direct the Contractorto take back such material brought by the Contractor and becoming surplus and which theOwner may decide to keep and not to pay for the same.

5.n. DEFECT LIABIL ITY PERIOD

The contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from the date ofcompletion of the job. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time ofcompletion of the job shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own cost. Thedecision of the Engineer In-charge/Site-In-charge/Owner shall be the final in decidingwhether the defect has to be rectified or replaced.

Equipment or spare parts replaced under warranty/guarantees shall have further warrantyfor a mutually agreed period from the date of acceptance.

The owner shall intimate the defects noticed in writing by a Registered A.D. letter or

otherwise and the contractor within 15 days of receipt of the intimation shall start therectification work and complete within the time specified by the owner failing which the ownerwill get the defects rectified by themselves or by any other contractor and the expensesincurred in getting the same done shall be paid by the Contractor under the provision of theContract.

Thus, defect liability is applicable only in case of job/works contract (civil, mechanical,electrical, maintenance etc. ) where any damage of defect may arise in future (i.e. within 12months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at the time of completion of job.




Page 14

In other words, in case of service contracts (like car hire etc.) where there is noquestion of damage or defect arising in future, the defect liability clause is notapplicable.

5.o. DAMAGE TO PROPERTY

5.o.1. Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Owner anyloss of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or beingexecuted or procured by the Owner or of other agencies within the premises of the work ofthe Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/or the negligence or willful acts oromission of the Contractor, his employees, agents, representatives or sub-contractors.

5.o.2. The Contractors shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims fordamage to Owner's property arising under or by reason of this contract.

6. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR

6.a. EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY TOWARDS WORKERS EMPLOYED BY THE

CONTRACTOR

6.a.1 The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or employingpersons for the execution of work. All persons engaged by the contractor shall be onContractor's payroll and paid by Contractor. All disputes or differences between theContractor and his/their employees shall be settled by Contractor.

6.a.2. Owner has absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of theContractor. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner against any loss or damage or liabilityarising out of or in the course of his/their employing persons or relation with his/theiremployees. The Contractor shall make regular and full payment of wages and on any

complaint by any employee of the Contractor or his subcontractor regarding non-payment ofwages, salaries or other dues, Owner reserves the right to make payments directly to suchemployees or subcontractor of the Contractor and recover the amount in full from the bills ofthe Contractor and the contractor shall not claim any compensation or reimbursementthereof. The Contractor shall comply with the Minimum Wages Act applicable to the area ofwork site with regard to payment of wages to his employees and also to employees of hissubcontractor.

6.a.3. The Contractor shall advise in writing or in such appropriate way to all of hisemployees and employees of sub-contractors and any other person engaged by him thattheir appointment/employment is not by the Owner but by the Contractor and that theirpresent appointment is only in connection with the construction contract with Owner and that

therefore, such an employment/appointment would not enable or make them eligible for anyemployment/appointment with the Owner either temporarily or/and permanent basis.

6.b. NOTICE TO LOCAL BODIES

The contractor shall comply with and give all notices required under any Governmentauthority, instruction, rule or order made under any act of parliament, state laws or anyregulations or by-laws of any local authority relating to the works.

6.c. FIRST AID AND INDUSTRIAL INJURIES

6.c.1 Contractor shall maintain first aid facility for his employees and those of his sub-contractors.




Page 15

6.c.2. Contractor shall make arrangements for ambulance service and for the treatment of alltypes of injuries. Names and telephone numbers of those providing such services shall befurnished to Owner prior to start of construction and their name board shall be prominentlydisplayed in Contractor's field office.

6.c.3. All industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to owner and a copy of contractor'sreport covering each personal injury requiring the attention of a physician shall be furnishedto the Owner.

6.d. SAFETY CODE

6.d.1. The Contractor shall at his own expenses arrange for the Safety provisions as may benecessary for the execution of the work or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge in respectof all labours directly or indirectly employed for performance of the works and shall provideall facilities in connections therewith. In case the contractor fails to make arrangements andprovide necessary facilities as aforesaid, the Owner shall be entitled to do so and recoverthe cost thereof from the Contractor.

6.d.2. From the commencement to the completion of the works, the contractor shall take fullresponsibility for the care thereof and of all the temporary works (defined as meaning alltemporary works of every kind required in or for the execution, completion or maintenance ofthe works). In case damage, loss or injury shall happen to the works or to any part thereof orto temporary works or to any cause whatsoever repair at his (Contractor's) own cost andmake good the same so that at the time of completion, the works shall be in good order andcondition and in conformity in every respect with the requirement of the contract andEngineer-in-Charge's instructions.

6.d.3. In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performanceof the Contractor's part of this agreement, the contractor shall at his own expense arrangefor all the safety provisions as per relevant Safety Codes of C.P.W.D Bureau of Indian

Standards, the Electricity Act/I.E. Rules. The Mines Act and such other Acts as applicable.

6.d.4. The Contractor shall observe and abide by all fire and safety regulations of the Owner.Before starting construction work, the Contractor shall consult with Owner's Safety Engineeror Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and must make good to the satisfaction of the Ownerany loss or damage due to fire to any portion of the work done or to be done under thisagreement or to any of the Owner's existing property.

6.d.5. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions of theContract Labour Act and shall pay rates of Wages and observe hours of work/conditions ofemployment according to the rules in force from time to time.

6.d.6. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provision includingdocumentation and submission of reports on the above to the concerned authorities andshall indemnify the Corporation from any such lapse for which the Government will be takingaction against them.

6.d.7. Owner shall on a report having been made by an inspecting Office as defined in theContract Labour Regulations have the power to deduct from the money due to theContractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss sufferedby a worker(s) by reasons of non-fulfilment of conditions of contract for the benefit of workersno-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or their wages which are not justifiedby the terms of contract or non-observance of the said contractor's labour Regulation.

6.e. INSURANCE AND LABOUR




Page 16

Contractor shall at his own expense obtain and maintain an insurance policy with aNationalised Insurance Company to the satisfaction of the Owner as provided hereunder.

6.e.1. EMPLOYEES STATE INSURANCE ACT

i. The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for thecompliance with all obligations imposed by Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, and theContractor further agrees to defend indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any liability orpenalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or local authority by reason of anyasserted violation by Contractor, or sub-contractor of the Employees' State Insurance Act,1948 and also from all claims, suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Ownerarising under, growing out of or by reason of the work provided for by this contract whetherbrought by employees of the Contractor, by third parties or by Central or State Governmentauthority or any political subdivision thereof.

ii. The Contractor agrees to file with the Employees State Insurance Corporation, theDeclaration forms and all forms which may be required in respect of the Contractor's or sub-

contractor's employee whose aggregate emuneration is within the specified limit and whoare employed in the work provided or those covered by ESI Act under any amendment to the Act from time to time.

The Contractor shall deduct and secure the agreement of the sub-contractor to deduct theemployee's contribution as per the first schedule of the Employee's State Insurance Act fromwages and affix the employee's contribution cards at wages payment intervals. TheContractor shall remit and secure the agreement of the sub-contractor to remit to the StateBank of India, Employee's State Insurance Corporation Account, the Employee's contributionas required by the Act.

ii. The Contractor agrees to maintain all records as required under the Act in respect of

employees and payments and the Contractor shall secure the agreement of the subcontractor to maintain such records. Any expenses incurred for the contributions, makingcontribution or maintaining records shall be to the Contractor's or sub-contractor's account.

iv. The Owner shall retain such sum as may be necessary from the total contract value untilthe Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contributions as required by theEmployees State Insurance Act, 1948, have been paid.

v. WORKMAN'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYEE'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Provide Insurance for all the Contractor's employees engaged in the performance of thiscontract. If any of the work is sublet, the Contractor shall ensure that the sub-contractor

provides workmen's compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance for the latter'semployees who are not covered under the Contractor's insurance.

vi. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE

Contractor shall take out an Insurance to cover all risks to Owner for each of his vehiclesplying on works of this contract and these insurances shall be valid for the total contractperiod. No extra payment will be made for this insurance. Owner shall not be liable for anydamage or loss not made good by the Insurance Company, should such damage or lossresult from unauthorised use of the vehicle. The provisions of the Motor Vehicle Act wouldapply.

vii. FIRE INSURANCE




Page 17

Contractor shall within two weeks after award of contract insure the Works, Plant andEquipment and keep them insured until the final completion of the Contract against loss ordamage by accident, fire or any other cause with an insurance company to be approved bythe Employer/Consultant in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor (name of theformer being placed first in the Policy). Such Policy shall cover the property of the Employeronly.

6.e.2. ANY OTHER INSURANCE REQUIRED UNDER LAW OR REGULATION OR BYOWNER

i. Contractor shall also provide and maintain any and all other insurance which may berequired under any law or regulations from time to time. He shall also carry and maintain anyother insurance which may be required by the Owner.

ii. The aforesaid insurance policy/policies shall provide that they shall not be cancelled till theEngineer-in-Charge has agreed to their cancellation.

iii. The Contractor shall satisfy to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge from time to timethat he has taken out all insurance policies referred to above and has paid the necessarypremium for keeping the policies alive till the expiry of the defects liability period.

iv. The contractor shall ensure that similar insurance policies are taken out by his sub-contractor (if any) and shall be responsible for any claims or losses to the Owner resultingfrom their failure to obtain adequate insurance protections in connection thereof. Thecontractor shall produce or cause to be proceed by his sub-contractor (if any) as the casemay be, the relevant policy or policies and premium receipts as and when required by theEngineer in- Charge/Site-in-Charge.

6.e.3. LABOUR AND LABOUR LAWS

i. The contractor shall at his own cost employ persons during the period of contract and thepersons so appointed shall not be construed under any circumstances to be in theemployment of the Owner.

ii. All payments shall be made by the contractor to the labour employed by him inaccordance with the various rules and regulations stated above. The contractor shall keepthe Owner indemnified from any claims whatsoever inclusive of damages/costs or otherwisearising from injuries or alleged injuries to or death of a person employed by the contractor ordamages or alleged damages to the property.

iii. No labour below the age of eighteen years shall be employed on the work. The Contractorshall not pay less than what is provided under the provisions of the contract labour(Regulations and Abolition) Act, 1970 and the rules made thereunder and as may beamended from time to time. He shall pay the required deposit under the Act appropriate tothe number of workman to be employed by him or through sub contractor and get himselfregistered under the Act. He shall produce the required Certificates to the Owner beforecommencement of the work. The Owner recognises only the Contractor and not his subcontractor under the provisions of the Act. The Contractor will have to submit daily a list ofhis workforce. He will also keep the wage register at the work site or/and produce the sameto the Owner, whenever desired. A deposit may be taken by the Owner from the Contractorto be refunded only after the Owner is satisfied that all workmen employed by the Contractor




Page 18

have been fully paid for the period of work in Owner's premises at rates equal to or betterthan wages provided for under the Minimum Wages Act. The contractor shall be responsibleand liable for any complaints that may arise in this regard and the consequences thereto.

iv. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the Employee's Provident Fund Act andthe Family Pension Act as may be applicable and as amended from time to time.

v. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the payment of Gratuity Act, 1972, asmay be applicable and as amended from time to time.

vi. IMPLEMENTATION OF APPRENTICES ACT, 1961

The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the Rulesand Orders issued thereunder from time to time. If he fails to do so, his failure will be abreach of the contract and the Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, cancel thecontract. The Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account ofany violation by him of the provision of the Act.

vii.MODEL RULES FOR LABOUR WELFARE

The Contractor shall at his own expenses comply with or cause be complied with Modelrules for Labour Welfare as appended to those conditions or rules framed by theGovernment from time to time for the protection of health and for making sanitaryarrangements for worker employed directly or indirectly on the works. In case the contractorfails to make arrangements as aforesaid the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall beentitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the contractor.

6.f. DOCUMENTS CONCERNING WORKS

6.f.1. All documents including drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducible models, plans,specifications and copies, thereof furnished by the Owner as well as all drawings, tracings,reproducibles, plans, specifications design calculations etc. prepared by the contractor forthe purpose of execution of works covered in or connected with this contract shall be theproperty of the Owner and shall not be used by the contractor for any other work but are tobe delivered to the Owner at the completion or otherwise of the contract.

6.f.2. The Contractor shall keep and maintain secrecy of the documents, drawings etc.issued to him for the execution of this contract and restrict access to such documents,drawings etc. and further the Contractor shall execute a SECRECY agreement from each orany person employed by the Contractor having access to such documents, drawings etc.The Contractor shall not issue drawings and documents to any other agency or individual

without the written approval by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge.

6.f.3. Contractor will not give any information or document etc. concerning details of the workto the press or a news disseminating agency without prior written approval from Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge. Contractor shall not take any pictures on site without written approvalof Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

7. PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S BILLS

7.1. Payments will be made against Running Accounts bills certified by the Owner'sEngineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge within 15 days from the date of receipt of the bill.




Page 19

7.2. Running Account Bills and the final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor togetherwith the duly signed measurements sheet(s) to the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Chargeof the Owner in quadruplicate for certification. The Bills shall also be accompanied byquantity calculations in support of the quantities contained in the bill along with cementconsumption statement, actual/theoretical, wherever applicable duly certified by theEngineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge of the Owner.

7.3. All running account payments shall be regarded as on account payment(s) to be finallyadjusted against the final bill payment. Payment of Running Account Bill(s) shall notdetermine or affect in any way the rights of the Owner under this Contract to make the finaladjustments of the quantities of material, measurements of work and adjustments ofamounts etc.etc. in the final bill.

7.4. The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date ofcompletion of the work fully and completely in all respects. If the Contractor fails to submitthe final bill accordingly Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may make the measurement anddetermine the total amount payable for the work carried out by the Contractor and such a

certification shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The Owner/Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may take the assistance of an outside party for taking themeasurement, the expenses of which shall be payable by the Contractor.

7.5. Payment of final bill shall be made within 30 days from the date of receipt of the certifiedbill by the Disbursement Section of the owner.

7.6 Wherever possible, payment shall be tendered to the contractor in electronicmode (e-payment) through any of the designated banks. The contractor will complyby furnishing full particulars of Bank acount (mandate) to which the payments will berouted. Owner reserves the right to make payment in any alternate mode also.

7.a. MEASUREMENT OF WORKS

7.a.1. All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works will be jointly measured bythe representative of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and the Contractor or theirauthorised agent progressively. Such measurement will be recorded in the MeasurementBook/Measurement Sheet by the Contractor or his authorised representative and signed intoken of acceptance by the Owner or their authorised representative.

7.a.2. For the purpose of taking joint measurement, the Contractor/representative shall bebound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge. If,however, they are absent for any reasons whatsoever, the measurement will be taken by theEngineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his representative and the same would be deemed to

be correct and binding on the Contractor.

7.a.3. In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement for any item of work, the latestIndian Standard Specifications shall be followed. In case of any further dispute on the samethe same shall be as per the certification of an outside qualified Engineer/ Consultant. Sucha measurement shall be final and binding on the Owner and the Contractor.

7.b. BILLING OF WORKS EXECUTED

The Contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge of the work giving abstract and detailed measurement for the variousitems executed during a month, before the expiry of the first week of the succeeding month.The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall take or cause to be taken the requisite




Page 20

measurements for the purpose of having the bill verified and/or checked before forwardingthe same to the disbursement office of the Owner for further action in terms of the Contractand payment thereafter. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall verify the bills within 7days of submission of the Bill by the Contractor.

7.c. RETENTION MONEY

10% of the total value of the Running Account and Final Bill will be deducted and retained bythe Owner as retention money on account of any damage/defect liability that may arise forthe period covered under the defect liability period clause of the Contract free of interest. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of completioncertificate connected in any way with the equipment or materials supplied by contractor or inworkmanship shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own expense failing whichthe Owner shall be entitled to rectify the said damage/defect from the retention money. Anyexcess of expenditure incurred by the Owner on account of damage or defect shall bepayable by the Contractor. The decision of the Owner in this behalf shall not be liable to bequestioned but shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Thus, deduction towards retention money is applicable only in case of job/works contracts(civil, mechanical, electrical, maintenance etc.) where any damage or defect may arise infuture (i.e. within 12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at thetime of issue of completion certificate.7.d. STATUTORY LEVIES

7.d.1 The Contractor accepts full and exclusive liability for the payment of any and all taxes,duties, octroi, rates, cess, levies and statutory payments payable under all or any of thestatutes etc.

Variations of taxes and duties arising out of the amendments to the Central / State

enactments, in respect of sale of goods / services covered under this bid shall be to HPCL’saccount, so long as :

They relate to the period after the opening of the price bid, but before the contractedcompletion period ( excluding permitted extensions due to delay on account of thecontractors, if any) or the actual completion period, whichever is earlier; and

The vendor furnishes documentary evidence of incurrence of such variations, in addition tothe invoices/documents for claiming Cenvat /Input Tax credit, wherever applicable.

All contributions and taxes for unemployment compensation, insurance and old agepensions or annuities now or hereafter imposed by Central or State Governmentalauthorities which are imposed with respect to or covered by the wages, salaries or othercompensations paid to the persons employed by the Contractor and the Contractor shall beresponsible for the compliance with all obligations and restrictions imposed by the LabourLaw or any other law affecting employer-employee relationship and the Contractor furtheragrees to comply and to secure the compliance of all sub-contractors with all applicableCentral, State, Municipal and local laws, and regulations and requirements of any Central,State or Local Government agency or authority.

Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless from any liability or penaltywhich may be imposed by the Central, State or Local authorities by reason of any violationby Contractor or sub-contractor of such laws, regulations or requirements and also from all

claims, suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising under, growingout of, or by reasons of the work provided for by this contract by third parties, or by Central




Page 21

or State Government authority or any administrative sub-division thereof. The Contractorfurther agrees that in case any such demand is raised against the Owner, and Owner has noway but to pay and pays/makes payment of the same, the Owner shall have the right todeduct the same from the amounts due and payable to the Contractor. The Contractor shallnot raise any demand or dispute in respect of the same but may have recourse torecover/receive from the concerned authorities on the basis of the Certificate of the Ownerissued in that behalf.

7.d.2. The rates quoted should be inclusive of all rates, cess, taxes and sales tax on workscontracts wherever applicable. However, wherever the sales tax on works contract isapplicable and is to be deducted at source, the same will be deducted from the bills of theContractor and paid to the concerned authorities. The proof of such payments of sales taxon works contract will be furnished to the contractor.

7.d.3. Income tax will be deducted at source as per rules at prevailing rates, unlesscertificate, if any, for deduction at lesser rate or nil deduction is submitted by the Contractorfrom appropriate authority.

7.d.4 The contractor shall provide accurate particulars of PAN number as required, underSection 206AA of Income Tax Act 1961.

7.d.5 The contractors having their ‘tax residency status’ outside India shall provide Tax Residency Certificate (TRC), issued by Government of the Country or thespecified territory where the Contractor is a Resident. Rule 21AB of the Income TaxRules, 1962 has prescribed the contents of a TRC. This would enable the Corporationto deduct tax at source by duly considering the ‘treaty relief’, if any, under DoubleTaxation Avoidance Agreement (DTAA) entered into between GOI and the respectivecountry/specified territory in which the Contractors’ ‘tax residency status’ is currentlyin force.

7.e. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR

7.e.1. The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required forconstruction including tools, tackles, construction plant and equipment for the completionand maintenance of the works except the materials viz. steel and cement which may beagreed to be supplied as provided elsewhere in the contract. The contractor shall makearrangement for procuring such materials and for the transport thereof at their own cost andexpenses.

7.e.2. The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if sodesired by the Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature. The Contractor shall

procure materials of ISI stamp/certification and supplied by reputed suppliers borne onDGS&D list.

7.e.3. All materials procured should meet the specifications given in the tender document.The Engineer-in-charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test certificates for anybatch of any materials procured. Before procuring, the Contractor should get the approval ofEngineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for any materials to be used for the works.

7.e.4. Manufacturer's certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by theContractor. If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge any testsare required to be conducted on the material supplied by the Contractor, these will be

arranged by the Contractor promptly at his own cost.




Page 22

7.f. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER

7.f.1. Steel and Cement maybe supplied by the Owner to the contractor against payment byContractor from either godown or from the site or within work premises itself and thecontractor shall arrange for all transport to actual work site at no extra cost.

7.f.2. The contractor shall bear all the costs including loading and unloading, carting fromissue points to work spot storage, unloading, custody and handling and stacking the sameand return the surplus steel and cement to the Owner's storage point after completion of job.

7.f.3. The contractor will be fully accountable for the steel and cement received from theOwner and contractor will give acknowledgement/receipt for quantity of steel and cementreceived by him each time he uplifts cement from Owner's custody.

7.f.4. For all computation purposes, the theoretical cement consumption shall be consideredas per CPWD standards.

7.f.5. Steel and Cement as received from the manufacturer/stockists will be issued to thecontractor. Theoretical weight of cement in a bag will be considered as 50 Kg. Bagsweighing upto 4% less shall be accepted by the contractor and considered as 50 Kg. perbag. Any shortage in the weight of any cement bag by more than 4% will be to the Owner'saccount only when pointed out by the Contractor and verified by Engineer-in-Charge/Site inCharge at the time of Contract or taking delivery.

7.f.6. The contractor will be required to maintain a stock register for receipt, issuance andconsumption of steel and cement at site. Cement will be stored in a warehouse at site.Requirement of cement on any day will be taken out of the warehouse. Cement issued shallbe regulated on the basis of FIRST RECEIPT to go as FIRST ISSUE.

7.f.7. Empty cement bag shall be the property of the Contractor. Contractor shall bepenalised for any excess/under consumption of cement. The penal rate will be twice the rateof issue of cement for this work.

7.f.8. All the running bills as well as the final bills will be accompanied by cementconsumption statements giving the detailed working of the cement used, cement receivedand stock-on-hand.

7.f.9. The Contractor will be fully responsible for safe custody of cement once it is receivedby him and during transport. Owner will not entertain any claims of the contractor for theft,loss or damage to cement while in their custody.

7.f.10. The contractor shall not remove from the site any cement bags at any time.

7.f.11. The Contractor shall advise Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-charge in writing atleast 21days before exhausting the Cement stocks already held by Contractor to ensure that suchdelays do not lead to interruptions in the progress of work.

7.f.12. Cement shall not be supplied by the Owner for manufacturing of mosaic tiles, precastcement jali and any other bought out items which consume cement and for temporary works.

7.f.13. Cement in bags and in good usable condition left over after the completion of workshall be returned by the contractor to the Owner. The Owner shall make payment to theContractor at the supply rate for such stocks of cement they accept and receive. Any refused




Page 23

stock of cement shall be removed by the Contractor from the site at his cost and expenseswithin 15 days of completion of the work.

8. PAYMENT OF CLAIMS AND DAMAGES

8.1. Should the Owner have to pay money in respect of claims or demands as aforesaid theamount so paid and the costs incurred by the Owner shall be charged to and paid by theContractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to dispute or question the right of theOwner to make such payments notwithstanding the same may have been without hisconsent or authority or in law or otherwise to the contrary.

8.2. In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of Workmen's Compensation Act,1923, or other Acts, the Owner is obliged to pay Compensation to a Workman employed bythe Contractor in execution of the works, the Owner will recover from the Contractor theamount of compensation so paid and without prejudice to the rights of Owner under the said Act. Owner shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it fromthe security deposit or from any sum due to the Contractor whether under this contract or

otherwise. The Owner shall not be bound to contest any claim made under Section 12 subsection (1) of the said Act, except on the written request of the Contractor and upon hisgiving to the Owner full security for all costs for which the owner might become liable inconsequence of contesting such claim.

8.a. ACTION AND COMPENSATION IN CASE OF BAD WORK

If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge that any work has been executedwith bad, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials, or that any materials orarticles provided by the Contractor for execution of the work are not of standardsspecified/inferior quality to that contracted for, or otherwise not in accordance with the

contract, the CONTRACTOR shall on demand in writing from the Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge or his authorised representative specifying the work, materials or articlescomplained of, notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed, certifiedand paid for, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct the work so specified and at his owncharge and cost and expenses and in the event of failure to do so within a period of 15 daysof such intimation/ information/knowledge, the Contractor shall be liable to paycompensation equivalent to the cost of reconstruction by the Owner. On expiry of 15 daysperiod mentioned above, the Owner may by themselves or otherwise rectify or remove andre-execute the work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles complainedof as the case may be at the risk and expenses in all respects of the Contractor. Thedecision of the Engineer-in- Charge/ Site-in-Charge as to any question arising under thisclause shall be final and conclusive and shall not be raised as a dispute or shall be

arbitrable.

8.b. INSPECTION AND AUDIT OF CONTRACT AND WORKS

This project is subject to inspection by various Government agencies of Government ofIndia. The contractor shall extend full cooperation to all the Government and other agenciesin the inspection of the works, audit of the Contract and the documents of Contract Bills,measurements sheets etc. etc. and examination of the records of works and make enquiriesinterrogation as they may deem fit, proper and necessary. Upon inspection etc. by suchagencies if it is pointed out that the contract work has not been carried out according to theprescribed terms and conditions as laid down in the tender documents and if any recoveriesare recommended, the same shall be recovered from the contractors running bills/final




Page 24

bill/from ordered/suggested Security Deposit/retention money. The Contractor shall not riseany dispute on any such account and the same shall not be arbitrable.

9. CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER

The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and employee of theOwner, also the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and his staff against all the actions,proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses, whatsoever arising out of or in connectionwith the works and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses which maybe made against the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any failure by the Contractorin the performance of his obligations under the contract. The Contractor shall be liable for orin respect of or in consequence of any accident or injury to any workmen or other person inthe employment of the Contractor or his sub-contractor and Contractor shall indemnify andkeep indemnified the Owner against all such damages, proceedings, costs, charges andexpenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.

10. Price reduction

i) In case of any delay in completion of the work beyond the CDD, the Owner shall beentitled to be paid Price Reduction by the Contractor. The price reduction shall beinitially at the rate of 0.5% (half percent) of the total contract value for every week ofthe delay subject to a maximum of 5% of the total contract value. The pricereductionshall be recovered by the Owner out of the amounts payable to theContractor or from any Bank Guarantees or Deposits furnished by the Contractor orthe Retention Money retained from the Bills of the Contractor, either under thiscontract or any other contract.

ii) The Contractor shall be entitled to give an acceptable unconditional BankGuarantee in lieu of such a deduction if Contractor desires any decision on a request

for time extension.

iii) Once a final decision is taken on the request of the Contractor or otherwise, theprice reduction shall be applicable only on the basic cost of the contract and on eachfull completed week(s) of delay (and for part of the week, a pro-rata price reductionamount shall be applicable).

iv)This final calculation of price reduction shall be only on the value of theunexecuted portion/quantity of work as on the CDD.

v) Contractor agrees with the Owner, that the above represents a genuine pre-estimate of the damages which the Owner will suffer on account of delay in the

performance of the work by Contractor. The Contractor further agrees that the pricereduction amount is over and above any right which owner has to risk purchaseunder Clause 12.4 and any right to get the defects in the work rectified at the cost ofthe contractor.

11. DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER OR TERMINATION OF WORK CONTRACT BYOWNER

The Contractor shall remain responsible and liable to make good all losses or damages thatmay occur/appear to the work carried out under this Contract within a period of 12 monthsfrom date of issue of the Completion Certificate and/or the date of Owner taking over thework, whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall issue a Bank Guarantee to the Owner in thesum of 10% of the work entrusted in the Contract, from any Scheduled Bank (other than a




Page 25

Co-Operative Bank) acceptable to the Owner and if however, the Contractor fails to furnishsuch a Bank Guarantee the Owner shall have right to retain the Security Deposit andRetention Money to cover the 10% of the Guarantee amount under this clause and toreturn/refund the same after the expiry of the period of 12 months without any interestthereon. (Please refer to clause 4. Deposits).

12. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT12.1 The owner may terminate the contract at any stage of the construction for reasons to berecorded in the letter of termination.

12.2 The Owner inter alia may terminate the Contract for any or all of the following reasonsthat the contractor

a) has abandoned the work/Contract.

b) has failed to commence the works, or has without any lawful excuse under theseconditions suspended the work for 15 consecutive days.

c) has failed to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace the work within 15days after receiving from the Engineer written notice that the said materials or work werecondemned and/or rejected by the Engineer under specified conditions.

d) has neglected or failed to observe and perform all or any of the terms acts, matters orthings under this Contract to be observed and performed by the Contractor.

e) has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance of the Engineer's instructions tothe contrary sub-let any part of the Contract.

f) has acted in any manner to the detrimental interest, reputation, dignity, name or prestige of

the Owner.

g) has stopped attending to work without any prior notice and prior permission for a period of15 days.

h) has become untraceable.

i) has without authority acted in violation of the terms and conditions of this contract and hascommitted breach of terms of the contract in best judgement of the owner.

j) has been declared insolvent/bankrupt.

k) in the event of sudden death of the Contractor.

12.3 The owner on termination of such contract shall have the right to appropriate theSecurity Deposit, Retention Money and invoke the Bank Guarantee furnished by thecontractor and to appropriate the same towards the amounts due and payable by thecontractor as per the conditions of Contract and return to the contractor excess money, ifany, left over.

12.4 In case of Termination of the contract, Owner shall have the right to carry out theunexecuted portion of the work either by themselves or through any othercontractor(s) at the risk and cost of the Contractor. In view of paucity of time, Ownershall have the right to place such unexecuted portion of the work on any nominated




Page 26

contractor(s). However, the overall liability of the Contractor shall be restricted to 100% of the total contract value.

12.5 The contractor within or at the time fixed by the Owner shall depute his authorisedrepresentative for taking joint final measurements of the works executed thus far and submitthe final bill for the work as per joint final measurement within 15 days of the date of jointfinal measurement. If the contractor fails to depute their representative for jointmeasurement, the owner shall take the measurement with their Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge or any other outside representatives. Such a measurement shall not be questionedby the Contractor and no dispute can be raised by the Contractor for purpose of Arbitration.

12.6 The Owner may enter upon and take possession of the works and all plant, tools,scaffoldings, sheds, machinery, power operated tools and steel, cement and other materialsof the Contract at the site or around the site and use or employ the same for completion ofthe work or employ any other contractor or other person or persons to complete the works.The Contractor shall not in any way object or interrupt or do any act, matter or thing toprevent or hinder such actions, other Contractor or other persons employed for completing

and finishing or using the materials and plant for the works. When the works shall becompleted or as soon thereafter the Engineer shall give a notice in writing to the Contractorto remove surplus materials and plant, if any, and belonging to the Contractor except asprovided elsewhere in the Contract and should the Contractor fail to do so within a period of15 days after receipt thereof the Owner may sell the same by public auction and shall givecredit to the contractor for the amount realised. The Owner shall thereafter ascertain andcertify in writing under his hand what (if anything) shall be due or payable to or by the Ownerfor the value of the plant and materials so taken possession and the expense or loss whichthe Owner shall have been put to in procuring the works, to be so completed, and theamount if any, owing to the Contractor and the amount which shall be so certified shallthereupon be paid by the Owner to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the Owner, as thecase may, and the Certificate of the Owner shall be final and conclusive between the

parties.

12.7 When the contract is terminated by the Owner for all or any of the reasons mentionedabove the Contractor shall not have any right to claim compensation on account of suchtermination.

13. FORCE MAJEURE

13.1. Any delay in or failure of the performance of either part hereto shall not constitutedefault hereunder or give rise to any claims for damage, if any, to the extent such delays orfailure of performance is caused by occurrences such as Acts of God or an enemy,expropriation or confiscation of facilities by Government authorities, acts of war, rebellion,

sabotage or fires, floods, explosions, riots, or strikes. The Contractor shall keep records ofthe circumstances referred to above and bring these to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing immediately on such occurrences. The amount of time, ifany, lost on any of these counts shall not be counted for the Contract period. Once decisionof the Owner arrived at after consultation with the Contractor, shall be final and binding.Such a determined period of time be extended by the Owner to enable the Contractor tocomplete the job within such extended period of time.

13.2. If Contractor is prevented or delayed from the performing any of its obligations underthis Agreement by Force Majeure, then Contractor shall notify Owner the circumstancesconstituting the Force Majeure and the obligations performance of which is thereby delayedor prevented, within seven days of the occurrence of the events.




Page 27

14. ARBITRATION

14.1 All disputes and differences of whatsoever nature, whether existing or which shall atany time arise between the parties hereto touching or concerning the agreement, meaning,operation or effect thereof or to the rights and liabilities of the parties or arising out of or inrelation thereto whether during or after completion of the contract or whether before afterdetermination, foreclosure, termination or breach of the agreement (other than those inrespect of which the decision of any person is, by the contract, expressed to be final andbinding) shall, after written notice by either party to the agreement to the other of them andto the Appointing Authority hereinafter mentioned, be referred for adjudication to the Sole Arbitrator to be appointed as hereinafter provided.

14.2 The appointing authority shall either himself act as the Sole Arbitrator ornominate some officer/retired officer of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited(referred to as owner or HPCL) or a retired officer of any other Government Companyin the Oil Sector of the rank of Ch. Manager & above or any retired officer of theCentral Government not below the rank of a Director, to act as the Sole Arbitrator to

adjudicate the disputes and differences between the parties. The contractor/vendorshall not be entitled to raise any objection to the appointment of such person as theSole Arbitrator on the ground that the said person is/was an officer and/orshareholder of the owner, another Govt. Company or the Central Government or thathe/she has to deal or had dealt with the matter to which the contract relates or that inthe course of his/her duties, he/she has/had expressed views on all or any of thematters in dispute or difference.

14.3 In the event of the Arbitrator to whom the matter is referred to, does not acceptthe appointment, or is unable or unwilling to act or resigns or vacates his office forany reasons whatsoever, the Appointing Authority aforesaid, shall nominate anotherperson as aforesaid, to act as the Sole Arbitrator.

14.4 Such another person nominated as the Sole Arbitrator shall be entitled toproceed with the arbitration from the stage at which it was left by his predecessor. Itis expressly agreed between the parties that no person other than the AppointingAuthority or a person nominated by the Appointing Authority as aforesaid, shall actas an Arbitrator. The failure on the part of the Appointing Authority to make anappointment on time shall only give rise to a right to a Contractor to get such anappointment made and not to have any other person appointed as the Sole Arbitrator.

14.5 The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to the Agreement.

14.6 The work under the Contract shall, however, continue during the Arbitrationproceedings and no payment due or payable to the concerned party shall be withheld(except to the extent disputed) on account of initiation, commencement or pendency of suchproceedings.

14.7 The Arbitrator may give a composite or separate Award(s) in respect of each dispute ordifference referred to him and may also make interim award(s) if necessary.

14.8 The fees of the Arbitrator and expenses of arbitration, if any, shall be borne equally bythe parties unless the Sole Arbitrator otherwise directs in his award with reasons. The lumpsum fees of the Arbitrator shall be r 40,000/- per case for transportation contracts and r 60,000/- for engineering contracts and if the sole Arbitrator completesthe arbitration including his award within 5 months of accepting his appointment, he




Page 28

shall be paid r10,000/- additionally as bonus. Reasonable actual expenses forstenographer, etc. will be reimbursed. Fees shall be paid stage wise i.e. 25% onacceptance, 25% on completion of pleadings/documentation, 25% on completion ofarguments and balance on receipt of award by the parties

14.9 Subject to the aforesaid, the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 orany statutory modification or re-enactment thereof and the rules made thereunder, shallapply to the Arbitration proceedings under this Clause.

14.10 The Contract shall be governed by and constructed according to the laws in force inIndia. The parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts situated at“Mumbai” for all purposes. The Arbitration shall be held at “Mumbai” and conducted inEnglish language.

14.11 The Appointing Authority is the Functional Director of Hindustan PetroleumCorporation Limited.

15. GENERAL

15.1. Materials required for the works whether brought by the or supplied by the Owner shallbe stored by the contractor only at places approved by Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge.Storage and safe custody of the material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

15.2. Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge connected with the contract, shall beentitled at any time to inspect and examine any materials intended to be used in or on theworks, either on the site or at factory or workshop or at other place(s) manufactured or atany places where these are laying or from which these are being obtained and the contractorshall give facilities as may be required for such inspection and examination.15.3. In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification supplied by the

owner as is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out inaccordance with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications donot cover the same the work should be carried out as per standard Engineering practicesubject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

15.4. Should the work be suspended by reason of rain, strike, lockouts or other cause thecontractor shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of the work and at his ownexpense shall make good any damages arising from any of these causes.

15.5 The contractor shall cover up and protect from injury from any cause all new work alsofor supplying all temporary doors, protection to windows and any other requisite protectionfor the whole of the works executed whether by himself or special tradesmen or sub-

contractors and any damage caused must be made good by the contractors at his ownexpense.

15.6 If the contractor has quoted the items under the deemed exports, then it will be theresponsibility of the contractor to get all the benefits under deemed exports from theGovernment. The Owner’s responsibility shall only be limited to the issuance of required certificates. The quotation will be unconditional and phrases like “subject to availability ofdeemed exports benefit” etc. will not find place in it.




Page 29

16. Integrity Pact : Effective 1st September, 2007, all tenders and contracts shall comply withthe requirements of the Integrity Pact (IP) if the value of such tenders or contracts is r1.00crore & above. Failure to sign the Integrity Pact shall lead to outright rejection of bid.

# 17. Grievances of parties participating or intend to participate in the tender shall beaddressed in writing to the officer designate of the Grievance Redressal Cell wherethe tenders have to be submitted within the stipulated period. Detailed mechanism ofGrievance Redressal is available on the HPCL website.



Tips for successful bid submission in the HPCL e-Procurement platform

As you are aware, HPCL has rolled out an improved e-Procurement platform

for floating of tenders and receiving bids. The new system is much simplerand user friendly compared to the previous system. However, it has been

observed in few instances that vendors upload large files as addendum to

their bid document and try to submit bid only in the last 2-3 hours from the

due date resulting in some of the bids not getting submitted within the due

time. The following tips are given below to avoid such pitfalls and help is

successful bid submission in the new system:

1. Please start the process of bid preparation well in advance and do not

wait for the last moment to get DC validated/prepare the technical

response and priced bid. In the current system the process mimics the

manual bidding procedure. You have to enter all the necessary

technical responses in the form provided (ie upload necessary

documents like old PO copies, vendor declaration form etc and answer

the question) and thereafter generate the technical response pdf

document, which is saved in your local machine. In the next form, you

have to enter the prices/taxes and generate the priced bid pdf

document which is also saved in your local machine. Please note

that during this process we are not capturing any data entered by

you in the server. These documents have to be digitally signed and

uploaded by you. Only after you submit the digitally signed document,

the same is stored in the server in encrypted format. The main points

are:

a. You can go to the forms any number of times and generate

any number of Technical response pdf and priced bid pdf

before you finally submit the same – (however system will

allow only for uploading the latest generated document).

b. You may generate both the documents, digitally sign and

keep it ready, in case you want to submit the same only onlast day. However, it is recommended, not to wait till the

last day as traffic congestion, unforeseen connectivity issue

or other aspects may adversely affect your bid submission

chances.

2. Please note that the larger your bid size, the lesser are the chances of

successful bid submission in the system. This is not for the fact that

server cannot receive big files, but for the fact that traffic congestion,

connectivity speed, type of connection and other aspects adversely

affect the time taken for upload of large files. So it may happen that



the session times out before the entire upload is completed. The main

points are:

a. Please keep the size of the bid document within 40-45 MB

(max). To keep the size of the bid document low, you must

scan all the documents in low resolution, preferably 150-200 dpi wherein the data should be legible. Further please

scan in grayscale and not color to reduce file size.

b. Whenever there is a requirement to upload supporting

documents like old PO copies, or credential document,

please focus on the main requirement. If the PO copies are

meant to arrive at value of jobs executed, you may scan

only the first page(where name of client is given) and last

page of the PO(where value of PO) is mentioned. This way

you can avoid unnecessarily inflating the size of bid

document.

c. Pl ensure to upload all such supporting documents in your

bid which can have a financial implication while arriving at

the net delivered cost as such documents cannot be

received at the technical evaluation stage.

3. In case of any doubt regarding the tender, you may raise queries to

clarify the same before due date. Please remember that for every

tender, the query start date and query end date is specified in the

first page of the tender document. You cannot raise any query

after the query end date is over, so it makes sense to start the bid

preparation process early.

4. And finally, if you have any issue during the bid preparation

process, pl get in touch with e-procurement helpdesk at 022-

42100111 and seek help. However, you must seek help at least

two to three days (min) in advance so that if there is really any

issue, we have time to remedy the same. You will realize that,

helpdesk can do very little if you are calling up helpdesk on the

last day/last hour.






15000119-HB-11577::Agreed Terms and conditions

Description Bidder Response Bidder File

1.Please confirm that you have not been banned ordelisted by any Government or Quasi Governmentagencies or PSUs. If you have been banned, then thisfact must be clearly mentioned here.

S 1~~CONFIRMED~~ E

2.Technical

A. Acceptance of technical specifications and scopeof supply as per tender enquiry. S23~~CONFIRMED~~ E2

B. In case of deviation, confirm that the same hasbeen highlighted separately.

S34~~CONFIRMED~~ E3

3.Firm Prices- Confirm quoted prices will remainFIRM Fixed till complete execution of the order.

S45~~CONFIRMED~~ E4

4.Delivery period- Confirm acceptance of deliveryperiod as indicated in the tender documents.

S56~~CONFIRMED~~ E5

5.Delayed Delivery OR Liquidated Damages-Confirm your acceptance for delayed delivery clauseas per the attached Terms and Conditions.

S67~~CONFIRMED~~ E6

6.Payment terms- Confirm acceptance of paymentterms as specified in the attached Terms &Conditions.

S78~~CONFIRMED~~ E7

7. Retention money/Performance Bank Guarantee-Confirm acceptance of the Guarantee clausementioned in the attached Terms and Conditions andthat Performance Bank Guarantee will be furnished

accordingly.

S89~~CONFIRMED~~ E8

8.Part Order Quantity- Confirm acceptance of Part order quantity.

S91 ~~CONFIRMED~~ E9

9.Validity- Confirm that your offer is valid for 90Days from due date OR extended due date of thetender.

S1 11~~CONFIRMED~~ E1

10.Terms and condition- Confirm acceptance of attached instructions to Bidders and Terms andconditions.

S1112~~CONFIRMED~~ E11

11.PSU- Indicate whether you are a Govt. Of India Undertaking.

S1213~~NOT AAPLICABLE~~ E12

12. for NSIC units

i)Are you registered with NSIC (copy of registrationto be attached if applicable )

S1415~~NOT APPLICABLE~~ E14

ii)NSIC Registration Certificate is valid up to(provide date)

13.In case of delay in Delivery beyond contractualDelivery Date

i)In case of delays in supplies beyond contractualdelivery date for reasons attributable to Bidder, pleaseconfirm that any increase in Statutory levies / duties / taxes will be to Bidder's account and any decreaseshall be passed on to Owner.


ii)In case of delay in Delivery due to reasonsattributable to Bidder, please confirm that any new oradditional taxes and duties imposed after contractualdelivery dates shall be to Bidders account.


14.Confirm acceptance of ARBITRATION clause. S192 ~~CONFIRMED~~ E19

IMPORTANT NOTES :i) In case of any contradiction, the information filledby the Bidders in this Agreed Terms & Conditionsshall prevail.ii) Offers deviating from our Commercial Terms, andOffers not accompanied by this Agreed Terms &Conditions are liable for rejection without recourse tothe Bidder.

15.Contact Details

Name of Contact person S2223~~DEO BHANDARI~~ E22

Contact no (Mobile no) S2324~~9223900416~~ E23

Land line Phone number S2425~~27631221~~ E24

Phone number residence S2526~~27635661~~ E25

Fax number

Address of Regd office S2728~~PLOT NO.D295 TTC MIDC ARETURBHE NAVI MUMBAI 400705~~ E27

16.ENTITY STATUS INDICATE YOURCOMPANY'S ENTITY STATUS

Corporate Entity-Public Limited, Private Limited OrNon-body Corporate -Individuals-Hindu UndivideFamily-Partnership Firms- Association of Persons(AOP)

Reverse charges on Service tax is applicable to this

tender. In respect of the Services covered by thistender, where the bidder is Individual /HUF/Firm/AOP,the service tax liability will bedischarged by Vendor and HPCL in the ratio of 50:50.Hence bidder should mention his entity status alongwith necessary proof supporting the same. Pleaseconfirm.




Below 03 clauses are meant only for bidders who areIndividual /HUF/Firm/AOP/Partnership/Proprietorship

Incase you have quoted service tax as inclusive,please confirm if you have included your portion of service tax only. (please respond as Yes or No)

Incase you have quoted service tax as inclusive,please confirm if you have included your portion of service tax along with HPCL portion of servicetax.(please respond as Yes or No)

Incase you have quoted service tax seperately, pleaseconfirm whether it is your portion or HPCL's portion.(please respond as 'Quoted Vendors Portion only' or

'Quoted Full Service tax considering Vendors portionand HPCL portion'


BELOW THREE CLAUSES ARE MEANT ONLYFOR MSE PARTIES.

MSE :-If your company/establishment is registeredas a Micro or Small enterprise under MSMED Act,2006, please upload a notorized copy of the MSERegistration Certificate.

Please confirm you will submit the original MSEregistration certificate If required by HPCL.

HPCL will follow the purchase policies as per theprevailing guidelines of Govt of India

Towards service tax / VAT quoted , bidder would berequired to submit tax invoice (with service tax / VATregistration number) at the time of payment (in case job is awarded to the bidder).

S394 ~~CONFIRMED~~ E39

Irrespective of taxes/duties quoted by bidder in the

tender, bidder shall be fully responsible for thepayment of any and all taxes, duties, octroi, rates,cess, levies and statutory payments payable under allor any of the statutes etc. as per clause 7d of GeneralTerms & Conditions of the tender.


Bidders to note that in case you are not quoting taxesextra in the on line tax sheet (ie incase bidders quotedrates are inclusive of taxes ) , no statutory variationswill be granted.

S4142~~NOTED~~ E41

Please confirm that you have read & understood theclauses pertaining to taxes & duties in e Tender Termsof the tender and have quoted accordingly. Statutoryvariation in taxes / duties shall be governed by clause7 d of General Terms & Conditions of the tender.


Upload technical documents wherever applicable

Upload Copy of PAN Card S4445~~ENCLOSED~~ E44 PAN_ NOCPL-Colour.PDF

Upload copy of Service tax registration no S4546~~ENCLOSED~~ E45 ST Certificate NEW 2013-14.pdf

Upload supporting document if necessary






:L. J I

!{

,\L [ ;:\ I< i.J F C ISE .\f\...U e l.! O \

FORM 8T-2

Shri'/Ms. NARMADA OFFSHORE CONSTRUCTIONS PVT LTDD-29/5 ,TTC IND

c l

AREA,MIDC TURBHE ,KRISHI UTPANNA BAZAR,THANE,MAHARASHTRA,400705

h : v l ~ g

I

undertaken to comply with the conditions prescribed in Chapter V of the Finance Act,1994

read with the Service Tax Rules, 1994,and any orders issued thereunder is hereby certified to

have been registered with the Central Excise Department.The Service Tax Code and other

details are mentioned hereunder.

Name: NARMADA OFFSHORE CONSTRUCTIONS PVT LTD

Address:

D-29/5 TTC

INDL AREA,MIDC TURBHE,KRISHI UTPANNA BAZ

AR, THAN E MAHARASHTRA,400705

PAN

No:

AAACN2334D

Name

as in

PAN:

NARMADA OFF SHORE CONSTRU CTIONS PVT LTD

Nature

of

r e ~ i s t r a t i o n : Registration of a single premise

Service Tax Code Registration AAACN2334DST001

Number) :

Taxable services: Construction services other than residential complex, including commerciallindustrial

buildings or civil structures , Transport

of

goods by road/goods transport agency ser·

vice, Cleaning.services

ADDRESS OF BUISNESS PREMISES

Name Of

Premises/Building:

NARM

ADA

OFFSHORE Flat / Door / Block No: 0-29/5

. CONSTRUCTIONS PVT

LTD

Road / Street / Lane : TTC INDl AREA

Village

/ Area

I

Lane: MIDC TURBHE

Block I Taluk I

Sub-Division

I KRISHI UTPANNA BAZAR

Post Office:

Town:

City I

District: THANE State

I U...nion ~ i t o f

MAHARASHTRA

PIN:

400705

Phone

Number·1;

27631224

Phone Number-2

:

Fax

Number-1:

27635661

Fax Number 2 :

Email Address: narmadaoff

[email protected]

Premises Code: SG0207000t

This Certificate is issued incorporating the changes intimated by the applicant and the

previous

certi

ficate of registration bearing Registration NumberAAACN2334DST001 Issued on 12 12 2007 stand can

celled.

SiNo Types of

Services

-

Accounting

Codes

Tax Collecti on Other Receipts

Penalties

(Interest)

I

onstruction services other than residential complex, 00440290 00440291 00441399

including commercial /industrial buildings or civil struc

tures

2 Transport

of

goods by roadigoods transport agency 00440262 00440263

00441392

service

3 Cleaning services

00440318 00440319

00441434

CESSES

1 EDUCATION CESS 00440298 00440299 00441486

2 SECONDARY AND HIGHER EDUCATION CESS 00440426 00440427

00441487

~ ~ R C K A R T A

tMlCfROI)

Superintendent (Regn.)

~ ~ - v ~ - n

C . 11

.

n i

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



timate

the

department.

2

In case the

registrant starts billing from other premises other

than

those mentioned

above),

he

shall intimate

the department.

3. These

intimations

and any

other information which registrant

wishes

to bring to

the

notice of

the

department

can be submitted on-line by the registrant after logging on to web-site.

I

4 This registration cert ificate is

not transferable

.

5.

List of Accounting Codes

is

Enclosed.

These

may invariably

be

furnished

in the

challan at

the

time of making

I

payment of

service tax .

r

j

Date

of

Issue

of

Original ST-2 : 12 12 2007

Date

of

Last

Amendment of

ST-2 :

04 12 2013

entral Excise

Officer

With Official Seal

CC

bye-mail)

To

1) The Pay

And Accounts Officer

SERVICE TAX-II MUMBAI)

2) The Superintendent of Central Excise GROUP-VII)

~

~ C K R T

Jm:r4fqj

Q \ f t C P ~

~ u p e i n t e

Regn.)

>; ; f i ~ l 1 l J . ~ V T

Service Tax

on

-V . Mumbai-U

________________________

_______

Page of -






15000119-HB-11577::DeviationForm

SNo Section Name Tender Clause Deviation clause

1 S1~~

NIL~~ ~~

NIL~~ ~~

NIL~~ E1~~15000119 HB 11577HPCLVALUESEND~~






15000119-HB-11577::Taxes And Extras

Srl. No. Header/ Schedule/ LineDescription

TaxnExtras Formula Quoted Currency

Ref. Tax-1

Header Level Taxes ~~Swacch Bharat Cess:0.5% on (Base Value) , SERVICETAX COMPOSITE:5.6% on (Base Value) ~~ S0H~~-

,H~~~~111 0.5 TP:BR,@21 5.6 TP:BR, SERVICE TAX

COMPOSITE@CO:0,4,~~

Y - E0

PRICE SCHEDULE

1 Excavation upto 1.5m depth ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S1L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E1

2 RCC (M30) 1:1:3 ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S2L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E2

3 RCC (M20) 1:1.5:3 ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S3L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E3

4 Reinforcement Steel hysd bar ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S4L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E4

5 Rubble stone soling ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S5L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E5

6 Erection of ML Pumps ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S6L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E6

7 Alignment of ML Pump ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S7L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E7

8 Inst of 12" CS Pipe ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S8L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E8

9 Inst of 12" T-Strainer 900# ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S9L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E9

10 Erection of Basket Filters ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S10L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E10

11 Inst of Lube Oil Skid ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S11L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E11

12 Breaking of RCC/PCC ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S12L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E12

13 Commisioning Assistance ~~As Per Line: Ref. Tax-1~~ S13L~~H,1~~~~REF~~ Y INR E13~~15000119-

HB-

11577HPCLVALUES

END~~



Tender No. : 15000119-HB-11577 Tender Published On : 25-Nov-2015 14:23

Line Details Of Tender

Srl.No.

Line Description UOM Quantity Mandatory

PRICE SCHEDULE Manadatory: Yes

1 Excavation upto 1.5m depth Cubic Meters 80 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Earthwork in excavation upto a depth of 1.5m to the required profile for all types of soil (including hard rock etc.) including shoring, strutting, de-watering, if any,disposal of total excavated earth inside/outside the plant premises as directed by the Engineer-in-charge including all labour, transportation vehicles, loading & unloading, spreading,

compacting for all leads & lifts etc. complete as per the detailed technical specifications and as directed by the site-in-charge. The surplus earth to be dumped out of the plant premises ata place which is not objectionable to any private / Govt. Agencies and HPCL is not responsible for any issues arising due to dumping of surplus earth outside plant premises.

2 RCC (M30) 1:1:3 Cubic Meters 40 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Supplying, providing, mixing and placing in position R.C.C of mix ratio 1:1:3 (M30) as per specification and drawings with 20 mm downsize crushed gradedcoarse aggregates for pump foundation (of Approx. 8.3m X 2.4 m) for all depths and heights, providing provision for foundation bolt pockets, including bailing out water manually,compacting, mechanical mixing & vibrating, finishing, curing complete as per Technical specifications (Group : 2) mentioned in the tender and as directed by the site-in-charge. Rateincludes providing required good quality MS shuttering also. ( Reinforcement steel to be paid separately)

3 RCC (M20) 1:1.5:3 Cubic Meters 60 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Supplying, providing, mixing and placing in position R.C.C of mix ratio 1:1.5:3 (M20) as per specification and drawings with 20 mm downsize crushed gradedcoarse aggregates for RCC Driveways, columns, Pipe supports, equipment foundation, cable trenches , RCC covers & other cast-in-situ works etc. for all depths and heights, includingmechanical mixing & vibrating, 15 Days curing complete as per Technical specifications (Group : 2) mentioned in the tender and as directed by the site-in-charge. Rate includesproviding required good quality MS shuttering also. ( Reinforcement steel to be paid separately)

4 Reinforcement Steel hysd bar Metric Ton 8 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Supplying, transporting, stacking, straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending, placing, tying in position (including providing 16 Gauge annealed binding wire) Highyield strength deformed ( HYSD ) TMT bars of FE 415 (thermo mechanically treated bars) conforming to IS 1786 ( latest edition / revision ) as reinforcement steel as per drawings,technical specifications (Group : 2) mentioned in the tender & as directed by the site-in-charge. (The rate shall be applicable for any height & depth).

5 Rubble stone soling Cubic Meters 5 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Supplying & laying Rubble stone soling to the required grade and profile in buildings' flooring, road works, paving, ramps etc. using approved quality black stoneproperly hand packed & filling up the crevices with smaller size stones followed by stone dust and watering so as to fill all voids for thickness as shown on drawing, including rollingwith power roller etc. Complete as per the Technical specifications (Group : 5) mentioned in the tender document and as advised by the site-in-charge.

6 Erection of ML Pumps Each 1 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Erection of Mainline Pumps with electric motor and base frame (2650 KW, Approx Weight : 26 Tone): Taking delivery of Owner's supplied materials/equipmentswithin a radius of 600 meters, unpacking of pump & motor including all assesories, loading, unloading, handling, hauling, shifting / transporting within station premises, placing on pre-constructed foundations in mainline pump house by means of required capacity cranes, assembling together all sub-assemblies, leveling of base frame with specified size sims & wedgespacking, Grouting of foundation Bolt & Grouting of Pump Base Frame (Approx.size= 7.9 Meter X 2.1 Meter) by Non Shrink Grout Mix SHRINKKOMP-30 or FOSROCCONBEXTRA-GP2,Cleaning and flushing by water, Draining, Checking, including supply of all necessary manpower, etc.including supply of all necessary tools & tackles, LiftingEquipments, dressing and making good of the foundation and completing the work in all respects in accordance with the relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction,specifications and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC. Total estimated consumption of Grouting Material may be considered as aprox. 450 Bags (20 Kg each). HPCL will issue aprox.120 bags of grout material as free issue material. Balance qty to be supplied by contractor as part of scope of this item. Approved Makes for Non Shrink Grout Mix are SHRINKKOMP-30 & FOSROC CONBEXTRA-GP2.

7 Alignment of ML Pump Each 1 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Alignment of Main Line Pump: Alignment of pump & motor without piping and alignment of pump & motor with piping. Job to be done by mean to latestinstrument including preparation & submission of document for alignment work as per direction of Engineer-in-charge & Including supply of all manpower, necessary tools & tackles,Alignment equipment's, consumables like SS Sims etc., completing the work in all respects in accordance with the relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction,specifications and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC.

8 Inst of 12" CS Pipe Meters 20 Yes DESCRIPTION => FABRICATION, ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF PIPING (Size 12''): Receiving and taking over of all Owner supplied materials fromOwner's designated place(s) of issue, transportation including loading, unloading, handling from Owner's designated place(s) of issue to Contractor's own stock yard(s)/ work site(s)/ work shop(s) including arranging all necessary intermediate storage area(s) thereof, as required; supply of all materials (except those specified subsequently in SOR), equipment,consumables as defined in Contractor's scope of supply and their transportation to the work site(s); performing all above ground/buried piping fabrication works including cutting, edgepreparation (inclusive of grinding the edges of pipes, fittings, flanges etc. to match with the matching edges of uneven/ different thickness wherever required), fit up, bending, pre-heating wherever required, welding, threading etc.; erection of pipes of all types and thickness over sleepers, overhead on racks and at all elevations; hook-up with equipment nozzles;installation of all type of valves up to size of 1.5" NB, all types of inline and online instruments such as pressure/thermal safety valves (other than those covered separately), fittings of all sizes i.e. flow tees, insulating joints, LR bends, pig signallers, elbows, reducers, tees, 'o' lets, flanges, blind flanges spectacle blinds, tapping's for pressure gauges, thermowells, hosesand hose couplings of all sizes, if applicable, sample connections, flame arrestors as applicable, vents and drains required for process and hydrotesting purposes etc. including fixing of all types of gaskets (including gaskets for RTJ flanges ), bolts, studs and nuts of all sizes; fabrication of strainers of sizes up to 1.5", carrying out non-destructive testing such asmagnetic particle/ liquid penetration including performance of radiographic inspection of piping of all types, sizes, thickness including providing or hiring of all necessary equipment,supply of all consumables including radiographic films and whatever else even though not expressly mentioned but required to perform the work as per specification and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge etc. as required; hook-up with existing piping/pipeline installed by others as per drawings wherever required; cleaning and flushing by water/ compressed air,carrying out hydrostatic test, pneumatic test, valve functional test and any other type of testing as specified, de-pressurising, dewatering, drying by compressed air if applicable; cutting/ rebeveling (as required), pre-commissioning and providing commissioning assistance to commissioning Contractor/Agency for process piping and commissioning of non-process pipingif applicable; clean-up and restoration of site, preparation of as built drawings, documents and project records; transportation of surplus free issue materials to Owner's designatedplace(s); completing all works in all respects as per the AFC drawings, specifications, standards and other provisions of Contract and instruction of Engineer-in- Charge.This job is specially for Installation of Suction & Discharge arm of main line pump as per above specification for Carbon Steel Process Piping of size 12 INCH 14.3 mm thk., 900#API 5L Gr. X-42 PSL1, Bevel End

9 Inst of 12" T-Strainer 900# Each 1 Yes DESCRIPTION => Installation of 12" Dia ANSI 900 # T-Strainers : Taking delivery of Owner's supplied materials/equipment's within a radius of 600 meters, unpacking including allassesories, shifting / transporting within station premises, installation of T-type Strainer in suction arm including all welding ,cutting, testing as per specification provided in item no 8for FABRICATION, ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF PIPING (Size 12'') including cleaning & flushing inside/outside the strainer & mech (SS304) provided,Nutbolting providing necessary manpower,tools tackles ,equipment's ,completing the work in all respects in accordance with the relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction,specifications and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC. Supply of T-type strainer is in scope of HPCL and detail about Strainer are Body -ASTM A234 GR WPB, SMLS,Mesh-SS304,Plug-ASTM A105,Bottom Flange-ASTM A105,Gasket-SOFT IRON OVAL RING,Bolt-ASTM A 193 GR B7,Nut-ASTM A 194 GR 2H,Class -900 # ,End connectionThickness-MATCHING TO CONNECTING PIPE Etc.

10 Erection of Basket Filters Each 1 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Installation of Basket Filters (Approx Weight : 600 Kg) : Shifting basket filter from the designated place of Owner's supplied materials within a radius of 600meters, equipment's, shifting / transporting within station premises, placing on pre-constructed foundations, assembling together all sub-assemblies, leveling, alignment, grouting,cleaning and flushing by water, draining, checking, testing, pre-commissioning, dressing and making good of the foundation and completing the work in all respects in accordance withthe relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction, specifications and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC.

11 Inst of Lube Oil Skid Each 1 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Installation of Lube Oil Skid ( Approx Weight -2750 Kg) : Shifting Lube Oil Skid from the designated place of Owner's supplied materials within a radius of 600meters, equipment's, unpacking of Lube Oil skid including all assesories,shifting / transporting within station premises, placing on pre-constructed foundations, assembling together allsub-assemblies, all releated piping job , leveling, alignment, grouting, cleaning and flushing by water, draining, checking, testing, pre-commissioning, dressing and making good of thefoundation and completing the work in all respects in accordance with the relevant drawings, manufacturer's installation instruction, specifications and instructions of Site Engineer / EIC.

12 Breaking of RCC/PCC Cubic Meters 60 Yes

DESCRIPTION => Breaking of RCC/PCC : Breaking RCC/PCC to the required profile disposal of total broken debris inside/outside the plant premises as directed by the Engineer-in-charge including all labour, transportation vehicles, loading & unloading, spreading, compacting for all leads & lifts etc. complete as per the detailed technical specifications and asdirected by the site-in-charge. The surplus debris to be dumped out of the plant premises at a place which is not objectionable to any private / Govt. Agencies and HPCL is notresponsible for any issues arising due to dumping of surplus debris outside plant premises.

13 Commisioning Assistance Man Day 50 Yes



DESCRIPTION => Testing, Trial Run and Commisioning of equipment : Providing Skilled Manpower assistance for Testing ,Trial Run and Commissioning assistance of main Linepump & Lube oil Pump as & when required basis in all shift ( 24 Hr Basis) in all the days as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. Hand tools and instruments will be provided byHPCL. Each manday will be 9 hrs. which will include stagergerd lunch break. Deployment of more than one manpower may be required at a time in each shift.